Blog

Founder of Majapahit – Majapahit was one of the last Hindu-Buddhist kingdoms in the archipelago and existed in the 13th to 16th centuries. Historically, Majapahit was considered one of the largest empires with an area covering almost the entire archipelago.

Majapahit was founded in 1293 by its first king, Raden Wijaya, the son-in-law of Kertanegara and the last king of Singasari. So, who is the founder of the Majapahit Kingdom? Check out the explanation about Raden Wijaya, the first king of the Majapahit Kingdom!

History of Raden Wijaya, the Founder of Majapahit

Raden Wijaya has the real name Sang Naraya Snggramawijaya. Raden Wijaya’s father was a prince who came from the Sunda Galuh Kingdom named Rakyan Jayadarma. Meanwhile, Raden Wijaya’s mother was Syah Lembu Tal, the granddaughter of Ken Arok, the founder of the Singasari Kingdom.

Both from the mother’s and father’s sides, both of them had Sundanese royal blood flowing and bequeathed it to Raden Wijaya. Raden Wijaya actually had the opportunity to inherit the throne from the Sunda Galuh Kingdom. However, Raden Wijaya preferred to serve where his mother came from, namely the Singasari Kingdom during the reign of King Kertanegara.

Raden Wijaya’s choice to serve in the Singasari Kingdom was certainly not a random decision. Because Raden Wijaya is the son-in-law of Kertanegara, even the love story of Raden Wijaya and the daughter of King Kertanegara was also written in the Negarakertagama and Pararaton books.

In the Negarakertagama book, it is stated that Raden Wijaya married four Kertanegara daughters, namely Gayatri, Jayendradewi, Nerendraduhita and Tribhuwaneswari. The consort chosen from the four daughters was Tribuwaneswari while the other three were Raden Wijaya’s concubines.

However, in the Pararaton Book, it is stated that Raden Wijaya only married two of Kertanegara’s daughters. However, Raden Wijaya also married a princess from the Dharmasraya Kingdom from Sumatra named Dara Petak. Putri Dara Petak was then taken by Raden Wijaya in his expedition called the Pamalayu Expedition in Malay land from 1275 to 1286 AD.

From his marriage to Dara Petak, Raden Wijaya had a son whom he named Jayanegara. However, according to the Sukamerta inscription and the Balawi inscription, Jayanegara was the son of Raden Wijaya and his consort Tribhuwaneswari.

With his concubine, Gayatri, Raden Wijaya had two daughters, namely Dyah Ditarja or also known as Tribhuwana Wijayatunggadewi and Dyah Wiyat or known as Rajadewi Maharajasa.

Jayanegara as the son of Raden Wijaya will then continue his father’s rule as the second king of the Majapahit Kingdom. Meanwhile, Tribhuwana Wijayatunggadewi later became the third ruler in the Majapahit Kingdom.

 

 

The Story of Raden Wijaya Failed to Save Singasari

In 1292 AD there was a rebellion against the Singasari Kingdom which was initiated by the Regent of Gelang-gelang, which is now Madiun, the name of the Regent was Jayakatwang. In the Paranton Book it is narrated that Jayakatwang sent his army named Jaran Guyang to invade the Singasari Kingdom from the north.

Then, King Kertanegara, who knew about Jayakatwang’s plan, ordered his son-in-law, Raden Wijaya, to lead the Singasari troops which aimed to ward off attacks from Jayakatwang’s troops. However, the movement of Jaran Guyang’s troops was only a tactic from Jayakatwang alone.

When sent by King Kertanegara, Raden Wijaya indeed succeeded in defeating Jaran Guyang’s troops. However, Jaran Guyang was a small troop sent by Jayakutwang as a diversion so that the defense in the capital Singasari, which is now Malang, was empty of troops.

The clever Jayakatwang immediately sent a larger army to Singasari. Because most of Singasari’s military forces led by Raden Wijaya never returned, Jayakatwang’s second army finally succeeded in occupying Singasari’s palace, even King Kertanegara was killed in the rebellion.

On the other hand, the troops led by Raden Wijaya had scattered after learning that Singasari had fallen and Kertanegara had been killed in the rebellion. Together with his loyal followers and a few remaining troops, Raden Wijaya then fled into the forest around the Brantas River.

Because of Jayakatwang’s clever tactics, Raden Wijaya failed to protect the Singasari Kingdom from the rebellion. After Jayakatwang paralyzed Kertanegara, Raden Wijaya also served Jayakatwang with a grudge to return to the throne.

Prior to being accepted by Jayakatwang, Raden Wijaya previously fled with his three best friends named Nambi, Sora and Ranggalawe. When they fled, Raden Wijaya and his best friend were received by Arya Wiraraja.

While in hiding, Raden Wijaya also received advice and assistance from Arya Wiraraja to return to Singaraja on the pretext that he wanted to serve Jayakatwang. Upon Raden Wijaya’s acknowledgment, Jayakatwang accepted it and even gave him an area called the Tarik Forest. After getting the area, Raden Wijaya also cleared the Tarik Forest and turned it into a village. Raden Wijaya also found a maja fruit which has a very bitter taste. From this bitter fruit, Raden Wijaya also gave the village the name Majapahit.

Despite admitting that he would serve, Raden Wijaya still had a grudge against Jayakatwang and had an opportunity when the Mongol troops sent by Kublai Khan came to punish Kertanegara. However, because Kertanegara had died, 20,000 troops brought by the Mongols were invited by Raden Wijaya to attack Jayakatwang again.

Raden Wijaya admitted that if he won, then he would submit to Kublai Khan. But after successfully getting rid of Jayakatwang, Raden Wijaya immediately attacked the Mongol troops. The sudden attack then made the Mongol troops choose to leave Java at that time.

Building the Majapahit Kingdom and the Death of Raden Wijaya

It was from the area given by Jayakatwang that a village named Majapahit formed by Raden Wijaya emerged and eventually became a large empire. The village is near the Brantas River, whose water flows through several areas in East Java, such as Blitar, Malang, Tulungagung, Jombang, Kediri and even Mojokerto. The Brantas River itself is the second longest river in Java after the Bengawan Solo.

After successfully defeating Jayakatwang with the Mongol troops and expelling the Mongol troops, Raden Wijaya then declared the establishment of the Majapahit Kingdom in 1293 with the center of government in Mojokerto. When declaring the Majapahit Kingdom, Raden Wijaya then became the first king with the title he got was Kertajasa Jayawardhana from 1293 to 1309.

The Majapahit Kingdom which was founded by Raden Wijaya also managed to develop into a large empire and had a large territory because Raden Wijaya was good at winning the hearts of the people from Daha and Tumapel.

Raden Wijaya’s loyal followers also played a role in establishing the Majapahit Kingdom and were later appointed by Raden Wijaya as high-ranking officials in the government of the Majapahit Kingdom.

However, the reign of Raden Wijaya was complicated by the presence of someone named Mahapati who liked to pit one against the other. Because of this pitting against Mahapati, then the war between the Majapahit troops and Ranggalawe and other friends of Raden Wijaya ensued.

In a battle involving Raden Wijaya’s friends, Ranggalawe and Lembu Sora were then killed. Then according to the Negarakertagama Book, Raden Wijaya died in 1309 after 16 years of ruling and controlling the Majapahit Kingdom.

To commemorate Raden Wijaya as the founder of the Majapahit Kingdom, Raden Wijaya was later made into a temple in Atahpura with a Jina statue and in Simping with a Shiva statue. after Raden Wijaya died, his son named Jayanegara took over the throne.

The Majapahit Kingdom then became more victorious and developed when it was led by Raden Wijaya’s grandson, Hayam Wuruk with the title Sri Rajasanagara who served as king from 1350 to 1389. Palapa.

It was during the era of Hayam Wuruk and Gajah Mada that the Majapahit Kingdom later became one of the great empires that succeeded in controlling most of the archipelago and other areas around the archipelago.

 

 

The Majapahit Kingdom Enters Its Heyday

The Majapahit Empire entered its heyday when Hayam Wuruk together with Gajah Mada ruled. Both have the same role in building and bringing Majapahit in its heyday. Gajah Mada as mahapatih succeeded in quelling all rebellions and vowed to unite the regions in the archipelago.

Hayam Wuruk together with Gajah Mada ruled and led the Majapahit Kingdom for 39 years and had succeeded in making the Majapahit banner visible in all parts of the archipelago to the Malacca peninsula.

Gajah Mada then issued a Palapa Oath which he carried out in areas in the archipelago such as Sumatra, Peninsular Malaysia, Kalimantan, Sulawesi, Maluku, the Nusa Tenggara Islands, Papua, Tumasik or now Singapore, to the Philippine Islands.

The decline of the Majapahit Empire

After successfully achieving its heyday in the 14th century, the Majapahit Empire slowly began to weaken. The weakening of Majapahit began when Hayam Wuruk died in 1389. Because Hayam Wuruk passed away, a struggle for the throne in the Majapahit Kingdom ensued. So that several areas in Majapahit, especially in the northern part of Sumatra and the Malay Peninsula, also took advantage of the opportunity to become independent.

After independence, the Malay Peninsula became the territory of the Ayutthaya Kingdom until the emergence of the Sultanate in Melaka which was occupied by the Ming Dynasty. Meanwhile, Hayam Wuruk’s own heir, a crown princess named Kusumawardhani, married her cousin, Prince Wikramawardhana.

Hayam Wuruk also had a son from his concubine named Wirabhumi and claimed the right to the throne left by Hayam Wuruk. After Hayam Wuruk no civil war ensued, the war is known as the Paregreg War which is estimated to have occurred in 1405 to 1406. The war took place between Wirabhumi against Wikramawardhana and was won by Wikramawardhana, while Wirabhumi who lost was then captured and sentenced to beheaded. The civil war that occurred also made the Majapahit Kingdom’s control over the area under its control weaken.

Wirakramawardhana then ruled the Majapahit Kingdom until 1426 and was succeeded by his daughter, Ratu Suhita in 1426 to 1447. Then the Majapahit reign continued until at the end of the 14th and early 15th centuries, the influence of Majapahit’s power diminished in the archipelago.

Majapahit’s power began to wane when Muslim traders and propagators entered the archipelago and at the same time, a new trading empire that embraced Islam emerged, namely the Malacca Sultanate.

The western region of Majapahit began to collapse and Majapahit no longer had the power, especially to stem the growth and resurgence of the Malacca Sultanate. On the other hand, the areas controlled by Majapahit were slowly starting to break away from Majapahit one by one.

It is estimated that Majapahit began to experience a decline in power in 1478 or 1400 saka. These years are considered to be the normal time for the change of dynasty and the end of the reign in 1527.

The end of the golden age of the Majapahit Kingdom is also written on a candrasengkala which reads “sna ilang kretaning bumi” meaning the earth’s prosperity is gone. It is said that the Majapahit Kingdom was getting weaker after the Islamic Empire came to power and getting stronger in the early 16th century and finally defeated the remnants of the Majapahit Kingdom.

In brief, here are some of the factors that caused the Majapahit Empire to begin to collapse and decline, including the following.

1. Many areas that were previously controlled by the Majapahit Kingdom finally broke away.
2. There is a conflict involving regarding the struggle for the throne.
3. Paregreg war or civil war.
4. The influence of Islam in Java was growing, mined by the increasingly powerful Islamic kingdoms.

In 1527 the power of the Majapahit Kingdom actually ended after Majapahit surrendered under the troops of Sultan Trenggana who came from the Sultanate of Demak. Since then, the remaining areas were taken over by the Sultanate of Demak.

Names of Kings, Titles, and Years of Rule of the Majapahit Kingdom

1. Raden Wijaya has the title Kertarajasa Jayawardhana, served from 1293-1309
2. Jayanagara has the title Sri Maharaja Wiralandagopala Sri Sundarapandya Dewa Adhiswara, served from 1309-1328
3. Tribhuwana Wijayatunggadewi with the title Sri Tribhuwanattunggadewi Maharajasa Jayawisnuwardhani served from 1328-1350
4. Hayam Wuruk had the title Maharaja Sri Rajasanagara, served from 1350-1389
5. Wikramawardhana with the title Bhra Hyang Wisesa Aji Wikrama served from 1389-1429
6. Suhita has the title Prabu Stri Suhita served from 1429-1447
7. Kertawijaya title Sri Maharaja Wijaya Prakramawardhana or Brawijaya I, served from 1447-1451
8. Rajasawardhana has the title Rajasawardhana Sang Sinagara who served from 1451-1453
9. Girishawardhana has the title Girishawardhana Dyah Suryawikrama who served from 1456-1466
10. Singhawikramawardhana has the title Sri Adi Suraprabhawa Singhawikramawardhana Gripati Pasutabhupati Ketubhata served from 1466-1468
11. Bhre Kertabhumi with the title of Brawijaya V and served in 1468-1478
12. Girindrawardhana with the title Prabhu Natha Girindrawardhana Dyah Ranawijaya served from 1474-1498

There were twelve kings who ruled and once led the Majapahit Kingdom with their respective titles that each king earned. From every title owned by the king of Majapahit has its own meaning.

Like the title Brawijaya which is considered attached to the rulers of Majapahit. Apart from the two kings who have the title Brawijaya, there are also other figures whose names are considered attached to this title, namely Dyha Ranawijaya, the son of Rajasawardhana.

 

 

That is an explanation of the figure of the founding figure of the Majapahit Kingdom as well as the first king of the kingdom, Raden Wijaya. Also accompanied by a little explanation about how Raden Wijaya built Majapahit until finally Majapahit entered its heyday until a period of decline caused by several factors, one of which was civil war.

The material for this Majapahit kingdom is listed in history books which Sinaumed’s can learn more about from history books which present similar material. Sinaumed’s can buy these history books at sinaumedia, as #FriendsWithoutLimits. sinaumedia always provides various books for Sinaumed’s. So what are you waiting for? Buy and own the book right now!

Recommended Books & Articles Related to the Founder of the Majapahit Kingdom

Founder of the Game of Football in Indonesia – Who doesn’t know football? This sport, which is the favorite of the majority of men, has many fans around the world. You can feel the excitement in big tournaments like the World Cup, European Cup, European Champions League, even the Indonesian League. Of course it’s interesting to discuss football. But there’s nothing wrong with getting to know the founders of football in Indonesia first.

Football in Indonesia

There is no literature that mentions exactly when football started to enter Indonesia. However, most references state that the game of football began to enter the archipelago after the game was created in its home country, namely China.

In the 2nd or 3rd century BC, during the Han Dynasty to be precise, the people there played by dribbling a ball made of leather. After being led, the ball is kicked into a small net. The same game is also played in Japan under the name Kemari.

This game then spread throughout the world with rules that have been adapted to the times and needs. Until the birth of football as we know it today.

Football in Indonesia began to be competed in an organized manner since the colonial era of the Dutch East Indies government. At that time, there were many inter-regional football matches in each city, especially in Java. Not just a match, but already in the form of competition.

The organization that overshadowed football at that time was called the Nederlandsch Indische Voetbal Bond (NIVB). Then in 1927, this organization changed its name to Nederlandsch Indische Voetbal Unie (NIVU). This organization certainly existed before the formation of the Indonesian Football Association (PSSI) as we know it today.

In 1930, football organization figures in the country gathered to discuss the establishment of a national football organization that had ideals in accordance with the aspirations of the Indonesian people. It should be noted, the game of football in that era could be used as a moment to organize resistance against the Dutch government.

The organizations participating in the association come from various regions. Starting from Voetbalbond Indonesische Jakarta (VIJ) from Jakarta, Bandoengsche Indonesische Voetbal Bond (BIVB) from Bandung, Yogyakarta Mataram Football Association (PSM) from Jogjakarta, Vortendlandsche Voetbal Bond Solo (VVB), Madionsche Voetbal Bond (MVB) from Madiun, Indonesische Voetbal Magelang (IVBM), to Soerabajasche Indonesische Voetbal Bond (SIVB) from Surabaya.

Founder of the Game of Football in Indonesia

Before we discuss further, it is very necessary to distinguish between the originators of the sport of Indonesian football and the founders of national football bodies throughout Indonesia. The originator of Indonesian football is not known exactly who brought it to Indonesia for the first time. While the establishment of the PSSI football organization can be known easily.

Maybe you think that the founder of Indonesian football was an athlete. No, Sinaumed’s. The founder of Indonesian football is an engineer with an engineering education background.

namely Ir. Soeratin Sosrosoegondo who made his name in history as the founder of Indonesian football. This Jogjakarta-born man studied at the Koningen Wilhelmina School in Jakarta then continued his journey of knowledge to the Higher Technical School in Hecklenburg, near Hamburg, Germany in 1920. He then completed his engineering degree in Civil Engineering in 1920.

Struggle Ir. Soeratin Sosrosoegondo

In 1928, after graduating from Germany, Soeratin decided to return to his homeland. He works for a company engaged in building construction called Sizten en Lausada whose head office is in Jogjakarta.

At the Dutch-flagged company, Soeratin was the only Indonesian who held a senior position (equivalent to commissioner) there. While working there, he was involved in several projects such as the construction of buildings and bridges in Bandung and Tegal.

Not long ago, the spirit of nationalism that was in Soeratin’s chest became agitated at the sight of Dutch colonialism that was getting worse and worse. This fueled his enthusiasm to unite young people in Indonesia to build resistance efforts together.

He also chose to resign from his established job. He was willing to leave this honorable position to fight for the defense of his nation. This decision is certainly not easy, Sinaumed’s. Because Sizten en Lausada is one of the leading companies.

Soeratin was also active in the realm of movement. On the other hand, he has a hobby of playing soccer. So he wanted to start a movement through football. He made this sport a unifying medium for youth in the country.

He also went to meet several football figures from various cities in Java. He communicated with them clandestinely so as not to be ambushed by the Dutch Police (PID). He went to Jakarta, Bandung, Jogja, Solo, Magelang, Madiun and Surabaya to meet the football figures there.

Gayung was welcomed. These figures agreed to make football a unifying medium for Indonesian youth. A national organization that accommodates the sport of football will be formed.

At the Binnenhof Hotel in the Kramatjati area, Jakarta, Soeratin finalized plans to form the organization. It was stated that Soeri, who is the chairman of the Voetbalbond Indonesische Jakarta (VIJ) Chair, helped Soeratin finalize his concepts.

Organization Formation

The establishment of the organization coincided on April 19, 1930 which was attended by football figures spread across Jakarta, Bandung, Jogjakarta, Magelang, Madiun and Surabaya. At that time, this organization was named Persatoean Sepak Raga Seloeroeh Indonesia or abbreviated as PSSI.

Still at the same congress, Soeratin was appointed as the first chairman of PSSI. He held the leadership of PSSI from 1930 to 1940. He was always elected in eleven elections for the general chairman. Since 1931, PSSI has regularly held national football competitions. At that time, the team consisting of native Indonesians were given verbal instructions not to face the Dutch team.

Then at the PSSI congress in Solo, the name of the sport was changed to football. The organization changed its name to the Indonesian Football Association. For the abbreviation remains PSSI.

During Soeratin’s tenure as chairman of PSSI, the Indonesian national team was able to compete in the 1938 World Cup. However, it was very unfortunate because at that time, FIFA, as the parent organization for world football, only recognized NIVU as Indonesia’s football administrator, so it was on behalf of the Dutch East Indies. However, the Indonesian national team is listed as the first Asian country to appear in the World Cup.

Soeratin’s Resistance

The resistance carried out by Soeratin through the Indonesian football movement is a part of history that only heroes can write about. For his great service, his name was enshrined as a trophy name for a competition for children. Soeratin Cup is the name of the competition.

Because he stopped working, Soeratin set up a business. However, we have not yet received details on what kind of business he is running. However, information emerged that Soeratin had founded a construction company called Balai Karti.

The income that Seratin gets from this business is often used to fill PSSI’s very minimal cash fund. He reached into the pocket of his own pocket.

The struggle carried out by Soeratin was not enough to become the first general chairman of PSSI. After leaving his post, it was reported that he was active as part of the People’s Security Army (TKR) to fight against Dutch colonialism. Soeratin’s role in TKR was no joke. He was entrusted with the position of lieutenant colonel or lieutenant colonel.

When Japan occupied Indonesia until the Dutch came back to Indonesia, the situation was very difficult. His house was also ransacked by the Dutch because they were considered to be resisting.

The Story of Soeratin’s Life and Sacrifice

Soeratin grew up in an educated family. His father, R. Sosrosoegondo, is a teacher at a Kweekschool (teaching school). His father is the author of the book Jawi Language Literature. Such family conditions motivated him to pursue higher education.

Soeratin married RA Sri Woelan who is also the younger sibling of dr. Soetomo, founder of the Budi Utomo organization. Sri Woelan’s role cannot be underestimated in Soeratin’s life journey. She did everything in her power and effort to help her husband’s struggle.

When in a rural situation, for example, she was willing to sell her jewelery so that the activities of the PSSI organization led by her husband could continue. He gave up the budget that should have been for their household needs for the needs of Indonesian football.

Not only that, he is also willing to go down the mountain to help PSSI’s work. Understandably, at that time in 1931, PSSI was competing with NIVU which had previously held a football competition.

Just imagine, Soeratin’s house which is located at Jalan Sangaji 68, Jetis, Yogyakarta is often the place where players stay when PSSI holds matches between football unions. How troublesome is Sri Woelan, she has to prepare bedrooms, bathrooms and food for the players.

If it weren’t for their love for Indonesia, it would be impossible for them to do all of this without self-interest. Even they have to reach their own personal money.

The struggle of RA Sri Woelan did not stop there. At one point, NIVU refused to release Persis and PSIM players who would compete in the next few days. Because, NIVU considered the two teams to be under the auspices of the Dutch East Indies government.

But the tickets for the match were sold out. But none of the players are available. dr. Sahir as the chairman of Persis was confused and complained about this to Soeratin. Hearing this, Sri Woelan and Mrs. dr. Sahir is frantically looking for a soccer player.

They did. The football players were successfully collected. Although the original profession of these players is a hair barber, satay seller, horse cart driver, and gardener.

It didn’t stop there, the two tough women also took responsibility for finding transportation funds for PSIM players who had to travel to Solo. As Soeratin’s life partner, Sri Woelan has dedicated her life to accompany her husband’s struggle. Directly or indirectly, he helped fight for nationalism through the sport of football.

In 1937, Soeratin and his family moved from Jogjakarta to Bandung. Unfortunately, the exact reason for Soeratin’s move cannot be ascertained because there is still a lot of foggy data. Some suspect that he is tired of the conflict between PSIM and Persis, who are fighting each other for control of PSSI. Then he handed over the daily leadership of PSSI to Dr. Soeratman Erwin who was in Solo.

News about Soeratin returned to the air after he was elected as Honorary Chairman. This position seems to be an honorary position only. Because nothing Soeratin can do is functional. Even though he served as honorary chairman, he could do nothing and had no direct influence on PSSI’s organizational practices.

Soeratin Becomes a Soldier

When Japan entered control of the homeland, everything changed, PSSI was vacuumed. PSSI seems lost. Soeratin disappeared again. Reportedly not heard at all. Until a year after Indonesia’s independence, faint news about Soeratin’s whereabouts began to be heard.

At that time, in 1946, Soeratin looked older than his late 40s. He is thin and his body slightly bent. Even so, this posture did not reduce his authority as a lieutenant colonel. Since then, people have believed that he was the head of an arms factory in West Java during the revolution.

He is predicted to become a soldier at the age of 44 years. This age is not the right time to join the army. However, it was his qualified knowledge as a German-graduated engineer that might have sent his military career so fast that he became a lieutenant colonel. But this is still a hypothesis.

No wonder, he got the responsibility of taking care of the weapons department. In West Java, according to a soldier named Herrawan, Soeratin managed eight weapons and dynamite factories spread across the Sukabumi to Garut areas. Still according to Herrawan, Soeratin was not part of the Siliwangi Division, but part of the Army Headquarters in Jogjakarta.

Soeratin’s Old Age

Not many know Soeratin’s subsequent life story. Because at that time, everything was very difficult. So that there is not much attention to each personal character.

After retiring from the military, Soeratin held a high position at the Railways Office. Is the Minister of Transportation of the Republic of Indonesia, Ir. H. Djuanda, who gave the position.

He lives in Bandung. A house with a size of 4 x 6 meters. Actually the building is a car garage on Jalan Lombok 33, Bandung. The car garage was then transformed by Soeratin into a house with a separate bathroom 25 meters away. If it rains, he and his wife get wet.

Somehow the story, it was reported that at that time Soeratin was living with a Dutch wife. Where is RA Sri Woelan? Unfortunately, no documents or data have been found regarding this matter.

Their situation at that time was very difficult. Soeratin is also sickly. Instead of buying medicine, they are grateful enough to meet their daily food needs. They live alone without any children in the house.

The sad period of old age was increasingly evident when newspapers were found which listed Mrs. Soeratin’s name as the winner of the crossword puzzle. In the newspaper, it was written Mevrouw (mistress) Soeratin, Jalan Lombok 33 A.

With this information, it can be said that the life of the first chairman of PSSI and his wife in old age was indeed very difficult. They meet the needs of everyday life by filling out crossword quizzes in the newspaper, sending their answers, hoping to win, get prizes, and share the warmth of old age.

Even when he died, Soeratin was not given special treatment. He was even buried like an ordinary person. There were no cars, gedongan people, dignitaries, and high ranking officials present at his funeral. There were also no military-style salute shots as TKR members.

Respect began to appear in 1962. The PSSI began cleaning his grave and taking care of it.

Conclusion

Sinaumed’s, after reading the explanation above, we know that Soeratin is a German-graduated engineer. This knowledge brought him to the position of commissioner in a leading Dutch construction company. However, he was willing to leave it all, because of the nationalism in his chest rumbling.

He prefers to be active in the movement by establishing PSSI and running a construction business independently. He used his business for family needs and sufficient PSSI cash funds which were very minimal. It’s a shame that Soeratin’s old age was heartbreaking, he fell ill and fell into poverty until he died in a state of being unknown as anyone.

Sinaumed’s, how sad is the old age of a freedom fighter, the founder of Indonesian football, as well as the first Chairman of PSSI. Reading history can lead us to spaces for contemplation so that we can give a deeper meaning to life and appreciate the people of the past. With our best books, sinaumedia is ready to be your #Friends Without Limits.

Author: Mutiani Eka Astutik

Recommended Books & Articles Related to the Founders of the Game of Football in Indonesia

The Founder of the Kingdom of Cirebon – The Unitary State of the Republic of Indonesia (NKRI) as we know it today, has gone through a long history of various kingdoms that have grown and disappeared that are spread across all parts of the archipelago.

These kingdoms had their respective governments under their own sovereign powers which were still traditional. The archipelago as we know it once gave birth to the greatest empires that succeeded in ruling in the Southeast Asian region which is remembered throughout the history of civilization in the Eastern world.

On the main islands in Indonesia, such as Java and Sumatra, many kingdoms were born that played a role in the development of the archipelago’s civilization. This does not include when we mention the small kingdoms spread across the islands and other parts of the archipelago, such as those spread across Kalimantan, Sulawesi, Bali, the Maluku Islands, to Papua.

In the concept of constitutional law, this form of government is called monarchy. This kind of government itself is a form of government that has characteristics in which the leader who holds power gains legitimacy or recognition from the people for his power from the collective belief that the leader or king in power is the incarnation of an almighty figure in human form, it could even be equated with a figure God himself.

Thus, a king who becomes a ruler is usually considered knowledgeable, skilled, and has high charisma which only belongs to himself so that the people consider him a special figure.

If we observe government in the form of a kingdom from the point of view of constitutional law theory, then we can ensure that an empire can be formed as a result of certain elite groups who have succeeded in controlling all the land in the local jurisdiction so that the common people are a class that “rides” on the king. in power.

Because of this power, a king usually controls massive population manganese sources, such as agriculture and animal husbandry, so that the king determines the continuity of the kingdom’s economy while at the same time determining the taxes to be paid by his people.

In carrying out his government, a king must maintain the political stability of his kingdom. Thus, in order to achieve political stability in the kingdom, so that it can avoid disturbing forces, both from within and outside the kingdom, the government formed by a king must also be equipped with equipment in the form of military troops.

Through the formation of a strong military force, the king can secure and protect his kingdom from domestic rebellion by deploying soldiers whose job is to quell conflict while protecting and defending his royal power from outside forces as well as conquering other kingdoms by ordering his troops to go to war.

In governing a kingdom, a king usually has absolute or unlimited power. Any form of command that a king orders is a word that must be recognized as pure truth by his people.

Under these conditions, the highest sovereignty in this form of government is held by a ruling king. In other words, the king is the determinant of the direction of the kingdom itself, while the people are the group that must obey what the king orders.

The power of the ruling king is certainly not limited by time, except for the death of the king himself or a coup by his political opponents. In historical records, kings who have died usually handed over their power over royal government to their descendants, especially the biological sons who were the most mature and had great influence in politics.

Not only that, we can say that in the form of monarchical government itself, the auxiliary power holders who are tasked with helping the king’s work come from a limited group. The nobility came from certain elite groups, especially those from the king’s closest relatives and associates. Thus, in this form of government, class separation will be clearly seen between the elite or nobility and the common people.

The archipelago itself has a long list of royal history that once ruled. The history of the heyday of the kingdoms that once stood in the archipelago itself has experienced a long historical cycle, starting from the pioneering and development stages, glory, to collapse. Kingdoms that have succeeded in building a strong economy, so that they can prosper their people, certainly get a longer term of power than the kingdoms that failed.

Not only from the economic sector that determines the direction of an empire, the development of military forces and foreign policy is also a very important factor in the resilience of an empire. In addition, the character of a king who leads also has a big influence on the continuity of a kingdom. If the king is wise in ruling, then by itself he will strengthen the power he has. Meanwhile, a king who does not have a strong and incompetent character will have the potential to determine the destruction of the kingdom.

Among a series of kingdoms that once spread and ruled over the archipelago, the Kingdom of Cirebon is one of the Islamic-style kingdoms that placed an important milestone in the history of the archipelago, especially in West Java. The Sultanate of Cirebon succeeded in becoming one of the most influential Islamic empires during the 15th to 17th century AD. By ruling the northern mainland of Java, the Cirebon Sultanate had succeeded in reaching its peak of glory almost perfectly.

In this article, we invite Sinaumed’s to find out more about the Cirebon Kingdom, from its founding, glory, to its downfall. In addition, we will also discuss what are the important legacies and key figures during the continuity of this Islamic-style kingdom from the east coast of Java. Here’s the discussion.

Kingdom Location and History

The Cirebon kingdom was an Islamic-style kingdom with a center of power on the north coast of Java Island, where its territory was located between West Java and Central Java. This geographical location is also a bridge between two major cultures: Sundanese and Javanese.

Even though it includes these two cultures, the Cirebon Kingdom was not dominated by just one culture, but had a distinctive culture. In addition, because royal power is based on Islamic religious teachings, this kingdom can also be said to be an empire, where the ruling king is a sultan.

The history of the Cirebon Kingdom originates from the Chronicle of Tanah Sunda and Atja in the Carita Purwaka Caruban Nagari manuscript. The Cirebon kingdom itself originally came from a small hamlet named Caruban (in Sundanese it means mixed) which was built by Ki Gedeng Tapa.

As a bustling coastal area due to being used as a port center, Cirebon is slowly becoming a civilization with a large population. Slowly the Cirebon area became a big city with a bustling population.

Thus the name Caruban is appropriate because there has been a mixture of local residents and immigrants from various ethnic groups, religions, languages, customs, backgrounds and livelihoods that differ from one another. These migrants also visited Caruban with the aim of staying for a long time or simply trading for a specified time.

Over time, many Caruban residents began to make a living as fishermen, so slowly other types of work developed, such as fishing and rebon (small shrimp) along the coast which were then used as raw materials for making shrimp paste.

In addition, other livelihoods were also born, such as in the field of making paste and salt. Because in the end the local people were famous for their shrimp paste production, the water used for making shrimp paste was finally used as the origin of the name “Cirebon”. The word “Cirebon” comes from ” Cai ” which means water and ” Rebon ” which refers to rebon shrimp.

Founder of Cirebon Kingdom

After the death of Ki Gedeng Tapa, Cirebon did not just sit idly by. In its development, Wauntungsang, who was the grandson of Ki Gedeng Tapa, established a more organized government in Cirebon. Since then, Wajuangsang, who was given the title of Prince Cakrabuana, is considered the person who became the Founder of the Cirebon Kingdom. In an effort to establish the seat of government for the Cirebon Kingdom as well as its throne, Wauntungsang built the Pakungwati palace.

Wajuangsang himself is a figure who has a lineage from the throne of the Kingdom of Pajajaran. he was the first son of Sri Baduga Maharaja Prabu Siliwangi and his first wife named Subanglarang (daughter of Ki Gedeng Tapa). From this genealogy, Wauntungsang has two siblings, namely Nyai Rara Santang and Raden Kian Santang, two prominent figures from the Kingdom of Pajajaran.

From the genealogy which states that he is the oldest son, then Wauntungsang should be the rightful successor to the throne of the Pajajaran kingdom. However, because he was a follower of Islam inherited from his mother, his position as crown prince was replaced by his father’s younger brother named Prabu Surawisesa, the son of Prabu Siliwangi’s second wife named Nyai Cantring Manikmayang.

The replacement of the crown prince was due to the fact that the religion embraced by the majority of the population in the Kingdom of Pajajaran was Sunda Wiwitan, Hinduism and Buddhism, while Wauntungsang was a Muslim.

According to Mertasinga’s text, Wauntungsang left the palace due to his disappointment with Prabu Siliwangi’s treatment of his mother. Together with Rara Santang, Wauntungsang decided to leave and eventually form the Cirebon Kingdom in the future. Based on a number of sources, Prince Wauntungsang married two women so he succeeded in having 10 children, namely 8 women and 2 men. Princess Pakungwati, who is the daughter of Nyimas Indang Geulis, finally married Sunan Gunung Jati.

As the first king of the Sultanate of Cirebon and a follower of Islam, Wauntungsang finally made his pilgrimage to the holy land of Mecca. After being advised by Syekh Datuk Kahfi, Wauntungsang and Lara Santang decided to sail to Mecca to perform the pilgrimage. The city of Mecca at that time was under the rule of the Mamluk Sultanate which was centered in Egypt. These two Indonesian nobles lived in Mecca for three months under the guidance and care of Syekh Bayanullah (Syekh Datuk Kahfi’s brother).

While in Mecca, Wauntungsang and Lara Santang each took Arabic names, namely Haji Abdullah Iman and Syarifah Mudaim. In Mecca, Lara Santang decided to marry a nobleman named Syarif Abdullah and have a son, Syarif Hidayatullah, who later became the heir to the influential throne in the Kingdom of Cirebon.

After completing his pilgrimage and returning to his homeland, he began to become a king who actively spread Islam to his people, so that the Cirebon Kingdom slowly grew stronger in Islam. Wajuangsang eventually died in 1529.

The Peak of the Glory of the Cirebon Kingdom

The Cirebon kingdom succeeded in reaching its peak of glory since it was led by one of the nine wali songo (nine major figures who propagated Islam in the archipelago), namely Syarif Hidayatullah or commonly called Sunan Gunung Jati. Not only playing a role in the politics of the Cirebon Kingdom, Sunan Gunung Jati also succeeded in becoming a key figure in the spread and teaching of Islam in Cirebon.

Throughout his reign, Sunan Gunung Jati succeeded in expanding and expanding his territory, to Banten, Sunda Kelapa and Rajagaluh. Conquest after conquest he made based on the aim of expanding the influence of his power, in addition to spreading Islam.

In the economic field, Sunan Gunung Jati was very successful in taking advantage of the geographical location of Cirebon which is perched on the north coast of Java. He opened diplomacy far abroad and succeeded in establishing diplomatic relations with Campa, Malacca, India, China and Arabia. This good diplomatic relationship has brought good results to create a climate for exports and imports of goods and services in the Kingdom of Cirebon with countries that cooperate with it.

In general, there were several factors that led to the superiority of Sunan Gunung Jati’s administration, including:

1. Freeing the Kingdom of Cirebon from the Kingdom of Sunda Pajajaran,
2. Extending the power of the Cirebon Kingdom to half of West Java and Banten,
3. Spread the religion of Islam massively to the population in the region,
4. Build important infrastructure, such as ports, palaces, roads, and mosques,
5. Create a powerful military force.

The Collapse of the Cirebon Empire

The Cirebon kingdom began to face its downfall since being led by Panembahan Ratu II or Prince Rasmi in 1666 AD. At that time, slowly the power of the Cirebon Kingdom began to experience a decline in influence in the areas it occupied. Panembahan Ratu II’s leadership became the turning point for the fall of the Cirebon Kingdom.

The main cause of the downfall of the Cirebon Kingdom was the slander hurled by Sultan Amangkurat I who summoned Panembahan Ratu II to Surakarta. Sultan Amangkurat I alleged that Panembahan Ratu II had conspired with the Kingdom of Banten to harass and overthrow his power in Mataram. From there, a dispute was born between Panembahan Ratu II and Sultan Amangkurat I.

As a result of this dispute, Panembahan Ratu II was exiled until he finally died in 1667 AD in Surakarta. Seeing the power vacuum that enveloped the Cirebon Kingdom, Sultan Amangkurat I took over the remnants of the Cirebon Kingdom’s territory after its fall.

The Mataram Kingdom’s unilateral and arbitrary takeover of the Cirebon Kingdom’s territory eventually sparked the anger of Sultan Ageng Tirtayasa who ruled over the Banten Kingdom. Finally, Sultan Ageng Tirtayasa took the initiative to intervene to resolve the struggle for the remaining territory from the collapse of the Cirebon Kingdom and rescue Panembahan Ratu II’s son who was also exiled by the Mataram rulers.

Since the collapse and division, the Kingdom of Cirebon was finally divided into three parts, each of which was in power led by their respective sultans who succeeded the next throne.

Not only caused by the power struggle within the country between kingdoms that triggered the collapse of the Cirebon Kingdom. The VOC occupation and conquest also slowly sparked conflicts between kingdoms, including the Cirebon Kingdom and the Mataram Kingdom. Through the divide et impera policy or the politics of pitting one against the other, the VOC succeeded in creating conflicts within the archipelago’s kingdoms.

Royal Legacy

The Cirebon kingdom managed to leave some historical traces that we can still find today. Here are some relics of the Cirebon Kingdom.

1. The Kasepuhan Palace was built by Prince Cakrabuana.
2. Kanoman Palace which was founded by Prince Kertawijaya,
3. Kacirebonan Palace,
4. Cirebon Grand Mosque.
5. Tomb of Sunan Gunung Jati.

We have briefly discussed how the Founder of the Cirebon Kingdom succeeded in expanding influence in the history of the archipelago to the founder of the Cirebon kingdom . As one of the largest Islamic empires in the archipelago, the Cirebon Kingdom went through phases of birth, glory, and collapse like other kingdoms that have ever existed.

Meanwhile, we can still trace further how things were at that time through relics, especially in the field of architecture which can still be found today. So, are you interested in knowing more about the history of the founder of the Cirebon kingdom?

If you want to know more about history, especially the history of the founding of the Cirebon kingdom, then you can read books that can be obtained at sinaumedia.com . To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

Author: Savero Aristia Wienanto

Founder of sinaumedia – Who doesn’t know about one of the largest and most complete bookstores in Indonesia, which we know as sinaumedia. Certainly, almost everyone, especially students and university students, have visited this one bookstore. But has it ever crossed your mind, who is the founder of sinaumedia? So, if you are curious about this, in this article we will discuss the history of sinaumedia, who the founders were, and various other things related to the company’s development until now.

So sinaumedia Asri Media is a subsidiary of Kompas sinaumedia which provides various kinds of bookstore networks under the name sinaumedia Bookstores in various regions in Indonesia. This company was founded on February 2, 1970. In the past, sinaumedia started with a small bookstore located in the West Jakarta area. Until 2022, there are already more than 50 stores spread across all regions in Indonesia. sinaumedia Bookstore itself does not only provide various kinds of books, but also school supplies, stationery, sports equipment, musical instruments, and so on.

sinaumedia Company has successfully collaborated with various book publishers, both domestically and abroad. Meanwhile, when viewed from the business group, book suppliers who usually deliver various types of books to sinaumedia stores include sinaumedia Pustaka Utama, sinaumedia Magazine, Elex Media Komputindo, Bhuana Popular Science, Addison Wesley, McGraw, and so on.

On May 9 2015, sinaumedia has launched a new concept and logo. Where this new concept carries the theme New Experience, which means the sinaumedia bookstore concept is divided into rooms or chambers based on various themes. This concept was applied for the first time at the sinaumedia Bookstore in Central Park. Meanwhile, the new logo itself is a logotype with the letter “G” and an inscription sinaumedia which means creativity, flexibility, change, progress, and also the power to provide various kinds of ideas and inspiration in educating the lives of Indonesian people.

Get to know the Founder of sinaumedia: Jakob Oetama

Jakob Oetama is the founder of sinaumedia which used to start from the Kompas Daily company. Where the company has succeeded in bringing the Kompas Group to become one of the number 1 largest media in Indonesia. In 2019, Kompas Daily Newspaper managed to rank fifth in the Top 200 Newspaper In The World version of 4imn.com. If you look at the success of Kompas sinaumedia today, of course it cannot be separated from the struggles and efforts of its founders. For that, let’s take another look at the life journey of the founder of sinaumedia Jakob Oetama.

Comes From a Simple Family

Jakob Oetama was born on September 27, 1931 in Jowahan Village, Borobudur Temple Area, Magelang. Jakob himself was born in a fairly simple family. He is the first child of 13 siblings. His father, Raymundus Josef Sandiyo Brotosusiswa, is a retired public school teacher in Sleman. While the mother named Margaretha Kartonah.

Jakob Oetama successfully completed his basic education and high school education in the Yogyakarta area in 1951.

Following in His Father’s Footsteps Becoming a Teacher

At the beginning of his career, Jakob Oetama decided to pursue a career similar to his father’s profession. Where Jakob worked as a teacher at Mardi Yuana Middle School in Cipanas, Cianjur, West Java. Then after that, Jakob switched to Van Lith Middle School in Jakarta.

In the course of his life, Jakob has also worked as an editor at the Penabur weekly in Jakarta. Before finally he continued his education teaching the Department of History Education and successfully graduated in 1956. After having a graduate education, Jakob, who comes from a Javanese family and has a Catholic background, finally decided to continue his education in Jakarta by majoring in higher education in journalism and graduated in 1959. Then after that Jakob continued his education at Gadjah Mada University by majoring in journalism.

Pursuing a Career as a Journalist

Jakob Oetomo started his journalistic career in 1956. At that time Jakob worked as an editor at the Penabur weekly. Until 1963, Jakob succeeded in establishing Intisari magazine with his business partner who was also a fellow journalist, named PK Ojong. They were originally inspired by the US Reader’s Digest magazine.

Jakob Oetomo, who is usually called JO, succeeded in establishing Kompas Daily on June 28, 1965 together with his earlier colleague named Ojong or Petrus Kanisius (PK). However, Jakob is said to have never given up his identity as a journalist or journalist.

In the eyes of the employees, Jakob is seen as a leader who is “nguwongke” or humanizes and is never proud of his position and status. Jakob Oetomo has always held fast to the transcendental values ​​of humanism instilled in him as the foundation of Kompas sinaumedia. Idealism or philosophy of life has been implemented in every part of Kompas sinaumedia’s business which leads to one goal, namely to educate the life of the Indonesian Nation.

Various Achievements of Jakob Oetomo

In its journey, Kompas Daily has grown from its initial circulation of 4,800 copies in 1965 to around 500 thousand copies in 2014. Even during the era of Suharto’s authoritarian regime which lasted from 1965 to 1998, at that time it was quite oppressive for press freedom and also the media, his personality which is quite calm, polite, simple, and gentle, made Jakob finally succeed in managing a newspaper with national circulation in the midst of repressive conditions.

After a long journey, Kompas managed to reach its circulation peak in 2004, when the daily circulation reached around 530 thousand copies and for the Sunday edition it was 610 thousand copies. In addition, Kompas Daily also managed to get approximately 2.25 million readers. Until 2014, Kompas Daily’s circulation reached 507 thousand, with 66 percent circulating in the Greater Jakarta area.

sinaumedia History

Kompas sinaumedia is a fairly well-known company in Indonesia. The company has had various important events that have become the cornerstones of the journey to success, from its founding to its current development:

1974

This year, the business unit PT sinaumedia Pustaka Utama or GPU was established as a general book publisher. Where the first book published at that time was the novel Karmila by Marga T, which was previously a serial story written in Kompas Daily. The products published by GPU then received a fairly positive response from the public in general. That way, the book publishing business began to expand into various segments, such as recipe books, children’s books, non-fiction books, philosophy books, novels, college books, culture books, science books, and many more.

1985

To meet the growing needs of society related to the diversity of types of books. On January 15, 1985, sinaumedia established a special business unit which is used to publish electronic books as well as computer books. Until then the publication penetrated into comic books. The business unit is named PT Elex Media Komputindo. Then on September 20, 1990, sinaumedia established a business unit called PT sinaumedia Widiasarana Indonesia or Grasindo. Where the business unit is used specifically to publish textbooks, such as textbooks for elementary to secondary education. Then on June 1, 1996, sinaumedia also established the sinaumedia Popular Library or KPG and also the Kompas Book Publishers,

1976

In 1976, Kompas sinaumedia established another business unit called PT sinaumedia Film. At that time, the business unit functioned to work on documentaries and also made feature films. One of the story films that received an achievement was Suci Sang Primadona. Where the film won the Citra Cup, the highest award for Indonesian cinema. But unfortunately, sinaumedia Film did not last long. This is because sinaumedia is unable to compete with other film productions which prioritize entertaining content.

1981

In 1981, sinaumedia also diversified its business beyond its core business by building a hotel business unit. This started with the establishment of PT Grahawita Santika or PT GWS on August 22, 1981. The hotel was established in the Bandung area, precisely on Jl. Sumatra, where the first hotel built was the result of buying Hotel Soeti. Then the hotel was renovated and replaced with the name Hotel Santika Bandung until now. This business unit in the hospitality sector is growing quite rapidly and Hotel Santika is already present in various big cities in Indonesia.

1984

Kompas sinaumedia continues to develop their products by publishing a BOLA section on March 3, 1984 as one of the inserts in Kompas Daily every Friday. For the first time, 412 thousand copies of the Rubik BOLA were printed. Where this amount has been adjusted to the circulation of Kompas at that time. Luckily, the BOLA rubik gets a good response from its loyal readers and advertisers. Based on the idea of ​​Jakob Oetomo, who at that time was the Chief Editor of Kompas, every rubik in Kompas that was liked by readers could be developed into their own publication.

Then 4 years later, in April 1988 to be precise, Rubik BOLA was released from Kompas and stood alone as Tabloid BOLA. This decision was taken by also considering the capabilities of the sports desk at Kompas, which is considered one of the strongest desks due to the support of its journalists. So that this sports rubik is one of the rubik that is very liked by its readers. In its development, the BOLA rubik then penetrated into the form of books and magazines. Not only fixated on the world of soccer, but also penetrated into the health sector with his publications with the theme of Tabloid Senior. Then the tabloid also changed into the Healthy Lifestyle Tabloid.

1987

In 1987, Kompas sinaumedia took over the Sriwijaya Post Daily publishing company in Palembang. At that time, there was an appeal from the Minister of Information of the Republic of Indonesia so that major newspapers could help regional newspapers which were hampered due to problems with SIUPP or Press Publishing Business Permits. Therefore, in 1987 Kompas sinaumedia established the Regional Press Group or Persda business unit which was tasked with helping regional newspapers that needed assistance. Then in 1988, Kompas sinaumedia took over the Swadesi newspaper publishing company whose name was changed to Serambi Indonesia in Banda Aceh. In 1992, Kompas sinaumedia took over the publishing company for the Pos Kupang newspaper and in 1994 sinaumedia again took over the publishing company for the Banjarmasin Post newspaper. Then in the next development,

1988

Kompas sinaumedia resumed business diversification by establishing PT Graha Kerindo Utama or GKU in 1988, as a quality converting tissue company with the Multi and Tessa brands. Along with increasingly fierce competition, GKU wanted a guaranteed supply of paper raw materials so that tissue production remains stable. Therefore, a tissue paper manufacturing factory or paper mill was established. Until the same year that GKU was founded, Kompas sinaumedia took over the weekly newspaper Surya. Where the newspaper was founded by the Pos Kota newspaper publishing company in 1986 and then changed to Harian Pagi Surya.

1996

As the economy and business world in Indonesia developed, in 1996 Kompas sinaumedia decided to establish PT Grahanusa Mediatama whose job was to publish the KONTAN Tabloid. Where the tabloid was published on September 27, 1996. To answer all the needs of readers, in January 2006, the company published a special monthly issue of KONTAN and then on September 27, 2007, again published the KONTAN business and investment daily.

1998

sinaumedia’s business trip arrived at a time when there was a development trend in society which showed a phenomenon of increasing use of the internet network to obtain information. Therefore, Kompas Daily started to make an online version of Kompas Daily. Where at that time the site containing the online version of Kompas Daily had the address http://www.kompas.com. Then in 1998, Kompas Online began to develop into its own business unit and was under the auspices of PT Kompas Cyber ​​Media or KCM. For now, Kompas Online has changed to Kompas.com.

 

1999

In 1999, Kompas sinaumedia published the Kota Warta Daily which aims to provide more specific information for the people of Jakarta and its surroundings, such as Bogor, Depok, Tangerang and Bekasi. At that time, Warta Kota Daily started its publication with a 12-page newspaper which was published every Monday to Saturday. Because the response from readers was quite good, in 2001 they published another Sunday edition of Warta Kota.

The year 2009

Along with the development of technology and also the conditions of the business environment in the media. The print media business is starting to be directed to transform towards the digital era. In this way, the next media figure will be displayed through multi-media, multi-platform and multi-channel. Therefore, in early 2009, television media began to be tried again. Where Kompas sinaumedia Television or KOMPAS sinaumedia TV is one of the company’s media to resume business in television, which began with the establishment of the KOMPAS sinaumedia TV project. The project started its activities by forming a KOMPAS sinaumedia Production whose job is to produce programs that can provide added value to its viewers. So that the program that will be aired has human values, educational values, and social values.

Those are some discussions about the career journey of the founder of sinaumedia and the history of Kompas sinaumedia from year to year.

Founder of Shopee Who doesn’t know the online shopping platform Shopee? Currently, it seems that almost everyone in Indonesia knows the online shopping application Shopee. But, has it ever crossed your mind about who is the figure who plays an important role in becoming the founder of Shopee? Currently, the Shopee marketplace is known as one of the largest marketplaces in Southeast Asia. Shopee’s success in becoming the best marketplace certainly cannot be separated from the intervention of its founders.

In the history of the establishment of Shopee, there are two people who are considered as the founders of Shopee, namely Chris Feng and Forrest Li. Chris Feng is now the CEO or Chief Executive Officer of Shopee. For the concept model itself, Shopee is an e-commerce that uses B2C or Business to Customer business capital.

Currently, Shopee is known as a marketplace that dominates markets in Southeast Asia, such as Indonesia, Singapore, Thailand, Malaysia, the Philippines, and also Taiwan. So, in this article, we will discuss more about Chris Feng, the founder of Shopee. If you are curious about the history of Shopee and the life journey of its founder, watch it until it’s finished.

Shopee Founder Profile: Chris Feng

One of the people who contributed greatly to the development of Shopee has the full name Chris Zhimin Feng. This young man later became known as Chris Feng. He was born in December 1982. Chris Feng is a man from Singapore who is known to have studied at the National University of Singapore and majored in Computer Science.

It is known that Chris Feng received a college scholarship from the Singapore government. Then he became the best graduate at the National University of Singapore and continued his education in America to be precise at Stanford University in the field of Management Science and Engineering.

In his biography, Chris Feng is known to have worked for a long time at the management consulting firm McKinsey in Frankfurt, Germany. At his workplace, Chris Feng spent 7 years and after leaving McKinsey, he then moved to work at Rocket Internet. There, Chris Feng served as Zalora’s Regional Managing Director for the region in Southeast Asia.

In addition, Chris Feng also served as Chief Purchasing Officer at Lazada Southeast Asia. He held this position for about three years. After that, he then joined Garena which is under the auspices of Forrest Li’s SEA Ltd company. It was there that Chris Feng finally took the position of Garena’s Head of Mobile Business.

After one year in the position of Garena’s Head of Mobile Business, Chris Feng together with Forrest Li decided to establish a marketplace called Shopee in 2015. Chris Feng also later served as CEO of Shopee. The marketplace he made was the first to be inaugurated and launched in Singapore. Shopee is also under the auspices of the business group owned by SEA, Ltd which was previously named Garena.

What is Shopee?

Shopee is an online shop or marketplace application (electronic trading platform). By using Shopee, we can more easily shop, explore, and sell any products and services anywhere. Shopee can help sellers more easily offer their wares and assist buyers in making transactions and interacting directly with sellers through its live chat feature.

In addition, Shopee is also an online buying and selling facility that provides various types of products ranging from fashion, snacks, electronics, gadgets, automotive, and many more. Shopee has also been integrated with various logistical and payment supports which aim to make online shopping easier and safer, for both sellers and buyers.

When compared to other marketplace platforms, such as Tokopedia, Bukalapak, OLX, and others, Shopee is one of the youngest marketplace companies and still lacks experience. However, with vigorous promotions, this e-commerce can stand on par with existing competitors.

Shopee Business Form

Initially, Shopee was a platform that carried the concept of being a C2C market or customer for customer. However, then Shopee shifted to a hybrid model of C2C or customer for customer and B2C or business for customer. This has been going on since the launch of Shopee Mall, which is included in Shopee’s online shop platform to distribute products from well-known brands.

So, even though they are both online stores, Shopee is actually slightly different from Tokopedia or Bukalapak. Where most of them only act as stall providers for traders. Whereas Shopee sells their own products. That is why some of the products on Shopee are sent from abroad, for example, China.

When was Shopee Established?

The first time Shopee was launched was in 2005 to be precise in Singapore. Since then, Shopee has started to expand its reach to Thailand, Indonesia, Malaysia, Vietnam, Philippines and Taiwan. Shopee itself stands under the auspices of the SEA Group or previously known as Garena. Where the company was founded by Forrest Li in 2009. Now, Shopee has partnered with more than 70 courier service providers in all its markets. It aims to provide logistics for its users. In addition, Shopee also collaborates with various local logistics and online transportation service providers.

Purpose of Establishing Shopee

The initial goal of having a Shopee marketplace is to make it easier for sellers and buyers to meet in one online shop platform. Not only that, this one marketplace also has the goal of making it easier for buyers to meet their needs, ranging from daily necessities, fashion, electronics, and others. Meanwhile, Shopee’s target market is people who use the internet or social media.

At its inception, Shopee only operated in Singapore. Until not long after, Shopee founder, Chris Feng, began to expand Shopee’s expansion to several countries in Southeast Asia such as Indonesia, Vietnam, Thailand, Taiwan, Malaysia, and others. In Malaysia itself, Shopee has become the third largest electronic marketplace most visited by internet users in 2017. Shopee has even beaten Lelong which is one of the largest electronic e-commerce in Malaysia.

Until 2018, Shopee users from Vietnam had reached 40 million users, where this number competed with Indonesia. Meanwhile in Thailand, the number of Shopee users has reached 28.4 million in 2019. In just a few years, the Shopee marketplace has transformed into one of the largest marketplaces in Southeast Asia and competes with Lazada and Tokopedia.

Shopee in Indonesia

Shopee officially entered Indonesia on December 1, 2015. Chris Feng as the founder of Shopee is targeting Indonesia because it has a very large population in Southeast Asia. In addition, Indonesian people who use the internet are also growing very rapidly and continue to grow every year. Since Shopee was launched in Indonesia, this marketplace has offered a variety of interesting programs to attract more new users in Indonesia.

One program that is quite attractive to Shopee users is the free shipping program. Where the program is still valid today. With the attractive promotions and programs offered by Shopee, it has made it more likely to attract the hearts of Indonesians, especially those who use the internet. At first Shopee appeared in Indonesia, the application was downloaded by 1 million users. This can be obtained by Shopee in just four years. Until now, Shopee has been successfully downloaded by 100 million users.

Shopee As Marketplace No. 1 in Indonesia

At the end of 2019, the growth of the Shopee marketplace is growing very rapidly, especially in Indonesia. In the fourth quarter of 2019, Shopee has succeeded in shifting the Tokopedia marketplace as one of the most popular online shopping platforms in Indonesia. Here, Shopee can reach up to 72.9 million users.

In addition, the marketplace known as Si Oren is also one of the number one e-commerce applications on Google Playstore Indonesia. Meanwhile in the Southeast Asia region, Shopee has succeeded in shifting Lazada’s position in terms of app downloads and visits. Where Shopee is able to reach up to 2 billion visits. Then when viewed in terms of revenue, Shopee has been able to achieve revenue of up to 13.2 trillion rupiah.

Chris Feng himself is still the founder and CEO of the Shopee company. Even so, individual share ownership remains with Shopee and Sea, Ltd. Where the largest shareholder is still owned by Forrest Li. Meanwhile, Sea, Ltd, which is under the umbrella of Shopee, is majority owned by the Tencent Group, which was founded by Ma Huateng. But it is not known exactly how big Chris Feng’s shareholding is in the Shopee company. Apart from that, it is also unknown how much Chris Feng’s wealth is, which until now is still the CEO of Shopee.

Where is Shopee Main Office Location?

For those of you who may be curious about the main office location of the Shopee company, this time we will discuss it here. So, Shopee’s main office is located in Singapore. Until then the marketplace expanded to various ASEAN countries and started opening Shopee offices in Malaysia, Indonesia, the Philippines, Thailand, Taiwan and Vietnam. For Indonesia itself, Shopee was officially launched in Indonesia in December 2015 and has its head office at Wisma 77 Tower 2, 11th Floor, Jl. Lt. Gen. S. Parman Kav. 77 Slipi, Palmerah, West Jakarta.

The Advantages of Shopee

Shopee itself offers many advantages or advantages, including the following:

a. Shopee provides lots of promos and discounts which of course its users really like.
b. There is a live chat feature that allows sellers and buyers to interact directly about the products being sold.
c. There is a free shipping facility with several conditions that apply.
d. Has many product categories.

Shopee’s Weaknesses

The following are some of the weaknesses in the Shopee application, including:

a. Shopee has a weakness, namely the seller’s response which is sometimes long or slow.
b. Sites that sometimes have to be accessed at certain hours and at certain events.
c. There are many sellers who are no longer active.
d. Free shipping promos that are offered often have terms and conditions that are quite difficult for users.

The Best Features Available on Shopee

After knowing the various advantages that the Shopee application has, now we will discuss the best features in the Shopee application that make this marketplace attractive to its users. Here is a full explanation.

1. Free Shipping

The first feature on Shopee is the free shipping feature. As mentioned above, this feature is indeed one of the advantages possessed by Shopee. Where this free shipping program makes it very easy for its users to sell or buy products at more affordable prices, because we no longer need to pay shipping costs. Sellers can register their shops with this feature on Shopee in a fairly easy way. Generally it only takes a few days to activate the free shipping feature. If it has been approved, the product posting will say free shipping.

2. COD or Cash On Delivery

Furthermore, the features in the Shopee application are Cash on Delivery or what we usually know as COD. Where the COD feature is a feature that you can use to make payments on the spot or at home when the product arrives. To be able to use this feature, you must choose the J&T expedition. When you are about to checkout, choose to pay on the spot in the payment options.

3. Vouchers and Cashback

The next feature is in the Shopee application, where this one feature further spoils its users. This feature is a voucher or cashback feature, where Shopee will give you a discount when you make a purchase transaction. Cashback offered by Shopee itself is divided into two types. The first is in the form of Shopeepay and the second is in the form of Shopee coins. You can use both to get the next shopping discount. To be able to get this feature, you only need to make a claim under the offer and at checkout. Enter the voucher that you have claimed before agreeing to payment.

4. Shopeepay or Shopee Coins

The fourth feature in the Shopee application is Shopeepay and Shopee Koin. For Shopee Coins, it is usually used as a reward when getting vouchers or when playing Shopee Games. Meanwhile, Shopeepay is electronic money that is given by Shopee when you have a voucher or play a game. Almost the same as the money in your account, Shopeepay can also be used for various transactions. In fact, you can also send Shopeepay to your bank account. Not only that, there are several stores that provide special discounts for payments using Shopeepay.

5. Shopee Games

The last Shopee feature that you should know about is Shopee Game. This feature recently appeared in the Shopee application, but it has been able to make users feel more at home in this application. There are various types of games that you can play at Shopee. Starting from Goyang Shopee Shopee Poly, Shopee Planting, Shopee Cut, Shopee Candy, and many more. Apart from that, there are lots of rewards that you can get from Shopee Game. Starting from Shopeepay, Shopee coins, vouchers and other attractive prizes.

This is an explanation of the journey of the founder of Shopee in developing his online store business to become the largest marketplace in Southeast Asia.

Definition and Functions of the Family – The presence of a family in one’s life is valuable. However, sometimes we are not aware of this value. In order to love and care for the family more, it seems that we need to understand the concept of how family is understood and functions. The following is a complete explanation of the meaning and function of the family:

Definition of Family

The family is the smallest social unit consisting of the head of the family and the family consisting of father, mother and children. Another definition of family according to Wikipedia is the smallest unit of society where the head of the family and several people live together in one place under one roof in a state of interdependence.

In another view, family means a group of people who live together as the smallest unit of society, usually with relatives, marriage, or other relations, and who live in a house headed by the head of the family. From the description of this definition, it is clear that the family consists of the head of the family and family members, namely father, mother and children who live together and need each other. To better understand what a family is, Sinaumed’s can refer to the opinions of the following experts:

1. Salvacion G. According to Bailon and Aracelis. Maglaya

Salvacion G. Bailon and Aracelis. Maglaya (1978), defines the family as two or more people who live at home by having family relationships, marriage, adoption, interact with each other, and overcome each other. Each role has a culture, created and maintained within that one relationship.

2.Peter Gillis

According to Peter Gillis (1983), the concept of family is a complex entity with these attributes, but each consists of several components that have meaning as a separate entity.

3. Johnson L. and Leny R.

According to Johnson L. and Leny R (2010), the concept of family is an environment where several people are still related.

4. EM Duvall

Family is a group of people related by marriage, childbirth, adoption, the purpose of which is to promote and maintain a common culture and to promote and maintain the physical, mental, emotional and social development of each member.

5. Allender, JA Dan Spradley, BW

According to Allender, JA and Spradley, BW (1996), the definition of family is one or more people who live together, that is, have emotional relationships and develop in social interactions, roles, and tasks.

6. BKKBN

According to the Federal Agency for Population and Family Planning (BKKBN), the term family refers to men and women, or men and women, and their children or fathers and their children, or mothers and their children.

Family Functions

Each family function has its own meaning, and plays an important role in family life. The following is a description of each of the 8 family functions that Sinaumed’s needs to know:

1. Religious Functions

Religion is a basic need for all human beings. The family is the first place where religious values ​​are taught, and to instill religious identity in all children born in. Families develop religious values ​​and produce good and pious children. The family teaches all its members to worship with full faith and devotion to God Almighty. Indonesian families adhere to different beliefs and religions, so carrying out religious functions must not ignore religious tolerance. The function of religion has 12 core values ​​that must be understood and taught by the family. The 12 core values ​​are:

• Faith is believing in Allah SWT, God Almighty, and always practicing His teachings
• Taqwa is practicing everything that has become the order of the religion he believes in
• Honesty, namely saying something as it is
• Tolerance or tolerance, namely the perception that everyone has differences
• Diligent, namely giving time and energy to fulfill obligations by trying to achieve the best results
• Piety, namely high moral value by doing the right thing consistently
• Obedience, namely fulfilling one’s duties and responsibilities promptly and with joy
• Like to help is to have a habit of helping others, and without expecting anything in return
• Discipline, namely adherence to agreed rules in a timely manner
• Manners, namely behaving in accordance with religious norms and values
• Patience and sincerity is the ability to face difficulties without wanting anything
• Affection which is an expression of full attention, awareness, and emotion of affection for someone

2. Socio-Cultural Functions

Family is the most important means of advancing and instilling noble cultural values ​​that serve as role models for lifestyle. The socio-cultural function provides the family and all its members with the opportunity to develop a rich and diverse culture as a unit. Therefore, the noble values ​​that serve as role models in the life of the nation can continue to be supported and nurtured. The family is the first place for children to learn to interact and adapt to the environment and learn the customs that apply in society.

The socio-cultural function consists of seven basic values ​​that must be communicated and carried out by the family. The seven values ​​are:

• Tolerance and mutual respect, namely the attitude of respecting and accepting positions that are different or opposite to ours, and the attitude of accepting and accepting the existence of other people.
• Politeness, namely behavior that is in accordance with local socio-cultural norms. Manners are learned by children through the example and example of their parents.
• Gotong royong, gotong royong based on kinship. Fostering a spirit of mutual cooperation in family life is related to the behavior of children who help each other and work selflessly.
• Living side by side in harmony and unity, namely in diversity, in peace and harmony. Family is the first place to educate children in a sense of unity and harmony with other families.
• Compassion, namely a compassionate attitude towards various social, cultural and customary issues, exploring the feelings and experiences of others. The compassionate attitude that emerges in family life stimulates a sense of connection and solidarity and respect for other people’s cultures.
• Love for the motherland, namely self-awareness as an Indonesian nation. National dignity must be maintained. The family’s love of home evokes a love for local produce and gratitude for the struggles of children’s heroes.

3. The Function of Love

Love and affection are important factors in shaping a child’s personality. The function of love means that the family must be a vessel that can create an atmosphere of love and affection in the life of the family, society, nation and state.

The function of affection can be manifested in the form of affection, comfort and attention among the family. The function of family affection is the solid foundation between children, husband and wife, parent-child, and kinship between generations, making the family the most important place for a loving life. Therefore.

The function of love has eight values ​​that must be communicated and applied in the family. These values ​​are:

• Empathy, the ability to understand and understand other people’s emotions, or the ability to recognize and help others
• Familiar, namely a relationship based on a sense of unity and emotional intimacy. Familiarity is characterized by mutual attention
• Fairness, namely fairness or fairness towards other people
• Forgiveness, this is to accept other people’s mistakes without feeling revenge. Forgiveness can form a child’s positive personality
• Loyalty, means fulfilling the hopes and wishes of others, whether requested or not
• Usability, namely the habit of helping or helping others
• Sacrifice, the willingness to give to help others, whether sought or not
• Responsibility, namely knowing and carrying out obligations

4. Protection Function

The family is a place of refuge or shelter for all members, a place that promotes peace of mind and warmth. Being in a mutually protective atmosphere means that the family must be a safe, comfortable and reassuring place for all its members.

When a family is functioning properly, it can perform the function of protecting its members and optimizing the growth and development of children. The family protects each member from harmful behavior and ensures that the family is comfortable and protected from discomfort.

The protective function has five values ​​that must be communicated and implemented by the family. These values ​​are:

• Feeling safe, that is free from fear and anxiety. The family brings a sense of security to the soul family at all stages of life
• Tolerance, namely forgiving other people’s mistakes without revenge, pointing out the mistakes of oneself and others, and always trying to fix them
• Knowing and recognizing responsiveness, i.e. what is dangerous or likely to be encountered
• Resilience, can withstand unexpected situations. The ability to control oneself and raise spirits when faced with problems
• Compassion to respond to the feelings and experiences of others. Good parenting can create a close sense of brotherhood

5. Reproductive Function

The family is the regulator of offspring reproduction in a healthy and planned manner so that the children born become quality next generations. The family is the place where reproduction functions as a whole, including sexuality and healthy and quality sex education for children. The family is also a place to educate members about issues of sexuality. Continuity of planned offspring can support the creation of family care.

The reproductive function has three values ​​that must be impregnated and applied in the family. These values ​​are:

• Responsibility, the ability to know and carry out one’s obligations. Families wisely discuss sexual behavior with children and make children aware of and responsible for all the consequences of sexuality
• Healthy, namely a healthy physical condition, reproductive system and function, as well as mental/emotional. People who reproduce are people who can maintain their reproductive hygiene and health
• Firm, one’s ability to maintain the chastity of the genitals before marriage. The family firmly encourages members to support genital chastity by not having sex before marriage and avoiding sexual harassment

6. Socialization and Education Functions

Family is the first and most important place to provide future education for all children. Family development includes education for child development and personality development. The function of socialization and education also means that the family is a place where the process of interaction develops and where a person learns good and healthy socialization and communication.

Very intensive interaction within the family, and the parenting process is very effective. Families talk to children about their values, norms, how to communicate with others, what is good and what is bad, and what is right and wrong.

There are seven values ​​that must be communicated and applied to families in the function of socialization and education. These values ​​are:

• Independence, namely the freedom to act independently by reasoning and making decisions, independent of other people
• Flexibility, which is easy to adapt to situations and conditions wherever you are. Flexible children are usually willing to accept and get along with other people
• Pride is the feeling of pleasure one feels when completing a worthwhile job or job and succeeding in achieving what one is trying to do
• Perseverance, which means giving time and energy to complete tasks and assignments and get the best results
• Creative, until someone is successful, it means finding and developing many ways and ideas to do things
• Responsibility, namely knowledge and fulfillment of that obligation
• Collaboration, namely working together and in good faith

7. Economic Functions

The family is the most important place to regulate the use of finance to promote and absorb the values ​​related to finance, meet the necessities of life and create a prosperous family. The family is needed as a place to receive food, clothing, shelter and other supplies, and to provide financial support to its members.

The economic function has five values ​​that must be absorbed and applied in the family. These values ​​are:

• Thrifty to pay attention to money. Frugality is characterized by not wasting and buying according to needs and abilities.
• Careful, that is always paying attention to everything. A conscientious person always weighs the pros and cons of all his actions and minimizes mistakes
• Discipline, namely always following the rules that have been set. Disciplined people tend to pay on time, save regularly, and respect business partnership agreements
• Compassion, which is sensitive to the feelings of others. Loving people always want to help others who are struggling
• Perseverance, that is, resilient people who try hard to achieve their goals, characterized by the fact that they never give up and always want to try again when they fail

8. Environmental Development Function

The family plays a role in managing life while maintaining the physical and social environment, as well as the micro and macro environment. The family plays a role in maintaining the local environment and the surrounding natural environment. Family members need to know their neighbors and the local community and protect the natural environment. A family-friendly attitude towards the environment to provide the best for future generations.

The Community Development function has four values ​​that must be absorbed and applied to the family. These values ​​are:

• Clean, namely environmental conditions free of dirt, pollution, and dirt. Clean people are characterized by always keeping themselves and their surroundings clean
• Discipline, namely always following the rules that have been set. Disciplined people do not damage the environment and are characterized by behavior that complies with applicable rules
• Management, namely efforts to protect, utilize and improve the environment
• Conservation, namely efforts to maintain harmony between the family and the environment. The family and the environment influence each other, so that environmental conditions must be maintained in order to achieve the welfare and benefit of the whole family

Well, that’s an explanation of the meaning and function of the family. The meaning of family is of course very broad and it is not an easy matter to build a good and happy family. To understand the meaning and function of the family more deeply. Sinaumed’s can visit sinaumedia’s book collection at www.sinaumedia.com, enjoy studying. #FriendsWithoutLimits.

The flow of naturalism – In fine art, there are various types of flow that display the image objects in the work of art. One flow that is often used is the flow of Naturalism. This flow is one of the streams of art that is generally used to express the impression of romanticism. Not only that, the flow of Naturalism has a fairly long history and there are many figures who contributed to this flow.

For more details, in this article we will discuss the meaning of Naturalism, its history, characteristics, and also the characters in it along with examples of their work. Let’s see the full explanation below.

Definition of Naturalism

Naturalism is one of the schools of art that emphasizes the accuracy and similarity of objects drawn so that they look more natural and realistic like their references in nature. This flow of art is a form of appreciation from artists for the natural beauty that exists. Generally, these artists will raise the theme of the beauty of the landscape around them, as happened in the indie mooi movement in Indonesia.

Artists sometimes choose a more dramatic background light, namely at sunrise and sunset. This was done to obtain golden hours of lighting. This dramatic selection of light is one of the characteristics of the Romanticism school which was rebelled by the Naturalism school. Where Naturalism assumes that in lighting that is not dramatic, natural beauty will still be depicted.

This flow of naturalism is one example of how a school of art can also be interpreted centuries after its initial movements emerged. Because, although the Naturalism movement was a form of development from realism and against romanticism, its prototype dates back to the 17th century. Then in the 1820s, early forms of Naturalism had become a dominant trend in landscape painting. Which is largely due to the influence of an artist from England named John Constable.

During this period, artist groups and schools aimed at the general public were established in various places around the world. Some of these schools include Norwich Academy in Eastern England, Barbizon Academy in central France, and Hudson River Academy in New York State. It was these schools that were able to influence all of Europe.

History of Naturalism

After knowing the meaning of Naturalism, we will now discuss the history of the emergence of Naturalism. Here is a full explanation.

The history of Naturalism was originally introduced by John Amos Comenius, a philosopher in the 16th century. At that time, this philosopher is believed to be someone who first introduced this flow, especially in the world of education. For the flow of Naturalism has existed since the 1850s in France and became one of the reactions of the establishment by the followers of the Romanticism School. Besides being supported by Naturalism figures, this school is also developing quite rapidly in line with advances in visual and measurement technology. One example is regarding the depiction of human anatomy and also animals that are increasingly accurate. So that painting in the flow of Naturalism can depict human objects and animals in more detail according to their original form.

The development of this one stream is also supported by an increase in the growing distance perspective knowledge. So that painters can apply this knowledge in their paintings to depict objects more realistically according to what they see. In the 17th century, the depiction of weather conditions and lighting in paintings also improved, that is, they became smoother and more real. So it is very helpful to describe the flow of Naturalism.

Literary Naturalism

Slightly different from the term Naturalism which is often used in fine arts. In the world of literature, the term naturalism means prose fiction which is more radical than realism. That means, naturalism literature will tell a clear story about realities that often occur on a daily basis without any censorship of scenes or controversial dialogues. Surely this is done as long as the controversial scene still has a purpose.

Meanwhile, naturalism in art can be a term used to express “resemblance to nature”. Where an image that is very similar to the original can be called natural, this is certainly outside the context of Naturalism. Whereas in the world of literature, Naturalism is generally written with a capital “N” to express that naturalism is a specific term for only one school, not a natural term for any context.

Characteristics of Naturalism

Distinguishing the flow of naturalism with other streams can be said not so easy. Especially when compared to the flow of realism. But, we can stick to some of its characteristics, as follows:

1. Emphasize the similarity of the painting image with the object being painted according to the original.
2. The techniques and abilities of the artists are the main weapon.
3. Carrying the theme of beautiful paintings but based on purity.
4. Naturalism is a form of appreciation by artists for the beauty of the natural surroundings.
5. Carrying out the theme of natural beauty and the scenery that surrounds the artist.
6. Painting the beauty, beauty, and good looks of human portraits as they are without exaggeration.

Important Figures & Examples of Painting Naturalism

As previously explained, this flow is an example of a flow that was initiated long after its appearance. Therefore, the figures who have an important role in the development of this flow will also have a fairly large gap between years. The following are some of the artists who became influential figures in the development of Naturalism.

1. John Constable

John Constable is an artist from England who is considered a figure artist who gave a lot of influence in the development of Naturalism. He had previously rejected the landscape painting style. Constable said that “The custom of painters today is bravura, an attempt to depict something that is beyond the truth”.

Then, he chose to create his own way of representation by transferring what he saw himself as honestly as possible on canvas. Not only that, Constable also chooses to paint whatever is around him first. In the letter he wrote to his colleague, he wrote “I should paint my own best places”. Constables are also interested in the light and also the clouds that are in the clouds without discriminating which one is nicer or which one is more beautiful.

John Constable’s Naturalism Painting

Dedham Vale (1816) & Analysis

The following are some examples of paintings by John Constable:

The techniques promoted by Constable have not been fully achieved in this work. Where the painting above was made in his youth with a political background and also the war that took place in his country. Even so, the painting has reflected his commitment to fairly accurate and honest observations of nature. It can be seen in the details of the trees and sky which are very detailed.

The eye of the observer is directed to the farthest part of the river view, along the river route to the distant tower of Dedham Church, which, while small, forms a strong focal point for the painting. The trees on either side of the canvas form a frame to the center of the image and provide the main view. Constable also presents the view around the house well, through an aesthetic view without exaggerating.

Maria Bicknell (1816) & Her Analysis

This painting is a portrait of the Constable’s fiancé. Where the painting was made about three months before their wedding. The portrait is considered to be very similar to Maria Bicknell’s face. Even though the level of resemblance is quite accurate, John is not shy about showing his brush stroke markings. It makes for a really nice contrast between the background and the part of the portrait that’s in front.

The White Horse (1819) & Its Analysis

In the painting above, Constable depicts a scene of life in the countryside which is quite natural. Applying no expression or emotion, pitying or celebrating the working lives of those he paints. The constable is simply presenting it as he sees it. In his paintings, Constable shows men continuing to live the way they have lived for years, despite the growing threat of industrialization.

2. Thomas Cole

Thomas Cole is an artist who was born in an industrial area of ​​England. He later moved to the United States at a young age. Since then, Cole has always tried to capture the exotic beauty of the deserts in the Americas. Cole’s paintings also serve as a monument to the hopes and anxieties of the newly emerging American society during the mid-19th century. He is considered to be the first artist to bring the eye of the European landscape painter to the Americas. However, this figure still presents a unique view of America.

Thomas Cole’s Naturalism Painting

The following are some examples of paintings by Thomas Cole:

Lake with Dead Trees (Catskill) (1825) & Its Analysis

Lake with Dead offers views of the Catskill Mountains in southeastern New York. On the shores of a lonely lake surrounded by dead trees and also two deer walking back and forth. The background for the painting itself is when dusk is coming. Behind the forest, the sun that was about to make its way to its halt still shone its light through the cloudy sky. Even though this work is a painting from the Naturalist school that focuses on technicality and also accuracy in painting. But there are meanings or interpretations that can be produced. This painting is often interpreted as a contemplation and a dialogue between life and death and the passage of time that witnesses this dialogue.

The Consummation of Empire (1836) & Its Analysis

The painting is one of a series of five paintings entitled The Course of Empire commissioned by Lyman Reed. Each of the paintings in this series presents the same landscape at a different stage from the rise to fall of this imaginary civilization. All of the art was intended as a warning against excessive imperial ambitions. This one painting presents an empire that is at the peak of its power unaware and drugged by its own ambitions which actually destroys the city.

America had just freed itself from the British Empire when this painting was made. Cole wanted to warn that the new country must not fall into the same hole as its European predecessors. Not only that, this series seems to express Cole’s anxiety about the threat of industrial encroachment and urban expansion to the American landscape which is developing so rapidly that it ignores the nature around it.

3.William Bliss Baker

William Bliss Baker is an artist from the United States. Baker began his art education at the National Academy of Design in 1876. He was a talented artist who successfully exhibited many exhibitions even when he was still a student. This happened because Baker was proficient in painting long before he majored in art. Baker also won many awards such as Hallgarten and Elliot which was a classy award in his day.

In a way, Baker is a Naturalism artist who has the most technical ability in this genre. Where the painting technique is very accurate and has inspired many births of a new school which was later inspired by the flow of Naturalism. Whether it’s the perpetrators of photo-realism in modern times, to hyper-realism in the contemporary era like now.

William Bliss Baker’s Naturalism Painting

The following are some examples of paintings by William Bliss Baker:

Fallen Monarchs (1886) and Their Analysis

This painting presents two fallen trees in contrast to the newly grown trees that adorn the forest. The light that penetrates the twigs and branches of the tree gives a spiritual impression and an image of hope in the work. This is an example of a system of expression that was successfully given even though the artist objectively only presents nature in a painting.

Fallen Monarchs is called one of Bliss Baker’s masterpieces. In fact, this work is a painting produced at the beginning of his career. The accuracy in the depiction of the scenery in the painting beats the photographs that could be taken at that time. In contrast to other streams, where they avoid the main capabilities of photography, Baker instead conquers this technology by using his brush strokes.

4. Abdullah Suriosubroto

Abdullah Suriosubroto is believed to be the first generation of Indonesian painters or artists to have gained international reputation in the 20th century, after Raden Saleh had previously received it in the 19th century. He is the son of a national movement figure named Dr. Wahidin Sudirohusodo. Abdullah Suriosubroto had studied medicine in the Netherlands. However, he prefers to be a painter. He is the father of the painter Basoeki Abdullah and a sculptor named Trijoto Abdullah.

Abdullah Suriosubroto’s Naturalism painting

The following is an example of a painting by Abdullah Suriosubroto:

Mountain View (1935)

The landscape painting above is the forerunner of classic paintings in Indonesia. Where the painting will later influence all naturalist painters in painting a local landscape. The view of Indonesia which has the characteristic of having blue mountains behind a stretch of rice fields and flanked by forest hills.

5. Basuki Abdullah

Basuki Abdullah is the son of Abdullah Suriosubroto. He has also contributed greatly to the world of Indonesian art. Since childhood, Basuki Abdullah has started to like the world of art. Then he obtained formal art education at the Academy of Fine Arts, Academie Voor Beeldende Kunsten, in The Hague, Netherlands.

Basuki Abdullah’s Naturalism Painting

Flores Beach (1942)

The Five Founding Countries of ASEAN – In the subject of Social Sciences, you will definitely study one of these important materials, namely ASEAN material. Why is this material included in the subject of Social Sciences in Indonesia? This is because the Indonesian state is one of the countries that took part in initiating or being the country that founded this ASEAN organization.

Broadly speaking, ASEAN or the abbreviation of the Association of Southeast Asian Nations is one of the many organizations in the world that was established specifically for countries in Southeast Asia only. As most people know, the purpose of establishing this ASEAN organization is none other than to form cooperation between countries in Southeast Asia in various fields, such as social, cultural, economic, educational, technical and many other fields.

In this article we will discuss a lot about which countries participated in becoming the founders of this large organization along with the reasons and history why these countries decided to co-found the ASEAN organization.

Get to know ASEAN

The Association of Southeast Asian Nations, abbreviated as Perbara in Indonesian, or usually known as ASEAN with the abbreviation of the Association of Southeast Asian Nations, is an organization that is a type of geopolitical and economic organization. ASEAN or Pertamina was founded in the Region and brought together especially for countries in Southeast Asia only.

The ASEAN or ASEAN Organization was established on August 8, 1967 in Bangkok, Thailand based on the ASEAN Declaration and initiated by the five ASEAN founding countries, and Indonesia is included. In general, the purpose of the establishment of this organization is quite clear in the subject books, especially the Social Sciences subject. The main objective of this ASEAN organization is to advance and enhance the development of social, economic progress, and cultural development in countries that are members of the ASEAN organization.

In addition to the above objectives, another main objective is to provide development towards peace and stability at the regional level. ASEAN also provides an opportunity for countries that are members of ASEAN to discuss the differences that exist in countries that are members of the ASEAN organization, of course in a good and peaceful manner.

So, what are the reasons underlying the five countries participating in establishing the Association of Southeast Asian Nations (ASEAN) organization?

History of the Establishment of ASEAN

As previously stated, the initial purpose of establishing ASEAN was to advance and enhance development in various sectors of countries in the Asian continent, especially for Southeast Asia. This is due to various factors behind the founding of ASEAN. These factors are not only felt by one country in Southeast Asia, but have been experienced and felt by various countries in Southeast Asia.

In this way, these countries agreed and agreed to establish and develop ASEAN not only for the benefit of their own countries but also for the interests of countries in Southeast Asia.

The establishment of ASEAN began around the early 1960s. It is known that the 1960s were a difficult year for various countries in the world, especially for countries in Southeast Asia. Various conflicts occurred in various parts, both internal and external. Why is that?

According to various sources, Southeast Asia is one of the strategic places in the world. This caused the Southeast Asia Region to be divided into two base blocks which are usually known as the East Block and the West Block. In addition, it turns out that there are military sector conflicts involving several countries, such as Vietnam, Laos, and Cambodia. There are also conflicts involving Indonesia and Malaysia, which are included in bilateral conflicts.

The existence of these various conflicts has had a negative impact on various parties, one of which has had a major impact on defense and economic stability in various countries in Southeast Asia.

Well, it is because of the inter-block conflicts that have made some country leaders have initiative thoughts of wanting to form peace and cooperation between countries in Southeast Asia in order to stop these conflicts. This thought led them to create a world organization specifically for countries in Southeast Asia.

The Five Founding Countries of ASEAN

The ASEAN organization was founded on the initiatives of various state leaders in Southeast Asian countries. These countries can be referred to as the ASEAN Five Foundation Countries.

The event of the founding of ASEAN began with the open-mindedness and broad-mindedness of the five countries who both wanted peace. So that with their respective beliefs, they want to unite with each other to form an organization that they believe can bring peace and stop the various conflicts that exist in Southeast Asia.

The five countries decided to hold a 4-day meeting by proposing foreign ministers from each of these countries, starting from 5 to 8 August 1967 to be precise. to approve the establishment of this ASEAN organization, the five countries and the Minister of Foreign Affairs are:

1. The State of Singapore

The first country to become one of the founding countries of ASEAN was Singapore with Foreign Minister Sinnathamby Rajaratnam or commonly known as S. Rajaratnam as a representative from the country of Brunei Darussalam.

The country of Brunei Darussalam is a small country. Because it is a rich country in Asia, Singapore is a small country that has a style or standard of living that is relatively high compared to countries in the Southeast Asian Region.

The State of Singapore has an important role in the implementation of the 13th ASEAN Summit (Summit) from 18 to 22 November 2007, because the Summit was held in Singapore. An important outcome of the conference was the formation of the ASEAN Charter or what is known as the ASEAN Charter.

2. The State of Indonesia

The second country which is one of the founding countries of ASEAN is Indonesia with the Minister of Foreign Affairs H. Adam Malik Batubara or commonly known as Adam Malik as the representative of the State of Indonesia.

The Indonesian state itself is known to have had an important function since the inception of this organization. This important role lies on the basis of the formation of harmonious and harmonious relations that occur between the Southeast Asian Regions.

In addition, the State of Indonesia also had a role in initiating the formation of the Bali Concord II around the end of 2003 on the island of Bali. It is known, Bali Concord II contains the formation of three pillars known as the Three Pillars of Integrity. The Three Pillars of Integrity consist of ASC (ASEAN Security Community), AEC (ASEAN Economic Community) and ASCC (ASEAN Socio Cultural Community).

3. Country of the Philippines

The third country which is one of the founding countries of ASEAN is the Philippines with Foreign Minister Narciso Rueca Ramos or commonly known as Narciso Ramos as a representative from the Philippines.

Starting from 1970, the Philippines began to make the ASEAN organization one of the important things that must be considered in the country’s foreign policy. It should be noted that previously, the State of the Philippines entrusted it to Manila Washington.

The Philippines has obtained its own evidence that this ASEAN organization is really beneficial for the country. One of the concrete proofs of the results of ASEAN is the overcoming and resolution of the Sabah Conflict between the Philippines and Malaysia.

Not only resolving the conflict, but also helping to improve relations between the Philippines and Malaysia. Another conflict that is a clear example is the Metro Case with Indonesia taking part in diplomatic assistance.

4. Malaysia

The fourth country which is one of the founding countries of ASEAN is Malaysia with Foreign Minister Captain Tun Haji Abdul Razak bin Dato’ Haji Hussein al-Haj or commonly known as Abdul Razak Hussein as the representative of the State of Malaysia.

After joining and becoming one of the founding countries of the ASEAN organization, Malaysia has experienced very rapid progress in the economic sector. Malaysia itself is known to have played various important roles in the ASEAN organization.

One of the roles given by the State of Malaysia to ASEAN was by agreeing to sign the Kuala Lumpur Declaration in November 1971. Apart from that, the State of Malaysia also participated in the activities of forming a democratic kingdom in the State of Cambodia.

The State of Malaysia also participated in the formation of the Organizational Zone which is free from nuclear weapons, the State of Malaysia also participated in AFTA which is useful in carrying out cooperative efforts in the economic sector and there are many more roles given by the State of Malaysia to this ASEAN organization.

5. Country of Thailand

The fifth country which is one of the founding countries of ASEAN is Thailand with Foreign Minister Thanat Khoman as a representative from Malaysia.
It is known that Thailand is the only ASEAN founding country that has never experienced colonialism. Thailand is known as a country with the best rice commodity in Southeast Asia.

Thailand itself has collaborated in various sectors. This collaboration is also carried out by several regions and even countries around the world. This causes Thailand to be included in a country that has an economy that can be called advanced.

Reasons for the Founding of ASEAN

In the meeting which was held from 5 to 8 August 1967, the five founding countries of ASEAN stated several reasons or what could be called driving factors why they wanted to become founders and wanted the ASEAN organization to stand. The following are some of the reasons stated by the five ASEAN founding countries at the meeting:

1. There is a prolonged conflict that occurred in the Southeast Asia Region.
2. There are similarities in regional or geographical forms.
3. There are similarities in the majority race (Ras Malayan-Mongoloid) which causes the similarities in several cultures within ASEAN members.
4. There is a sense of shared fate because most ASEAN member countries are former colonies of other countries.

The purpose of the establishment of ASEAN

The reason for the establishment of ASEAN was not only used as a medium to achieve peace, but there were also several other purposes behind the establishment of this large organization. Following are the objectives of the establishment of ASEAN:

1. Help accelerate progress and development in various sectors, such as the social sector, the economic sector, and the cultural sector in the Southeast Asia Region.
2. Help promote regional peace and stability.
3. Participate in improving the quality of cooperation so that the results are more effective in increasing quality in various sectors.
4. Providing quality improvement to ASEAN members, especially in improving the quality of general knowledge.
5. Always apply the principle of maintaining relations between ASEAN member countries.
6. Always help each other in the development and improvement of facilities in various sectors.

ASEAN achievements

During its development and progress, the ASEAN organization has certainly produced various achievements which are of course very useful and beneficial for the countries that are its members.

One of the most striking achievements is the addition of ASEAN membership countries, which currently number to 10. ASEAN itself has of course gained many other achievements in various sectors.

One of ASEAN’s achievements is its achievement as a world organization, namely:

1. Formation of various types of declarations, such as the Declaration of Peace, Free and Neutrality Areas or known as ZOPFAN (Zone of Peace, Freedom, and Neutrality) in 1971. 2. There was the implementation of the 1st Summit which was held in 1976, followed by the
signing as well as the creation of a Joint Agreement on Bali Concord I and TAC (The Treaty of Amity and Cooperation in Southeast Asia).
3. Signing of an ASEAN Preferential Trading Arrangement in February 1977.
4. Formation of AFTA (The ASEAN Free Trade Area) on January 28, 1992.
5. Implementation of the 9th Summit in 2003. In the Summit the Bali signing was also held The Second Concord and an agreement was agreed to form the ASEAN Community where the Three Pillars were formed.

Apart from these five achievements, there are other achievements, such as holding the 10th Summit and many more.

ASEAN Challenge

During its development and progress, the ASEAN organization has of course been passed by the ASEAN organization. One of the challenges that is quite disturbing and becomes an issue in the security sector is the South China Sea conflict.

One of these conflicts is known to have attracted enough attention and caused tension between China and various countries that are members of ASEAN. The China Sea issue can also disrupt the ASEAN Plus Three cooperative relationship that has been forged since 1997 by several ASEAN countries and China.

If the relationship between ASEAN countries and China is disrupted, it will automatically affect several developments in various sectors, such as the economic and security sectors.

ASEAN Member Now

As is well known, the ASEAN organization is currently growing rapidly and experiencing an increase in the number of member countries in the Southeast Asian Region. Currently, there are 10 ASEAN member countries. The following are countries that have become part of the ASEAN organization accompanied by the date the country joined ASEAN:

1. Singapore (8 August 1967)
2. Indonesia (8 August 1967)
3. Malaysia (8 August 1967)
4. Philippines (8 August 1967)
5. Thailand (8 August 1967)
6. Brunei Darussalam (January 8, 1984)
7. Vietnam (July 28, 1995)
8. Laos (July 23, 1997)
9. Myanmar (July 23, 1997)
10. Cambodia (30 April 1999)

Those are the five founding countries, initiators, forming the Southeast Asian regional organization, ASEAN. In addition to providing information about the Five Founding Countries of ASEAN, we also provide various other information.

The First Islamic Empire in Indonesia – The heyday of the Islamic Empire in Indonesia is estimated to have taken place in the 13th to 14th centuries. The beginning of the arrival of Islam in Indonesia stems from the rise of trade in the archipelago, this is because the territory of Indonesia was crossed by various traders from all over the country during the trading period at that time, especially traders from Arabia, India, Persia and China.

Traders from the Middle East such as Arabs and Persians were traders who actively spread Islam in Indonesia, the spread of Islam in Indonesia was not simultaneous but gradually starting from the island of Sumatra first, then to the island of Java and the areas around Java and finally to the eastern regions of Indonesia such as Sulawesi and Maluku.

It was during this period of the spread of Islam in the archipelago that several Islamic kingdoms began to appear in the archipelago which began to emerge in various regions and various islands in Indonesia. Since then, the life order of the Indonesian people began to change and follow Islamic teachings.

The First Islamic Kingdom in Indonesia

The emergence of the first Islamic empire in Indonesia began when the spread of Islam in the archipelago grew rapidly and developed. There were several sizable Islamic empires in the archipelago at that time such as the Kingdom of Perlak, the Kingdom of Ternate, the Kingdom of Samudra Pasai, the Kingdom of Gowa, the Sultanate of Malacca, the Islamic Kingdom of Cirebon, the Kingdom of Demak, the Islamic Kingdom of Banten and the Islamic Mataram Kingdom.

All of the first Islamic kingdoms in Indonesia were spread across the archipelago, especially in the regions of Java, Sulawesi, Maluku and NTT. This was because the regions of Java, Maluku and Sulawesi at that time were strategic places and were traversed by trade routes from various countries.

The first Islamic kingdom in Indonesia certainly prioritized Islamic teachings as the main basis for regulating the order of social life of the community and the rules in its kingdom. There are several major Islamic empires in the archipelago that have been mentioned above, for that in the following we provide some explanations about the Islamic kingdoms in the archipelago so that you are more familiar with the history of the various Islamic empires in the archipelago.

In understanding the history of the Islamic empires in the archipelago, you can read the book Getting to Know the Islamic Empires of the Archipelago below, because it contains an introduction to the various Islamic empires in the archipelago in their time.

 

1 Kingdom of Perlak (840-1292)

The first Islamic kingdom in Indonesia was the Kingdom of Perlak or the Sultanate of Perlak. This kingdom is even the oldest in Southeast Asia. The territory of the Perlak kingdom is in the East Aceh area.

It was named the Perlak Kingdom because at that time, the area in East Aceh was a perlak wood producing area which was good wood and the best wood, especially for shipbuilding materials. Due to the abundant natural products and this strategic position, it became a fairly busy port in the 8th century.

Apart from that, it is also a haven for traders from all over the country, one of which is from Arabia and Persia. The first king of the Perlak kingdom was King Abdul Aziz Syah, then after King Abdul Aziz Syah died he was replaced by Sultan Alaidin Saiyid Maulana Abdrahim Syah then the leadership continued to change up to 18 leadership changes and finally in 1292 the Perlak kingdom collapsed.

2. Kingdom of Ternate (1257)

The Kingdom of Ternate, also known as the Kingdom of Gapi, was the first Islamic kingdom in eastern Indonesia, to be precise, in the Maluku Islands. The Kingdom of Ternate played an important role in spreading the archipelago’s Islamic religion, especially in the eastern region of Indonesia. The Kingdom of Ternate was founded in 1257 and experienced its heyday in the 16th century or around 1600.

The glory of the Kingdom of Ternate was due to the fact that the Kingdom of Ternate was a large kingdom which had a commodity of spices, which at that time, spices were one of the most sought-after and quite valuable food ingredients. In addition to having abundant commodity spices, the kingdom of Ternate also has military strength to be reckoned with because of the many soldiers in the kingdom of Ternate.

The collapse of the Ternate kingdom began when western countries began to colonize, at that time the Portuguese came and wanted to control the Ternate Kingdom but failed because the Ternate Kingdom succeeded in fighting the Portuguese. However, when the Dutch came, Ternate finally lost because the Dutch monopolized trade from the Ternate kingdom with contracts that were unfair and detrimental to the Ternate kingdom.

3. Samudera Pasai Kingdom (1267-1521)

The Kingdom of Samudra Pasai or also known as the kingdom of Samudra Darussalam is a kingdom located in the northern part of the island of Sumatra, to be precise, now in the province of Aceh in the city of Lhokseumawe. The administrative center of the Samudra Pasai kingdom was on the outskirts of the Krueng Jambu Aye and Krueng Pase rivers. The kingdom of Samudera Pasai does not have a stone fortress like most other kingdoms.

But the fortress of the Samudra Pasai Kingdom is in the form of a fence made of wood that surrounds the kingdom. The Kingdom of Samudra Pasai has the main commodity of pepper as a superior commodity. Pepper from the Kingdom of Samudra Pasai is known for its good quality and is in great demand by buyers. The collapse of the Samudra Pasai Kingdom began with a civil war that never ended until the Portuguese came and finally the Portuguese conquered this Pasai oceanic empire.

As the first Islamic kingdom, the Samudra Pasai Sultanate is often admired by various people. One of them is the world explorer from Italy Marco Polo which you can read in the book Tracing the City of Islamic Glory.

 

4. Kingdom of Gowa (1300-1945)

The Kingdom of Gowa, also known as the Sultanate of Goa, is an Islamic kingdom located in eastern Indonesia, to be precise, in the province of South Sulawesi. The Kingdom of Gowa was a fairly large and victorious Islamic empire in the 17th century, at that time the Kingdom of Gowa became a kingdom that had considerable military power and became a trade center in eastern Indonesia starting from Sulawesi, Maluku, NTT to eastern Kalimantan. .

Most of the people of Gowa are fishermen and traders, because the Gowa area is located on the coast and is one of the strategic sea trade routes passed by traders from various countries. One of the leaders of the Gowa kingdom who was quite famous and became a national hero was Sultan Hasanudin. Sultan Hasanudin became the just, wise and brave leader of Gowa.

Even Sultan Hasanudin was able to unite the small kingdoms in the Sulawesi area and unite against the Dutch who at that time colonized Indonesia. The Kingdom of Gowa never collapsed and even existed until Indonesian independence, after Indonesia proclaimed its independence the Gowa Sultanate officially joined the Republic of Indonesia and changed its name not to the Kingdom of Gowa but to one of the districts in South Sulawesi, namely Gowa Regency.

5. Sultanate of Malacca (1405-1511)

The Malacca Sultanate is one of the Malay kingdoms that stood in Malaysia, namely in Malacca. The Malacca Sultanate was founded by Parameswara, previously the Malacca Sultanate was a kingdom in the area around Singapore. However, due to attacks from the kingdoms in Java and Siam, the Malacca kingdom moved to an area called Malacca.

The heyday of the Malacca Sultanate was in the 15th century and became one of the largest Islamic empires. The Malacca Kingdom is located in the Malacca Strait which is the strait that separates the Sumatran islands from Malaysia and was one of the most strategic routes for international trade at that time.

The collapse of the Malacca Empire occurred when the Portuguese came and conquered the Malacca Sultanate, with the defeat of the Malacca Sultanate, the Malacca Straits route completely became a free path for the invaders to traverse. The collapse of the Malacca Sultanate also opened the gate for the invaders to come to the archipelago.

6. Cirebon Islamic Empire (1430-1677)

The Cirebon Islamic Kingdom or the Cirebon Sultanate is one of the oldest Islamic kingdoms in Indonesia and its legacy still exists today and its sustainability is still maintained. The Sultanate of Cirebon is located in the Cirebon area which is a strategic area in the north of the island of Java and is the border between Central Java and West Java.

The Cirebon Sultanate also became a well-known sultanate in the area of ​​West Java and the Cirebon Sultanate had a great influence on Islam in Java, especially in terms of the spread of Islam in Java. The Sultanate of Cirebon joined Indonesia after Indonesia’s independence and changed its name to the regency and city of Cirebon, each headed by a Regent and Mayor.

 

7. Kingdom of Demak (1478-1554)

The Kingdom of Demak, also known as the Sultanate of Demak, is an Islamic kingdom located in the Demak area, Central Java. The Kingdom of Demak played a big role in the spread of Islam in Indonesia, especially in Java. The Sultanate of Demak did not last long due to a power struggle by royal relatives.

The existence of a power struggle by royal relatives caused the Demak Sultanate to collapse. The Great Mosque of Demak is one of the legacies of the Demak Sultanate that exists today. The Great Mosque of Demak is believed to be a mosque during the Demak Sultanate which was founded by Walisongo.

The Kingdom of Demak was a well-respected Islamic Empire at that time, until it finally collapsed due to a civil war that fought for power. After the Cirebon sultanate collapsed and was replaced by his heir, he established his own kingdom called the Pajang kingdom or the Pajang Sultanate.

8. The Islamic Kingdom of Banten (1526-1813)

The Islamic Kingdom of Banten is an Islamic Kingdom located in the Banten area which is now the Banten Province. The Sultanate of Banten originated from the Sultanate of Cirebon and the Sultanate of Demak, which were expanding their territory in the northern region of Java Island. The Cirebon Sultanate and the Demak Sultanate then succeeded in conquering several port areas on the west coast of Java Island, one of which was Banten.

The conquest of ports in several areas on the west coast of the island of Java was intended to anticipate the occurrence of a trade monopoly between the Portuguese and the Kingdom of Sunda at that time. Until finally after succeeding in conquering Banten, Maulana Hasanudin, who was the son of Sunan Gunung Jati, founded his own sultanate, namely the Sultanate of Banten and made it a military base because the Sultanate of Banten was known to have strong military power at that time.

9. The Kingdom of Pajang (1568-1586)

The Kingdom of Pajang or the Sultanate of Pajang is a kingdom located in Central Java, this Kingdom of Pajang is a kingdom founded by one of the heirs of the Demak Kingdom after the collapse of the Demak Kingdom due to civil war due to a power struggle in the Demak kingdom at that time. The Kingdom of Demak initially had a fairly large area, but after changing to the Kingdom of Pajang. The territory of the Pajang Kingdom was getting smaller, only part of Central Java and the Demak area itself.

This is because after the Demak kingdom collapsed, many areas in East Java that were previously part of the Demak kingdom’s territorial powers then separated so that the Pajang kingdom’s territory became smaller. The collapse of the Pajang kingdom was also caused by wars between royal relatives which caused the government to fall apart and fight for power until finally the Pajang kingdom collapsed.

10. Islamic Mataram Kingdom (1588-1680)

The Islamic Mataram Kingdom or the Islamic Mataram sultanate is a kingdom located on the island of Java, to be precise, in Central Java. The Mataram Kingdom became one of the strongest Islamic kingdoms and had a fairly large area, covering the islands of Java, Madura to Sukadana or now the area of ​​West Kalimantan. The Mataram kingdom was led by a dynasty called the Mataram dynasty, which was led by the Mataram dynasty.

The Mataram Kingdom was at its peak in the 16th century, to be precise, when it was under the leadership of Hanyakrakusuma. During the Dutch colonial period, the Mataram Sultanate was de facto an independent kingdom or sovereign state itself and was not under Dutch colonialism. So that the Kingdom of Mataram and the Netherlands (VOC) sent their respective envoys like ambassadors to establish cooperation and strengthen relations between the Mataram kingdom and the Dutch (VOC).

One of the most well-known kings of the Mataram kingdom was Sultan Agung, King Sultan Agung became a king who was highly respected by his people because his leadership made the Mataram kingdom prosperous, peaceful and prosperous. Even Sultan Agung was also named as one of Indonesia’s national heroes.

Sultan Agung built a cemetery in the Imogiri area, which is located tens of kilometers from Yogyakarta, and even this Imogiri cemetery still exists today and is a special cemetery for sultans or royal descendants in Surakarta and Yogyakarta. Relics from the Mataram Kingdom still exist today and are a tourist attraction because the original remains are still preserved.

During the period of the Islamic kingdoms in Java, there was a political and religious transformation from the Hindu-Buddhist kingdoms to the Islamic kingdoms in Java and you can read about this in the book Genealogy of Islamic Empires in Java by P. Mardiyono which is below.

 

 

Books Related to the First Islamic Empire in Indonesia

Majapahit riots & the establishment of the Islamic empire in Java

This book examines the history of the transition of power in the Land of Java, namely from the Majapahit Kingdom to an Islamic-style royal power, the Sultanate of Demak.

The Collapse of the Hindu Kingdoms in Java & the Establishment of the Islamic Empire

The historical map in Java is concerned not only with the existence of kingdoms in the past.

Get to know the Archipelago Islamic Kingdom

“A great nation is a nation that values ​​its history. The sentence is indeed fitting to describe a great nation. However, it is ironic that in this so-called modern era, the younger generation seems reluctant to see history as just a part of the past that is not even important to learn about.

Never mind the history of the nation, maybe if we ourselves are asked the names of our own ancestors, we can only stick to our grandparents. Above it has been forgotten as if it is not important. Even though whatever position you are in now, you will not be separated from your own family at least. This is important as your identity in forming character

Yourself. This book is here to try to introduce us to the history of Islamic empires in the archipelago. As Muslims, you should know not only as an insight, but also as a character for you as a Muslim. Happy reading and hopefully useful!!”

The legacy of the Islamic empire and its brief history

The relics of the Islamic Empire in the archipelago are spread throughout the archipelago, especially in areas where the Islamic Empire was established. Examples of relics from the Islamic empire are in the form of palace buildings, historical mosque buildings and several objects used by the community and the kingdom during the time when the Islamic Empire in the archipelago was still victorious.

For example, the Samudra Pasai kingdom left quite a lot of archaeological evidence including dirham gold coins which were used as the main transaction tool at that time, then the tomb of Sultan Malik Al Saleh, the Cakra Donya Bell which was a gift from China and several tales of Pasai.

Apart from that, there is also the Aceh Darussalam kingdom which left a legacy in the form of Taman Sari Gunongan, the Baiturahman Mosque, the Tomb of Sultan Iskandar Muda and gold coins. The Kingdom of Demak also has relics that still exist today, namely the Demak Mosque, the bledeg door and the Tomb of Sunan Kalijaga.

Meanwhile, the Kingdom of Cirebon became an Islamic kingdom that had the most palace heritage among other kingdoms, even the number of palaces of the Cirebon kingdom was the largest among other Islamic kingdoms. Relics from other Islamic empires are also quite a lot and most of them are in the form of palace buildings, forts, mosques, tombs and some knick knacks of objects that were used during the kingdom.

So, that’s an explanation of the first Islamic empire in Indonesia that Sinaumed’s needs to know as a Muslim and an Indonesian citizen. Studying history certainly takes time and requires a lot of references. sinaumedia can visit sinaumedia’s book collection at  https://sinaumedia.com to get a complete book reference about the first Islamic empire in Indonesia.

Book & Article Recommendations Related to the First Islamic Kingdom in Indonesia

The Country That First Recognized Indonesia’s Independence – In order for a country to be independent, it
must receive recognition for independence from other countries, as well as during the process of
independence from the state of Indonesia. As Sinaumed’s already knows, the Indonesian state
announced its independence on August 17, 1945 and at the same time became the day Indonesia was inaugurated
as a sovereign and independent country.

Turning a country into a sovereign nation is not an easy thing. As we have said above, that in
order to become an independent and sovereign country, a country must gain recognition. The
acknowledgment is also divided into two types, namely de facto acknowledgment and de jure acknowledgment.
A country that wants to be independent and sovereign must get both recognition from other
countries.

In the history of Indonesian independence, the Egyptian state became the first country to grant recognition
of independence to Indonesia as an independent and sovereign country. This fact is stated in a
book written by Lukman Hakiem entitled Caring for Indonesia. The State of Egypt gave this
recognition after the text of the proclamation was proclaimed by the First President of Indonesia, Ir
Soekarno.

According to the information we got, the other countries that gave recognition of independence to the
Indonesian state after the Egyptian state were the Syrian state, followed by the Vatican State, the Lebanese
State, and the Yemeni State. These five countries became the first Top 5 countries to grant
recognition of independence to the Indonesian state after the proclamation.

In this article, we will invite Sinaumed’s to learn about the brief history of Indonesian independence, the types
and meanings of the two types of recognition of sovereignty and independence, and explain the first five
countries to recognize the sovereignty of the Indonesian state along with the background why these five
countries became the first countries. which gave recognition of independence to the Indonesian state.

A Brief History of Indonesian Independence
Moments

After being colonized for a long time, Indonesian youths decided to form various groups of nationalist movements
to encourage the implementation of an independent Indonesian state free from the snares of Dutch colonialism.

These organizations have almost the same goal, namely for independence and to get rid of Dutch colonialism.
There are several well-known youth organizations that are often mentioned in history textbooks,
such as the Budi Utomo organization, Sarekat Islam, the Indonesian National Party, and even the Indonesian
Communist Party. These organizations developed very rapidly around the middle of the 20th
century.

There are three of the four organizations above that have the same goals and strategies, the three
organizations are Budi Utomo, Sarekat Islam, and the Indonesian National Party. The three
organizations devised a plan to send representatives from each organization to be sent to the Dutch people’s
council with the hope that the Netherlands would give Indonesia the right to be able to freely govern itself
without being accompanied by Dutch interference.

There was also another nationalist movement that asked for freedom from the Dutch using a path that was
considered uncooperative. The non-cooperative movement was led by Ir. Soekarno
with his friend Mohammad Hatta at that time. At that time, the two of them were still students
who were brave enough to lead such an organization. Movement from this non-cooperative movement
became easier because at that time the Netherlands was carrying out an Ethical Policy policy.

Furthermore, when it entered the period of Japanese occupation in Indonesia, to be precise during the
Second World War it became a golden period to support the progress of the revolutionary movement in the
future. It is known that the Netherlands no longer has much power over Indonesia, due to the
entry of Japan into Indonesia. In just three months, Japan had succeeded in seizing Sumatra.
After successfully seizing several areas of Indonesia from the Dutch, the Japanese made plans to
win the hearts of the Indonesian people by tempting Indonesia’s independence.

In implementing the plan to win the heart of the Indonesian state, Japan legalized the use of Indonesian as
an everyday language. This made the Indonesian state give birth to many independence
organizations and struggles throughout the country. When the Japanese state was on the verge of
their defeat in the Second World War, the Dutch state returned to Indonesia to take their place in Indonesia
again.

On September 7, 19744, the Japanese government promised to free Indonesia as soon as possible, although the
exact date was not announced. This was done because Japan was afraid that the Dutch would take
over Indonesia again. Japan also formed several organizations to prepare for the inauguration
of Indonesian independence.

After Japan declared defeat in the Second World War, Indonesia, especially the youth, urged several figures
to immediately proclaim Indonesia’s independence. During the making of the short text of the
proclamation, finally the Indonesian state was able to independently proclaim their independence on August
17, 1945.

Two Types of Declaration of Independence

As sinaumedia read earlier, that there are two types of recognition of sovereignty and independence that must
be recognized by other countries if a country wants to be independent. Following are the two
types of recognition of independence.

1. Types of De Facto Recognition of Independence

De Facto comes from Latin which in language can be interpreted as an expression that has the meaning of
reality/facts or can also be interpreted as original events and practices. According to the
legal view, de facto is defined as a term that tends to lead to something that has already happened,
although this has not yet been recognized or even has not received legal recognition.

De facto is generally used as the opposite or opposite of the term de jure (from a legal point of view)
when someone tends to refer to anything related to law, government systems, or other technical matters that
occur in everyday life. and develop not in accordance with existing regulations. De jure itself
is often associated with legal situations and what is said by applicable law, while de facto is associated
with things that have happened and actual things.

The use of the term de facto has several provisions. The term can be used if an event has
occurred which is considered relevant, established and acceptable. De facto does not require a
legal basis or relevant standards.

Type de facto by nature

De facto is divided into two types based on their nature, namely:

– Temporary de facto

De facto with this type is an acknowledgment that comes from another country without having to look at the
conditions and developments of the country giving the recognition. If the country is in a state
of destruction, then other countries will withdraw recognition from that country.

– Fixed De Facto

De Facto with a fixed type is an acknowledgment conveyed by other countries that can provide opportunities for
cooperative relations between these countries in the economic and trade fields.

De facto standard

De Facto has standards which have the understanding that a standard that is considered normal for ordinary people
that they follow these standards is like an official standard from the center.

2. Types of De Jure Recognition of Independence

De jure which in Classical Latin: de iure has the meaning of a term which means based on or according to legal
views, de jure is of course different from de facto, which is based on facts or facts.

These two terms are quite popularly used as pronouns for the sentence “in principle or law” and the
sentence “in fact or fact” when someone is giving a description of a political condition.
Something can become de facto when the person agrees to pretend that there is a law that
accompanies or regulates it, when in reality there is no law involved in the case. There is a
process that allows de facto to become a substitute for existing and outdated laws, the name of this process
is desuetude. On the other hand, an action or activity will be recorded in a de jure or
regulation, even though the implementation of the rule never happened.

Type de jure based on its nature

De jure is divided into two types based on its nature, namely:

1. Full De Jure

De jure which is full means that there is a relation or relationship between countries that recognize each
other in the fields of trade, economy and diplomacy. The country that grants recognition must
have an ambassador and establish an embassy in the country they recognize.

2. De Jure Stay

Permanent de jure is a form of recognition submitted by another country and has perpetual or eternal
validity. This is because a recognized country can show a stable government in that
country.

De facto standard

De jure and de facto countries have different levels of standards depending on the country.
for the United States itself they do not use the de jure term and only use the de facto term spoken
in English.

The First Five
Countries to Recognize Indonesia’s Independence After the Proclamation

After knowing the brief history of the moments of independence and the two types of recognition of
sovereignty. Now is the time for us to present the first five countries to recognize
Indonesia’s independence.

1. The State of Egypt

Egypt became the first country to recognize Indonesia’s independence. The Egyptian state
recognized Indonesia’s de facto independence on March 22, 1947, this recognition and support from Egypt
began with the arrival of an Egyptian State Consul General named Muhammad Abdul Mun’im to Yogyakarta on
March 13 to March 16, 1947. So what was the purpose of his visit? The Consul General of Egypt?
The Government of the State of Egypt ordered Muhammad Abdul Mun’im to convey a message to Indonesia
that the Arab League would support and recognize Indonesia’s independence.

The Arab League itself is an organization whose members are Arab countries, such as Egypt, Syria, Lebanon,
Yemen, and many more. After the delivery of this message, the Egyptian state recognized and
supported de facto Indonesian independence on March 22, 1947. After the de facto recognition of
independence, the Egyptian state continued to recognize it de jure through the signing of an agreement on
friendly relations with Indonesia on June 10, 1947.

At the signing, parties from the Indonesian state were represented by Haji Agoes Salim, Nazir Pamoentjak,
AR Baswedan, and Rasjidi. Then for the Egyptian side represented by Mahmud Fahmi Nokrashi.
This acknowledgment of independence from the Egyptian state plays a very important and meaningful
role for Indonesia because the Egyptian state not only recognizes Indonesia’s independence but the Egyptian
state also invites the Arab League countries to provide support and recognize Indonesia’s
independence.

Actually the recognition of independence from the Egyptian state began with the support and strength given
by the Egyptian people. In Egypt itself, the mass media has been very critical and furious with
the Dutch treatment of Indonesia. The Egyptian youths who were moved in their hearts carried
out a series of demonstrations to make the Dutch Embassy in Cairo insecure.

What is the background for the Egyptian state to provide support and recognition of independence for the
Indonesian state? The support and recognition given by the Egyptian state is motivated by
religious relations, brotherly relations between Egypt and Indonesia, as well as family relations.
In addition, Egypt supports and recognizes this independence because of the diplomatic relations
that have been agreed between Indonesia and Egypt.

2. The State of Syria

When Indonesia became independent, Indonesia was not completely free from the Dutch colonial state.
At that time the Netherlands was carrying out Dutch Military Aggression in Indonesia and the Syrian
state became one of the Arab League countries that assisted Indonesia in fighting for this. the
Syrian state helped Indonesia fight for it at the UN session held in 1947, represented by Faris Al-Khouri.
The role of the Syrian state in the UN session was to push the agenda regarding the “Indonesian
question” which eventually triggered various encouragements from other countries and finally succeeded in
stopping the Dutch movement against Indonesia and finding a bright spot at the 1949 UN session.

Thanks to the assistance from the Syrian state, finally the Dutch military aggression was successfully
stopped. It is known that the Syrian state has established bilateral relations with Indonesia
since the Syrian state declared to support and recognize Indonesia’s de jure independence on July 2, 1947.
From this recognition, the Syrian state also established diplomatic relations with the Indonesian state.
With this, the Syrian state became the second country to recognize Indonesia’s independence after
the Egyptian state.

The background to the support and recognition of Indonesia’s independence from the Syrian state is because
the Syrian state and the Indonesian state are both countries where the majority of the population embraces
Islam; the countries of Syria and Indonesia are countries that both care about and understand
the issues that are happening in the countries of Palestine, Lebanon and Iraq; because of the
feeling of the same fate because both have been colonized by western nations.

3. The State of the Vatican

The Vatican State became the first country on the European Continent to provide support and recognition of
independence for the Indonesian state. The Vatican State officially recognized Indonesia’s de
jure independence on July 6, 1947. This was marked by the establishment of the Vatican embassy building
located in Jakarta.

Pope Pius XII at the Vatican gave orders to Marie Joseph to go to Indonesia and became the Vatican’s ambassador
in Indonesia with the implementation period from 1947 to 1955. Marie Joseph was given the task of acting as an
intermediary between the holy throne of the Vatican and the government of the Indonesian state.

The support and acknowledgment of Indonesia’s independence from the Vatican state is the most important
moment for the Indonesian state. Why is that? This is because the Vatican state is
a country that has a strong impact and influence in the religious and social fields in the European
continent and the American region. Recognition and support from the Vatican state can increase
support from other countries to recognize and support Indonesian independence.

The background why the Vatican state provides support and recognition of independence to the Indonesian
state is due to the fact that there are some similarities in the principles of the Vatican state and the
Indonesian state. The similarity of these principles, such as the two countries both support
world peace, the two countries reject the existence of atheist beliefs, the two countries both build harmony
between religious communities throughout the world, the two countries both want to create justice for all
people in the world, and the last two countries are equally preserving the level of human welfare.

4. The State of Lebanon

The Lebanese state is the fourth country from all over the world and the third country in the Arab League
countries that supports and recognizes Indonesia’s independence after the Vatican state and the Syrian
state. The Lebanese state itself has established bilateral relations with the Indonesian state
since the Lebanese state gave recognition of Indonesia’s de facto independence on July 29, 1947 which was
conveyed directly by the Lebanese President at the time, Bechara El-Khoury. Three years later
in 1950, Lebanon officially established diplomatic relations with the Indonesian state as well as being the
moment when de jure recognition was announced. The event was held at the Indonesian embassy in
Cairo which is also accredited by Lebanon.

In the mid-1950s, the Indonesian state built a representative office in Beirut, Lebanon but in the end it
was closed because at that time there were unfavorable conditions in Lebanon due to the Lebanese Civil War.
Then in 1995, Lebanon built an embassy building in Jakarta and they returned Indonesia’s services
at the next opportunity. Right in 2006, Indonesia sent 1,000 soldiers who were assigned to
become members of the UN peacekeeping force for southern Lebanon.

The background why the Lebanese state as well as the majority of Arab League countries provide support and
recognition of independence to the Indonesian state is because the majority of the Indonesian state’s
population adheres to the same religion as the Lebanese state, namely Islam. This causes the
emergence of various feelings such as a sense of brotherhood and kinship between countries where the
majority of the population is Muslim; the large number of Indonesian citizens studying in
Middle Eastern countries; and the last one is because we share the same fate as having been
colonized by Western countries.

5. Country of Yemen

The country of Yemen is the last Top 5 country to provide support and recognition of independence to the
Indonesian state. The Yemeni state recognized the independence of the Indonesian state on May
3, 1948. After that the bilateral relations between Yemen and Indonesia continued to increase and improve
both in the economic, political, social and cultural fields. The relationship has even been
going on for 70 years.

As Sinaumed’s has read in the Arab countries section, after the Indonesian state proclaimed its independence
on August 17, 1945, some of the countries that were members of the Arab League provided their support and
recognition of independence for the Indonesian state. This was a very important moment for the
Indonesian people.

Just like other Arab League countries, the background for the Yemeni state to provide recognition and
support for the independence of the Indonesian state is based on a sense of kinship and brotherhood because
the two countries both have a population where the majority are Muslims. In addition, because
the two countries already have bilateral relations between countries.

So, those were the first five countries that provided support and acknowledgment of the independence of the
Indonesian state that we can convey to Sinaumed’s. We as citizens of Indonesia must thank these
five countries and always help each other, promote peace and prosperity with the five countries.
Without the recognition and support from these countries and the struggles of all Indonesia’s
founding figures, this country would not have developed to what it is today.

Fast walking or commonly called race walking is a branch of athletics. Although almost the same as running, these two sports have many differences.

The most obvious difference between brisk walking and running is in the movement of the legs. In race walking , one foot will always appear to touch or be on the ground. Meanwhile, in running, in a few moments both feet will appear to be floating above the ground.

In addition, when doing race walking , the person’s body should not feel stiff, especially in the hips. The hips are known to be the most important determining part in fast walking movements. Comfortable and relaxed hip movements can make brisk walking movements perfect.

Even though race walking seems easy like human activities in general, fast walking has special techniques and rules that must be understood. Therefore, for Sinaumed’s who want to learn about fast walking, let’s look at the following review!

Definition of Fast Road

According to the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI), fast walking can be understood as a branch of athletics which is carried out by stepping quickly forward and the feet are never disconnected from touching the ground. This sport is usually contested in various competitions, from the regional, national, to international arenas.

Meanwhile, based on the book Physical Education, Sports, and Health (2017) by Muhajir, brisk walking can be defined as a step forward that is carried out in such a way that contact with the ground is not interrupted and is maintained.

As an athletic sport that is contested, race walking is included in the responsibility of the world athletics organization or commonly known as the International Amateur Athletic Federation (IAAF).

Reporting from the official website of the IAAF, the fast walking numbers contested at the biggest sporting event in the world, the summer Olympics, include the 20-kilometer (men’s and women’s) and 50-kilometre (men’s) sprints.

History of the Fast Walk

Fast walking is included in athletics which can also be referred to as the “mother or mother” of all kinds of sports. This is because this sport focuses on body movements using these legs and is the oldest sport in the world.

Basically athletic movements have been seen since the beginning of early human life. Walking, running, jumping and throwing activities are unconsciously human efforts in adapting to the environment. It could be, these activities are used in an effort to save themselves from the disturbances around them.

In 390 BC, the development of a nation was centered on increasing physical strength, especially the development towards a harmonious and harmonious body shape. It’s the same with a combination of several activities such as gymnastics, grammar, and music. Even so, race walking is known to be quite difficult to distinguish from running.

Fast walking sport itself began to grow and develop in 1867 in London, England. Over time, the 10 Km race walking sport began to be competed on the track of one of the sports in the biggest sporting event in the world, namely the 1912 Olympics.

Meanwhile, in 1956, fast walking has successfully become an official sport and competed in the Olympics. Furthermore, at the 1976 Olympics, there was a 20 km race walking event. It didn’t stop there, at the 1980 Olympics in Moscow, a 50 km fast walk was added to the race number.

In Indonesia itself, the race walking competition began as a number contested in the 1978 national athletics championship. At that time, the distances contested for women were 5 km and 10 km, while for men they were 10 km and 20 km.

Fast Walking Basic Techniques

Simply put, brisk walking can be done by moving your feet forward in such a way. Of course, with a note that the hind feet must always be in contact with the ground. If both feet fly off the ground when making a forward motion, an athlete may be subject to a violation.

During fast walking, the foot that moves forward must touch the ground first before the back foot moves off the ground. In addition, it is known that the supporting leg must always be straight and not bent at the knee when in an upright position.

The basic technique of fast walking basically has four techniques, namely the start technique, body position technique, footfall technique, and finish technique. So, here is an explanation of the four basic techniques in race walking , including:

1. Prefix Technique (Start)

Prefix technique or so-called start is a technique that is done before starting fast walking. In this prefix technique it is known that there are no special movements that need to be done. The sprint participants only need to stand behind the start line.

So, the steps that need to be carried out in the prefix technique in race walking are as follows:

1. Competitors must wait for the sound or direction “do” behind the start line
2. Participants must position their left foot directly behind the starting line and their right foot behind their left foot
3. Next, the participant’s body must be leaned forward with both hands in a relaxed position
4. When the officer hears a “gun shot” or “yes” sound, the participant can move his right foot as quickly as possible while moving his right foot first, followed by his left leg as quickly as possible and with relaxed arm swings and hips.

2. Body Position Techniques

After successfully doing the prefix technique, the next technique that must be mastered is related to body position. When doing fast walking movements, participants must have the right body position. This is because the position of the body is very decisive in doing brisk walking effectively or not.

Therefore, the attitude or position of the body that is good and correct when doing brisk walking, namely positioning the body facing forward. Meanwhile, the elbows are bent so that they form a 90 degree angle with the arm swings and footsteps moving in rhythm.

3. Footsteps Technique

After understanding the technique of proper and correct body position when doing brisk walking, the next technique that needs to be understood is the footwork technique. The correct step technique for fast walking is to focus on the mass or weight of the body on the thighs.

This is because the thighs have a very important role in maintaining the balance of brisk walking. As previously explained, fast walking participants must stay on the ground on one leg.

Therefore, this footstep technique is quite an influential technique because it can be done by keeping the swing of the legs while bending the knees according to the steps taken. Not only that, the heel of the foot must touch the ground first to maintain the certainty of the foot position.

4. Final Technique (Finish)

After successfully performing the prefix technique, body position, and footsteps correctly, the next technique of brisk walking is the ending or finish technique. At first glance, this ending technique is quite easy to do, it’s just that this technique is often not done by novice participants.

When a fast walking sports participant touches the finish line, the participant is not allowed to stop at that moment. Participants are required to keep fast walking until about five meters from the finish line. After more than five meters, participants can start to slow down until they finally come to a complete stop.

Introducing exercise is very good because it can maintain a healthy body. Even better, if you introduce sports through various kinds of sports knowledge, so that you have more insight into the world of sports. The Sports Smart Children’s Encyclopedia book is a suitable book for the child to explore the origins of sports.

Specific Movement Phases of Brisk Walking

After knowing the four basic techniques of the ideal brisk walking sport. Fast walking movements can be done with more specific movements. So, here are the specific motion phases of brisk walking quoted from the Class VIII Middle School PJOK book (2018), including:

1. Single Support Phase

The single support phase can be understood as a preparatory phase for acceleration and foot placement of the free leg. In carrying out this phase, participants can use two ways, namely:

a. Front Strut Specific Motion

The specific movement of the front support can be done by positioning the active front foot with a backwards preparation motion. Competitors may perform the addition phase as short as possible with the knee of the forelimb extended. Next, the leg is swung over the front support leg with the knee, and the lower leg is tried to stay low.

b. Rear Strut Specific Motion

Specific motion of the back support can be done by keeping the supporting leg straight. The supporting leg remains straightened as long as possible. Furthermore, the foot of the supporting leg can be directed forward and rolled along the outside of the sole of the foot to the tip of the toe. Next, the free leg can cross the support leg with the knee while the lower leg is kept low and the forefoot can be placed.

2. Double Support Phase

In addition to the single-support phase, the multiple-support phase can be performed by maintaining contact with the body at all times. In the double support phase, the following are the basic principles that need to be followed, namely:

1. The forefoot lands gently on the heel. Meanwhile, the back foot is in a raised heel position.
2. Next, alternately swing both arms.

The Phases of a Brisk Walking Technique Activity

In addition to the specific motion phases of fast walking, there are also four phases of fast walking technical activity that you need to know, including the following:

1. Two Foot Pedestal Phase

The first phase is the two-foot pedestal movement. This phase can be done very briefly. When both feet touch the ground, at that moment the push ends and is followed by a pulling movement. A longer pull can create opposite movements of the shoulders and hips.

2. Phase of Attraction

Furthermore, the second phase of the pulling movement can be started after the previous movement is complete. This pulling movement is done with the forefoot through the work of the heel and coordination of all parts of the body. This movement can be completed when the position of the body is above the supporting leg.

3. Relaxation Phase

The relaxation movement phase lies between the end of the pulling phase and the beginning of the pushing phase. Your waist should be in the same plane as your shoulders or arms vertical and parallel to your sides.

4. The Push Phase

The fourth phase or the encouragement phase can be done when the previous phase has been completed. When the body’s center of gravity is focused on the fulcrum, the leg that has just finished pulling can start the pushing movement. Next, the other leg can move forward and straighten.

After that, when stepping forward with a wide range of motion, the waist will be on the same side and forward in the same direction, resulting in a great deal of flexibility. This further provides a boost to the body and legs with the aim of speeding up the steps on fast walking.

Next, the arms can function as a diametrical or natural counterweight and opposite the legs.

Speedway Rules

As with competitions, there are several rules set so that fast walking can be carried out in a fair and fair manner. The following are fast road regulations that have been established by the IAAF, including:

1. A brisk walk should be done with the front foot on the ground while the back foot is lifted for a step.
2. If the athlete does not do this then the athlete is deemed to have violated.
3. Participants are disqualified if they receive three red cards from three different judges. The red card is given by the head of the jury. If it’s just the initial violation, the athlete is only given a yellow card.
4. When starting the prefix or start it must be done standing up. The athlete may not touch the ground with his hands.
5. An athlete is deemed to have won the match if the athlete’s body (not head, arms or legs) crosses the finish line.

Benefits of Fast Walking

For Sinaumed’s who are bored with running, brisk walking can be an alternative. There are many benefits that can be obtained when doing brisk walking.

The rules for this sport are quite easy, every one kilometer in 12 minutes or a distance of 5 kilometers is covered in 1 hour. You can use your phone or watch to calculate the walking speed.

So, here are some of the benefits that can be obtained from brisk walking, quoted from the Mayo Clinic website, namely:

1. Maintain a healthy weight.
2. Prevent and manage a variety of conditions, including heart disease, stroke, high blood pressure, cancer, and type 2 diabetes.
3. Improve heart function.
4. Strengthen the bones and muscles of the body.
5. Improve mood, thinking ability, memory, and quality of sleep because it can reduce stress.
6. Strengthen the immune system.
7. Improve body balance and coordination.

All the benefits above are of course more than the usual way. Considering that brisk walking can also burn more calories than regular walking, this is very effective for friends who are in the process of losing weight. So, are you interested in doing brisk walking?

Sinaumed’s can do brisk walking anytime, be it on holidays or before and after work. You only need to count the time and steps. Well, as explained above, how to do brisk walking just by positioning your body, steps, and synchronized hand and foot movements.

The example of Prophet Lut AS- Examining the history of a people who were punished by Allah SWT because of their actions that violated the limits of the nature given by Him. Namely, the people of the prophet Lut who became the forerunner of same-sex relations were carried out and this caused the wrath of Allah who gave natural disasters to the people of the prophet Lut US at that time which destroyed them all.

Even though as a prophet he had delivered various da’wah and spread God’s orders to follow His teachings, all the actions and deeds of the people of the prophet Lut had gone too far beyond the limits to be able to receive guidance from Allah SWT.

For this reason, as Muslims, it is appropriate for us to draw closer to Him and ask for protection from all the evil that we have the potential to do, either intentionally or unintentionally, because as humans we will never escape sin.

Following the story of the prophet Lut AS and the history of his people who were destroyed by Allah SWT certainly gives us many examples and valuable lessons that we can take in navigating life in this temporary world and as provisions for life after the world.

All the obstacles and trials faced by the prophet Lut AS who is also the messenger of Allah SWT to spread goodness and convey the commands of Allah SWT even though his people ignore it and end up getting punishment from Allah SWT.

For this reason, as a guide in living this life, we also have to know what role models the prophet Lut US used and in this discussion we have summarized the examples and wisdom from the story of Prophet Lut AS for Sinaumed’s friends to learn and practice in everyday life. day.

Furthermore, we have presented the discussion below!

History of the Prophet Lut AS

Lut or Lut (Arabic: لوط, translit. Lūth‎) is a character in the Quran, Bible and Tanakh. In Islam, he is an apostle sent to the people of Sodom and Gomorrah. His story is often used as the basis for the prohibition of homosexual acts in Abrahamic religions.

Lut is one of the prophets and messengers in Islam. Like the prophets in general, Lut is also a role model for pious people. His story in the Qur’an also emphasizes his role as a messenger, namely his preaching so that his people fear Allah and return to the right path. The Qur’an mentions that Lut (and several other prophets) was exalted in rank over other people, God’s chosen figure, and was awarded guidance to the straight path

“And (remember) when Lut said to his people, ‘You really did a very heinous act which had never been done by any of the people before you. Is it right for you to go to men, drink robbery, and do evil in the places where you meet?’”

— Al-‘Ankabut (29): 28-29

It was stated that the inhabitants of Sodom committed homosexual acts between men, used to commit robberies, committed various crimes at their meeting places, and no one wanted to prevent these evils. Lut preached that they fear Allah. He emphasized that he did not ask for wages for my call. Lut criticized the actions of the Sodomites who had crossed the line and stated that their actions had never been done by anyone else before.

Receiving Lot’s warning, the Sodomites refused. They said that Lut was just a person who pretended to be holy and threatened to expel him. The people of Sodom also strictly forbade Lut to give protection to people they would rob or rape. Furthermore, they also asked that Lut immediately bring about the doom that had been threatened so far. Receiving opposition from his people, Lut begged Allah,

“O my Lord, help me for the group that did the damage.”

— Al-‘Ankabut (29): 30

Prophet Lut is one of the prophets sent to the land of Sodom and Gomorrah. He was assigned to preach in Sadum, Syam, Palestine. His name is mentioned 27 times in the Koran. The following is among the Words of Allah regarding the story of Prophet Lut in fighting against his people which means: Verily they are an evil and wicked people, and We have included them in Our mercy; for verily he is of the pious.” (QS. al-Anbiya ‘[21]: 74-75)

“The people of Lut had denied the apostles, when their brother, Lot, said to them: why are you not pious?” Verily, I am a trusted messenger (sent) to you, so fear Allah and obey me.

And I never charge you for that invitation; my reward is none other than the Lord of the worlds. Why do you go to the kind of men among humans, and you leave the wives that your Lord has made for you, even you are people who transgress the limits “. They replied: “O Lut, in fact if you do not stop, really you are among those who were expelled.” Lut said: “Indeed I really hate your actions”. (Luth prays): “O my Lord, save me and my family from (the consequences of) the actions they are doing”. Then We saved him and all of his family, except for an old woman (his wife), who was among those who remained. Then we destroyed the others.

And We showered them with rain (stones), so bad was the rain that fell on those who had been warned. Verily, in that there are clear proofs. And it is that most of them do not believe. And verily your Lord, truly He is the Most Mighty, the Most Merciful.” (QS. asy-Syu’ara'[26]: 160-175)

Exemplify and Take Lessons from the Story of the Prophet Lut AS

Prophet Lut’s example is one of the most important things we can practice in our daily lives.

Allah made Lut a prophet with the aim of awakening his people who had sinned. As we know, the people of the Prophet Lut are known as the Sodomites.

As Allah says in the Quran Surah Al A’raf verse 80 which means “And We sent Lut to his people. Remember when Lut said to them: ‘Why are you doing abominable things that no one has ever done before?’

The Sodomites themselves were very far from God. They usually rob, rape and commit crimes in everyday life.

Even more than that, they also like the same sex. Sometimes they also harass people who don’t want to be invited to satisfy their lust.

For that, let’s look at the story of the prophet Lut and follow the wisdom behind it.

1. Not easy to give up and persistent in preaching

Prophet Lut’s role model was someone who was persistent and did not give up easily. As pointed out before, it is not easy to become a prophet of Lut.

He had to awaken the deeply aberrant Sodomites. Prophet Lut was also ridiculed and humiliated, even threatened by his own people.

But because of his perseverance and persistence, Lut prayed and tried. Until we have God fulfill their prayers and punish the people of Sodom. So all our hard and serious efforts will definitely pay off.

day after day, month after month, and year after year passed, and Prophet Lut continued to preach. But no one followed him and no one believed in him except his family. Not even his family is a believer at all. Prophet Lut’s wife whose name is Wa’ilah is an infidel like Prophet Noah’s wife: “God made Noah’s wife and Lot’s wife as a parable for the disbelievers. Both are under the supervision of two pious servants among Our servants; then the two wives betrayed their (respective) husbands, so the husbands could not help them at all from (the torment of) Allah; and it was said (to both): “Enter into jahannam with those who enter (jahannam).” (QS. at-Tahrim [66]: 10)

Prophet lut struggled to advise them tirelessly. Then none other than the answer of his people but said: “Expel Lut and his family from your country; because in fact they are people who (proclaim themselves) clean.” (QS. an-Naml [27]: 56).

Because they did not want to listen to the prophet Lut and continued to commit the misguided act, Prophet Lut begged Allah to help him from his people, “Yes, my Lord, help me (by inflicting punishment) on the people who did the damage.” (QS.al. -Ankabut[29]:30)

Even though the Prophet Lut was often threatened, he continued to carry out his mission. He continued to call on his people to renounce homosexual and lesbian adultery. Because these two actions are very contrary to nature and human conscience. In addition, the actions of the Sodomites also damaged the wisdom of creation, namely men and women.

The Prophet Lut also advised the people of Sodom to respect everyone’s property and to abandon the habit of robbing, robbing, and stealing, which had always existed among them. In addition, not a few immigrants who become victims. All the actions of the Sodomites made themselves evil. Because this action creates chaos and uncertainty in the country, so they definitely don’t feel safe and calm in their lives.

However, it was not easy to lead the people of Sodom to God’s way. They still sin and do evil. Finally, the Prophet Lut prayed to God that all the inhabitants of Sodom would be severely punished for not following the right path.

2. Accept trials patiently

Another example from the Prophet Lut that we can practice is always being kind when receiving trials and tests from Allah SWT.

One of the 25 prophets we have to trust is always patient in trials.

Especially when he was humiliated by his own kind. Prophet Lu was never angry or intended to avenge the evil of the Sodomites.

Instead, he was patient and always left whatever happened to Allah SWT. During his preaching days, it was revealed that his wife was cheating on him.

When he saw this, he continued to be patient and give good advice to his wife, even though she deceived him and prevented him from preaching further.

The Prophet Lut never tire of reminding his people of Allah SWT’s severe punishment in his sermon. He asked his people to immediately leave immoral practices that are hateful to Allah SWT. Fed up with the actions of Prophet Lut, the people of Sodom then planned to expel Prophet Lut from the city of Sodom. But before that, they gave a final warning to Prophet Lut. “Oh Lut! If you don’t stop, you will be one of the exiled!”

However, Prophet Lut was not afraid at all. He continues to call on his people to believe and worship Allah SWT. Apart from that, they are also asked to leave bad habits, avoid immorality, crime, avoid the temptations of Satan and Satan.

Prophet Lut warned the Sodomites that Allah SWT is the creator of humans and their natural environment. Allah SWT also does not like all the inhumane actions of the Sodomites.

3. Believe that Allah’s punishment is real

Not only what has been mentioned above, this is one example of Prophet Lut’s example that we can practice. Prophet Lut also believed that God’s punishment was real and existed.

The city of Sodom became the first place for homosexuals and lesbians. In all of human history, no human has practiced homosexuality and lesbianism before the Sodomites did. The reason is, this immoral practice is common in the city of Sodom. Everyone participates and shamelessly admits it in public. In fact, they take great pride in what they do.

Besides moral decline, it is difficult to improve the morale of sodomites. They are irreligious, inhuman and devoid of compassion. They are used to stealing, robbing and killing. Basically the strong rule while the weak are oppressed. And, because of this immoral behavior, Allah gave them (the Sodomites) a real punishment and as a lesson for later humans not to do this in the future.

They all (the prophet Lut US) did not all believe in the words spoken by the prophet Lut when they were given a statement or sermon to the people of Sodom.

Instead, they challenged leniency. Even though they were discovered and humiliated, the prophet Lut (as) kept warning them.

This is what must be an afterthought for all of us to believe that Allah’s punishment is real and if we believe and believe in Him then God’s forgiveness is also real for all of us who ask forgiveness and repent to Him. And from the story of the prophet Lut AS and his people, it gives us a lesson to continue to do good and avoid immoral acts, especially immoral acts that are out of bounds and cannot receive forgiveness from Allah SWT.

4. Obey God’s Commandments

Prophet Lut was one of the prophets who obeyed all of Allah’s commandments. As Muslims, this is certainly our obligation.

This is also so that one day, when the Day of Resurrection, we can avoid Allah’s punishment.

Furthermore, the Prophet Lut never did things that were forbidden in God’s teachings. For this reason, as Muslims, the story is about the struggle of the prophet Lut to face his people who were cursed by Allah, but he remained istiqamah in the way of Allah and stayed away from all his prohibitions.

Thus, the example of Prophet Lut is a big lesson for us. Even though we don’t know how the Prophet Lut’s war against Sodom was, but knowing his story in fighting for God’s commands, we can take many lessons for our lives.

Conclusion

That’s all for a brief discussion of the example from the story of Prophet Lut AS.

From the story of the prophet Lut AS mentioned above, there are many examples that we can learn and lessons that we can learn to live our daily lives. Reading and emulating the story of Prophet Lut AS and his people teaches us to always avoid immorality in order to avoid real punishment if we commit acts of sin that are out of bounds.

Dynamics of Unity and Oneness – Did Sinaumed’s know that the dynamics of national unity and integrity are important to learn as part of our efforts as a nation’s generation to protect and defend the Unitary State of the Republic of Indonesia. Since the proclamation of Indonesian independence on August 17, 1945 there have been many dynamics in maintaining the integrity of Indonesia from time to time until now.

The dynamics of the unity and unity of the Indonesian nation in its manifestation is very strong. There have been various forms of rebellion and all forms of attempts to secede from the Unitary State of the Republic of Indonesia. the dynamism of the Indonesian nation has started since Indonesia succeeded in proclaiming its independence. So in this event the Preparatory Committee for Indonesian Independence (PPKI), cannot be separated from Indonesian history. 

Then the day after the proclamation of independence, on August 18, 1945 to be precise, the Preparatory Committee for Indonesian Independence (PPKI) began holding meetings to determine three important decisions, namely establishing the 1945 Constitution, electing a president and vice president, and forming the KNIP to assist the president. From there the dynamics of national unity and integrity began and continued from time to time in various forms as follows: 

THE DYNAMICS OF THE UNITEDNESS AND CONSTITUTION OF THE INDONESIAN NATION

Revolution Period for Indonesian Independence (18 August 1945-27 December 1949)

The dynamics of the unity and unity of the Indonesian nation can be said to have started since the independence revolution period until 17 August 1945 to 27 December 1949. The Indonesian nation at this time faced the Dutch Colonial who wanted to return to control, the withdrawal of Japanese prisoners who had lost the war, as well as facing various rebellions. During this period of revolution, there was war between the independent Indonesian state, namely between the Republic of Indonesia and the Kingdom of the Netherlands.

The Dutch who said that Indonesia’s independence was illegal, in fact Indonesia had proclaimed its independence openly to the whole world on August 17, 1945. After Indonesian independence, the Dutch came back to try to argue against independence with the arrival of attacks from abroad through military aggression, so that happened war resumed between the two countries.

Looking at it from Indonesia’s point of view, the war was aimed at defending its independence, which is why it is called the war of independence. The period of the independence war occurred from 1945 to 1949. At the end of 1949, the Netherlands officially recognized the sovereignty of the Republic of Indonesia and based on the term on the results of the Round Table Conference it was called the transfer of sovereignty.

In the war of independence, it was finally the Netherlands that lost based on the Round Table Conference agreement which was successfully held. At this time, the period 1945-1949 was called the “War of Independence” period. During the revolution for independence, there were also rebellions to separate themselves from Indonesia, namely the Madiun Indonesian Communist Party (PKI) rebellion in 1948 and Darul Islam or the Indonesian Islamic Army (DI/TII).

United States of Indonesia Republic (RIS) Period (27 December 1949- 17 August 1950)

Does Sinaumed’s know that Indonesia was once a federal state? This period lasted from 27 December 1949 to 17 August 1950. The 1949 Constitution of the United States of Indonesia became the basis for the formation of a federation of 15 states. The President of the United States of Indonesia (RIS) at this time were Soekarno and Drs. Moh. Hatta as Prime Minister. Currently, ministers are responsible to the Prime Minister.

The president at this time was the head of state who was not accompanied by a vice president based on the RIS constitution. If the president is unable to attend, he will be replaced by the prime minister whose government responsibility rests entirely with the prime minister and cabinet ministers. At this time, Indonesia still used a parliamentary system of government, in which the cabinet would be responsible to the parliament and if the cabinet’s accountability was not accepted by the parliament, the cabinet had to be dissolved or resigned. 

The RIS Constitution recognizes six state institutions, namely the president, council of ministers, senate, the House of Representatives (DPR), the Supreme Court (MA), and the Financial Supervisory Board (DPK). This parliamentary government system did not last long, only about eight months. Then RIS was disbanded and Indonesia returned to using the system as a unitary state. The rebellions that occurred during this period were the rebellion of the Ratu Adil Armed Forces (APRA), the Andi Azis Rebellion and the Rebellion of the Republic of South Maluku (RMS).

Based on the results of negotiations at the Round Table Conference with the Netherlands, Indonesia must change from a unitary state to a union state. During the time of the United Republic of Indonesia, there was a dynamic of national unity and unity colored by various rebellions, such as the Ratu Adil War Force Movement (APRA) in Bandung, the Andi Azis rebellion in Makassar and the rebellion of the South Maluku Republican Movement (RMS).

Liberal Democracy Period (17 August 1945- 5 July 1959)

The period of Indonesian Liberal Democracy began on 17 August 1950 until 5 July 1959. Indonesia at this time used the 1950 Provisional Constitution of the Republic of Indonesia (UUDS 1950) which took effect on 17 August 1950. This 1950 UUDS was a form of change from the RIS Constitution which was held in accordance with the Charter of Agreement between the RIS government and the Government of the Republic of Indonesia on May 19, 1950 with the form of the unitary state of Indonesia.

Because Indonesia used the Provisional Constitution, a body was formed to formulate the Constitution. However, there were high political dynamics, and the mutual imposition of the interests of groups and groups so that the discussion of the Constitution became complicated and took a very long time.

That is why President Soekarno decided to issue a Presidential Decree dated July 5, 1959 with the following contents:

• Constituent dissolution
• Re-enforce the 1945 Constitution and no longer apply the 1950 Constitution
• Formation of temporary MPR and DPA

During this period there were various rebellions, such as the Darul Islam/Indonesian Islamic Army (DI/TII) Movement in Sulawesi, Aceh, South Kalimantan and the PRRI/Permesta Rebellion.

Old Order Period or Guided Democracy Period (5 July 1959-12 March 1967)

The Presidential Decree on July 5, 1959 then became the beginning of this period, namely July 5, 1959 to March 11, 1966. The President returned to the position of head of state and head of government since the 1945 Constitution was re-enacted and the position of Prime Minister was no longer valid. The implementation of guided democracy begins with democracy led by wisdom with wisdom in deliberations and representation. 

However, over time it shifted to being led by the President or the Great Leader of the Revolution. That is why in the end everything that is based on government leadership is considered as the ruler. During this old order period, West Irian was united in the State of Indonesia through the Trikora agreement. Previously, in the KMB agreement, the Netherlands did not want to hand over the Irian region to the Indonesian state.

The dynamics that occurred during this period were that the leaders of the MPR, DPR, BPK and MA were given positions as ministers, so they were placed as subordinates to the president. The President then dissolved the DPR in 1960 and Law no. 19 of 1964 so that the president has the right to interfere in the judicial process. During the Old Order there was a major rebellion, namely G3OS/PKI. 

Indonesia’s New Order Period (12 March 1967- 21 May 1998)

During the New Order period, it started from March 11 1966 to May 21 1998. The New Order period is the designation for Indonesia’s presidential government with Suharto as its president. President Soekarno was no longer president of Indonesia since 1966 which marked the end of the Old Order and was replaced by a new force, known as the New Order under the leadership of President Soeharto.

Ministers during the New Order era formed seven cabinets with the names Development Cabinet I to Development 7. However, in practice there were fatal deviations for the Indonesian nation, such as limiting people’s political rights, concentration of power in the hands of the president and Corruption, Collusion, and Nepotism ( KKN) in government agencies. Because of these very serious deviations, the New Order’s power finally ended after the people’s resistance to Soeharto’s rule through the reform movement.

Exactly on May 21, 1998, President Soeharto declared his resignation as president of the republic of Indonesia for 30 years of his term of office. BJ Habibie, who at that time served as vice president, was sworn in as the third President of the Republic of Indonesia to replace Suharto. President BJ Habibie’s tenure was very short and ended after his accountability was rejected by the General Assembly of the People’s Consultative Assembly on October 20, 1999. During the New Order era, the integration of the former Portuguese colony on the island of Timor, namely, became Indonesia’s 27th province called Timor-Timur.

Reformation Period (21 May 1998-Present)

During the reform era, there were many changes or amendments to the 1945 Constitution to become a constitutional constitution. This amendment is expected to form a better and more stable government system than in previous times. Amendments to the 1945 Constitution have been made by the MPR four times, namely in 1999, 2000, 2001 and 2002.

Constitutional government has the characteristic that the state constitution contains restrictions on governmental and executive powers and guarantees for human rights and the rights of other citizens. After Suharto resigned as president of Indonesia and began to enter a period of reform, policies related to political freedom emerged. Such as the freedom of the press, the freedom to form political parties, the holding of democratic elections and regional autonomy in 1999. 

Amendments or changes to the 1945 Constitution of the Republic of Indonesia were carried out during this reform period, including regarding state administration. One of the main objectives is that the president’s power is not abused so as to achieve a more stable state condition. Indonesia’s reform period experienced five presidential changes, namely BJ Habibie (leading period 1998-1999), Abdurrahman Wahid (leading period 1999-2001), Megawati Soekarno Putri (leading period 2001-2004), Susilo Bambang Yudhoyono (leading period 2004-2014 ) and Joko Widodo (leading period 2004-present).

Judging from the dynamics of national unity and unity above, there were times when the unity and integrity of the Indonesian nation was so strong, but there were also times when the dynamics of national unity and integrity were tested when faced with various kinds of rebellious movements that wanted to separate themselves from the Unitary State of the Republic of Indonesia. All forms of terror that can result in the emergence of divisions among Indonesian people have occurred a lot in Indonesian history to date. However, as a nation’s generation, we should be grateful that these threats or disturbances have not weakened the Unitary State of the Republic of Indonesia, but have grown stronger until now.

Driving Factors in the Dynamics of Unity and National Unity

In its development, there are three factors that can encourage and strengthen the unity and integrity of the Unitary State of the Republic of Indonesia until now. These three factors are a unifying form of the entire Indonesian nation which can unite all the differences and diversity that characterize the life of the Indonesian nation. Starting from differences in ethnicity, religion, language and others, this can be united by carrying out the values ​​contained in these three factors. So that these differences can actually further strengthen the unity and integrity of the Republic of Indonesia. The following are three driving factors in the dynamics of the unity and integrity of the Indonesian nation:

1. Pancasila

The Indonesian nation has Pancasila as the basis of the State with the view of the nation’s life, unifying the nation, national personality, and the nation’s noble agreement. The application of Pancasila values ​​in the daily life of the Indonesian people can be a driving factor for national unity and integrity. Indonesia regardless of differences in ethnicity, religion, culture and language.

2. Youth Pledge

Indonesian youths had pledged the Youth Pledge on October 28, 1928 which was an oath to show the determination of all Indonesian youths to fight for the nation against the colonialists in order to unite all Indonesian people. The content of the formulation of the Youth Pledge has the main value, namely one homeland, one nation and one language, namely Indonesia. The presence of the Youth Pledge then became very important in the midst of the onslaught of various issues that could divide the unity and integrity of the Indonesian nation, even now.

3. Unity in Diversity

Sinaumed’s is certainly no stranger to the motto Bhinneka Tunggal Ika, which is very important for the Indonesian state, which has various ethnicities, nations, cultures, languages ​​and religions. Bhinneka Tunggal Ika has different meanings, although it is still one. Even though the Indonesian state is a plural and multicultural form of country, it is still not divided, that is, it remains united for the sake of the integrity of the Unitary State of the Republic of Indonesia.

Inhibiting Factors in the Dynamics of Unity and National Unity

In addition to the driving factors, there are also factors that can hinder the unity and integrity of the Indonesian nation, such as the following: 

1. Diversity/diversity in Indonesian society which is not accompanied by mutual respect, respect and tolerance which has become the distinctive character of Indonesian society. This can lead to differences of opinion that get out of control, excessive regional feelings, which can trigger conflicts between regions or between ethnic groups.
2. The geographical location of Indonesia which consists of islands and archipelagos has different characteristics, so that it has the potential to separate itself. For example, the areas that are farthest from the capital city, or areas that have a large influence from neighboring countries or border areas. Besides that, areas that have a large global influence, such as tourist areas or areas that have very abundant natural wealth
3. There are symptoms of ethnocentrism which is an attitude that emphasizes the advantages of its culture and despise the culture of other ethnic groups
4. The weakening of the nation’s cultural values ​​thereby strengthening the influence of foreign cultures that are not in accordance with the national personality, either through direct contact or indirect contact

Well, that’s an explanation of the dynamics of national unity and unity that has occurred in Indonesia since independence until now. Did Sinaumed’s understand it? This dynamic is a historical record of the Indonesian nation which proves that in order to become a great country, it will inevitably face many problems as a form of dynamics. As the younger generation, we need to know and understand the history of the dynamics of the unity and integrity of the Indonesian nation so that we can better understand this national history. 

If Sinaumed’s is interested in studying the dynamics of the unity and integrity of the Indonesian nation, especially in Citizenship Education or PKN lessons, then you can visit the sinaumedia book collection at www.sinaumedia.com . Sinaumed’s can find many book references, ranging from textbooks at the junior high school, junior high school or equivalent levels to books from a broader perspective. The following is a recommendation for sinaumedia books that Sinaumed’s can read about the dynamics of the unity and integrity of the Indonesian nation: Enjoy studying. #Friends Without Limits.  

sinaumedia – Climate is a combination of various daily weather conditions or it is said that climate is the average weather. The climate contained in an area or region cannot be limited by just one climate analysis but is a combination of various climate or weather elements. The following is a more complete explanation of the Climate Classification, Sinaumed’s.

Definition of Climate According to Experts

According to the World Climate Conference states that climate is a synthesis of weather events over a long or long period of time, which is statistically sufficient to be used as indicating a statistical value that is different from a situation at any time.

Definition of Climate According to Experts:

• World Climate Conference, 1979 According to the World Climate Conference states that climate is a synthesis of weather events over a long or long period of time, which is statistically sufficient to be used as indicating a statistical value that is different from a situation at any time.
• Glenn T. Trewartha, 1980 According to Glenn, climate is an abstract concept that states a habit of weather and also an element of the atmosphere in an area over a long period of time.
• Gibbs, 1978 According to Gibbs revealed that climate is a statistical opportunity in various atmospheric conditions, including temperature, pressure, wind humidity, which occur in an area over a long period of time.

 

Climate Determinants

Differences in climate in each country are influenced by many factors, including the location of the country, the position of the sun, land and sea area, topography, etc. These factors are commonly called climate controllers. 

Climate controllers  can regulate the presence of climate elements or elements in an area. There are two climate control factors, namely:

Extraterrestrial Factors

The climate control factor from outside the earth is the sun. Sunlight is a source of heat or energy for the earth. The sun’s heat or energy can affect the existence and development of: wind, clouds, rain, temperature, air pressure, etc. The sun’s position relative to the earth or vice versa, throughout the year is not the same, but always shifts. This can happen because of the earth’s rotation and revolution around the sun, so that the area on earth that gets energy is always changing, both in quantity, quality, and length of time. The position of the sun relative to the earth has a major influence on the distribution of climate regions on earth.

You can also study discussion of greenhouse gases which play a dominant role in increasing the average temperature of the earth’s surface in the book Science of Climate Change which also discusses various other topics related to climate change.

Earth Factors

Factors controlling the climate from within the earth are determined by humans and the physical factors of the area concerned. Climate control by humans does not much change the condition and development of the climate, but is only able to minimize the effects of the climate, such as making artificial rain. The physical condition of the area that acts as a climate regulator is:

•  Latitude
• Earth shape
• Topography _
• Air pressure area
• Ground level
• Land and sea area

Various causes of climate change and ways we can do to stop it can be found in the book Why? Climate Change – Climate Change by delivering interesting and fun information.

 

 

Climate Classification

Climate Classification is an attempt to identify and characterize the differences in climate found on earth. Due to differences in latitude (position relative to the equator, latitude), geographic location, and topographical conditions, a place has a specific climate. Climate classifications are usually related to biomes or floristic provinces because climate influences the native vegetation that grows in an area. The most commonly known climate classifications are the Koeppen and Geiger classifications. This classification applies to the whole world so it is often referred to for geological and ecological studies. Some countries develop their own climate classifications to address the wide variations in local climates. Indonesia, for example, uses the Schmidt and Ferguson (SF) classification system more frequently, which turned out to be preferred for forestry and agricultural studies. The SF system is based on the classification previously compiled by Mohr, but the criteria are refined. Broadly speaking, the types of climate classification on earth can be grouped into two, namely:

• Genetic, distinguished by air mass flow, wind direction, topography and differences in sunlight
• Empirical, based on research methods and scientific observations of the elements that make up the climate.

Thus, the division of climates in the world can be distinguished based on the classification carried out by climatologists. Along with the times and technology, the distribution of climates in the world has changed and the determination of the classification has also become more complex. The following is a climate division based on the observations of climatologists:

Koppen Climate Classification System

The Koppen climate classification system is the most frequently used in the world which is based on average annual and monthly temperatures, and native vegetation. According to Koppen, the climate in the world is divided into 5 classes which are symbolized by the letter AE, as follows:

• Tropical rainy climate (A): Temperatures range from 18˚C-30˚C, and has monthly rainfall of > 60mm. The vegetation that thrives is a tropical rain forest ecosystem.
• Dry climate (B): Rainfall that occurs evenly throughout the year. The temperature ranges from 19˚C-32˚C and the vegetation that thrives is in the steppe biome and in the sand or desert biome.
• Temperate climate (C): Temperatures are divided into two, namely winter temperatures ranging from -3°C to less than 18°C ​​and summer temperatures ranging from more than 10°C. In this climate, the temperature is always humid throughout the year and is dry in winter and summer, rainfall each month is about more than 60 mm.
• Cold climates (D): The average temperature is -3˚C to ≥ 10˚C. This climate is cold and dry.
• Polar climate (E): Recorded temperatures of around 0°C to 10°C are due to topographical elevations that are over 5000 feet above sea level. The vegetation that grows is a tundra biome and has eternal snow.

The Klages System (1942)

This system divides the climate based on wind flow and global rainfall which includes the equatorial zone, this area has the characteristics of wet and tropical rain whose rain is monsoon rain. Tropical zone, this area experiences rain in summer and has savanna biome vegetation and dry forest. Dry subtropical zone, this area is dry and is dominated by deserts or deserts, and its vegetation includes steppes and steppe biomes. Dry snowy rainy zone, this area is characterized by rainy season in winter, and the vegetation includes hard-leaved trees. Extratropical zone, this area experiences rain throughout the year and the vegetation includes heterogeneous forests and the trees have broad leaves. Subpolar zone, this area has limited rain throughout the year and conifer forests dominate the vegetation.

The Schmidt & Ferguson System (1951)

Schmidt–Ferguson classifies climates based on the average number of dry months and the average number of wet months. A month is called a dry month, if in one month there is less than 60 mm of rainfall. Called a wet month, if in one month the rainfall is more than 100 mm.

Oldeman’s System (1975)

Determination of climate according to Oldeman uses the same basis as the determination of climate according to Schmidt-Ferguson, namely the element of rainfall. Wet months and dry months are associated with agricultural activities in certain areas so that the climate classification is also called agro-climatic zones. For example, an amount of rainfall of 200 mm per month is considered sufficient to cultivate paddy rice. As for cultivating crops, the minimum amount of rainfall needed is 100 mm per month. In addition, a 5-month rainy season is considered sufficient to cultivate paddy rice for one season. In this method, the basis for determining wet months, wet months, and dry months is as follows. Wet month, when the rainfall is > 200 mm. The month is humid, when the rainfall is 100–200 mm. Dry months, if the rainfall is <100 mm.

Junghuhn system

Climate According to Junghuhn classifies climate based on altitude and associates climate with the types of plants that grow and produce optimally according to the temperature in their habitat. Junghuhn classifies the climate into four 0-700 m, hot zone, samples- rubber, coffee, sugarcane, corn, coconut 700-1500 m, temperate zone, samples- tea, quinine 1500-2500 m, cool zone, examples- pine > 2500 m, cold zone, example- moss.

Other Articles Related to the Division of Climate Classification in the World

Inventor of the Atomic Nucleus – Some people may already know what an atom is, especially for those who study chemistry. The discussion about the atom itself has actually been taught since we first entered high school, so we will know about atoms in high school. However, there is nothing wrong if we already know about atoms before entering high school. It would be even better, we can know the inventors of the atom where each inventor always improves upon the discovery of atoms from the previous inventor.

Why can an atom be said to be a particle that has a very small size? Usually, atoms that are known to many people are shaped like circles with a diameter of 6-30 mm.

In addition, atoms always experience development or improvement from atoms that have been discovered before. Therefore, the inventors of the atom are not only made up of one person, but there are several figures. Do you already know the inventor of the atomic nucleus? In this article, we will explain the discoverers of the atomic nucleus and other atomic figures that you need to know. So, what are you waiting for, Sinaumed’s, immediately read this article until it’s finished.

Understanding Atoms

The word “atom” is a word that comes from the Greek, namely “atomos” which means “can not be cut”. In other words, atoms are the smallest particles in an element or matter that cannot be cut into pieces. So, an element cannot be formed, if it does not contain atoms.

In fact, atoms that are already the smallest part of an element, in fact, still have even smaller particles. The tiny particles inside atoms, namely protons, neutrons and electrons. Of the three smallest particles, usually referred to as subatomic. Protons and neutrons are part of the atomic nucleus and electrons are the smallest particles that surround a neutral charge.

In addition, protons are the smallest particles that contain a positive charge, while neutrons are the smallest particles that contain no charge or are neutral. Electrons are the smallest particles of atoms that have a negative electric charge. Talking about atoms is indeed very complex, we can know this from the mass that is in every atom’s smallest particle. The mass present in each subatom is very different, so the mass of each atom is also different.

The subatomic proton has a hydrogen mass of about 1.67262 x 10^-27 kg. Then, the subatomic neutron has a mass of about 1.67493 x 10^-27 kg and finally the mass of the electron subatomic is about 9.1093837015 x 10^-31 kg.

The atom was first discovered by John Dalton, after which it was refined again by scientists who studied atoms. So, the next discussion is the discoverers and refiners of atoms that you need to know about, keep reading the article until it’s finished, Sinaumed’s.

The Figure of the Discoverer of the Atomic Nucleus

Here are some figures or inventors who have an influence on the development of the atom.

1. John Dalton (Atom Dalton)

John Dalton is someone who is an expert in chemistry, physics, to meteorology. He was born to a father named Joseph Dalton and a mother named Deborah Greenup. John Dalton was born in Eaglesfield, Northern England on September 6, 1766. The ability and intelligence possessed by John Dalton can be said to be above average because at the age of 12, he was trusted to help his older brother teach.

John Dalton began to be entrusted with teaching when he was studying at John Fletcher’s Quaker Grammar School in Eaglesfield, England. Two years after teaching at Eaglesfield, John Dalton moved to Kendall, England. In Kendall, he also became a teacher at a school where there were only 60 students.

While teaching, it turned out that John Dalton met Eihu Robinson and John Gough. Eihu Robinson is an expert in science and John Gough is a mathematician. Of the two men, John Dalton has the basics of mathematics. In addition, he also gained knowledge about the use of meteorological instruments. Until finally, John Dalton was able to publish a book on meteorology.

John Dalton, who really liked research and experiments, then he wanted to do research on the smallest and indestructible particles known as atoms. He created a theory called “quantitative theory”. In his theory, John Dalton clearly explained atoms, molecules, elements, and chemical mixtures. Basically, the atomic weights are different, but according to John Dalton there are atoms that have the same quality or quantity, that is, two atoms that come from the same group.

John Dalton continued to conduct research and experiments on atoms, until finally around 1804, he prepared a list of atomic weights. In addition, he also explained that in every two molecules that come from the same chemical combination, they consist of the same combination of atoms. This is the “law of definite proportions” which has been expressed by a scientist named Joseph Louis Proust. John Dalton explained his theory clearly, so that within 20 years he was accepted among scientists.

In fact, many chemists followed John Dalton’s advice to calculate relative atomic weights. Analyze chemical combinations derived from their weight, and determine a suitable combination of atoms that make up each group of molecules that have the same characteristics.

Until 1808, John Dalton published a book entitled A New System Chemical Philosophy . He died in Manchester, England on July 27, 1844. He was buried in a state funeral.

2. Sir Joseph John Thomson (Electron)

The inventor and complement of the next atom is Sir Joseph John Thomson or better known as John Thomson. John Thomson was born on December 18, 1856 in Cheetham Hill and he was a physicist. He really likes to read books, so his knowledge and insights are quite extensive. What’s more, John Thomson’s father was a bookseller.

In fact, John Thomson’s youth was often spent reading books, until at the age of 14, he was accepted at Owens College or currently better known as Victoria University Manchester. While studying at the school, John Thomson studied applied physics, not only theory, but he was also educated to conduct experiments. After 6 years studying at Owens College, John Thomson continued his education at Trinity College in Cambridge at the age of 20 with a scholarship he received.

Thanks to the physics that John Thomson discovered and developed, namely electrons, he received a Nobel Prize in Physics in 1906. Electrons created by John Thomson are part of atomic or subatomic particles that revolve around the atomic nucleus. Electrons discovered by John Thomson have a negative charge. Until finally, he said that the atom has a shape that resembles raisin bread. According to him, atoms that have a positive charge are surrounded by electrons that have a negative charge. That is why John Thomson thought that the shape of the atom is almost the same as raisin bread.

John Thomson discovered the electron based on his research on cathode rays in the Cavendish laboratory for 35 years (from 1884 to 1991). From the results of his research and experiments, he realized that cathode rays are particles that make up atoms that have a negative charge. With the discovery of negatively charged electrons, John Dalton’s atomic theory fell, especially about the atom as the smallest particle.

John Thomson argued that basically the atom as a whole has a neutral charge, so it is neutral. Then, because the electrons surrounding the atom are negatively charged, there must be other particles that have a positive charge. The existence of this positive charge aims to neutralize the negative charge on electrons. However, the atom created by John Thomson was only able to last for 7 years and then a new atomic discoverer appeared, namely Ernest Rutherford.

Sir Joseph John Thomson died on 30 August 1940 in Cambridge, England. He was buried in Westminster Abbey which is adjacent to two of the most influential scientists in the world, namely Issac Newton and Charles Darwin.

3. Ernest Rutherford (Atomic Nucleus)

After John Thomson’s atom only lasted 7 years, then a physicist appeared who was born in New Zealand on August 30, 1871. He was named Ernest Rutherford and was a British national. He was born to a father named James Rutherford and a mother named Martha Thompson. Ernest Rutherford first attended government school Nelson Collegiate School when he was 16 years old.

Then, Ernest Rutherford continued his education at Nelson College, thanks to his intelligence, he won a university scholarship in 1889 and chose to continue his education at the University of Canterbury College. After successfully obtaining BA, MA, and BSc degrees, he then undertook two years of electrical technology research. In 1851, Ernest Rutherford won a scholarship in science, then he went to Trinity College, Cambridge. As a student he had the opportunity to do research at the Cavendish Laboratory which at that time was led by Joseph John Thomson.

After doing research at the Cavendish Laboratory as a student of Thomson, Ernest Rutherford managed to see the weaknesses or deficiencies of the atom belonging to his teacher, Sir Joseph John Thomson. More precisely in 1910, he and his two assistants managed to find an atomic nucleus that has a smaller radius than its atomic radius.

Ernest Rutherford’s discovery of the atom was based on experiments or experiments he had carried out with his two assistants, namely Hans Geiger and Ernest Marsden. The experiment they carried out is known as the scattering of alpha rays (λ) on a thin sheet of gold. The experiment they carried out actually aimed to prove the opinion of Thomson who said that atoms are like solid balls with a positive charge which, when subjected to alpha particles, will be reflected.

The research they carried out resulted in the fact that if an alpha particle was shot at a thin gold plate, then almost all of the alpha particles could pass even though there was an angular deviation of less than 1 degree.

After carrying out the experiment, Ernest Rutherford argued that the atom he had discovered had a positively charged atomic nucleus. In addition, Rutherford’s atomic charge was small enough to be surrounded by negatively charged electrons.

On October 19, 1937, Ernest Rutherford died at the age of 66 in Cambridge, England. He is buried in the middle of Westminster Abbey church.

4. Niels Bohr (Atom Bohr)

Niels David Bohr or better known as Niels Bohr who is one of the discoverers of the atom. Niels Bohr was born in Copenhagen, Denmark on October 7, 1885. He was the second of three children with a father named Christian and a mother named Ellen. Niels Bohr can be said to be born from a family that is affluent or tends to be middle to upper class.

Niels Bohr’s educational journey was quite smooth, until in 1911, he succeeded in obtaining a Doctor of Physics degree from the University of Copenhagen, Denmark. He graduated with a dissertation on metal electrons. His ability in physics earned him the Nobel Prize for Physics in 1922.

His interest in atoms can be said to have started when Niels Bohr went to Cambridge, England and met and studied under the guidance of the discoverer of the atom, Sir Joseph John Thomson. After several months of studying with Thomson, Niels Bohr chose to move to Manchester where he learned about the atom from Ernest Rutherford. After learning from Rutherford, then Niels Bohr began to develop the theory of atomic structure.

While doing various kinds of research and having done several experiments, Niels Bohr finally published the atom he found. According to Niels Bohr, the atom is like a planet that revolves around the sun. In addition, thanks to his research, he was able to prove that the electrons in atoms can only rotate in orbits and within a certain size.

In simple terms, if the electron of Niels Bohr’s atom absorbs energy, then the electron can move from the inner layer to the outer layer. Meanwhile, when electrons emit energy, electrons will move from the outer layer to the deeper layer.

Niels Bohr breathed his last on November 8, 1962 when he was 77 years old.

5. Werner Heisenberg and Erwin Schrödinger

Werner Heisenberg was born on December 5, 1901 and died on February 1, 1976. Meanwhile, Erwin Schödinger was born on August 12 and died on 1961. In 1932, Werner Heisenberg won the Nobel Prize in Physics. Meanwhile, Erwin Schödinger won the Nobel Prize in Physics in 1933.

Werner Heisenberg began to conduct research on the intensity spectrum of electrons taken as a harmonic oscillator. Then, in June 1925, Werner Heisenberg published a paper entitled Über quantentheoretische Umdeutung kinematischer und mechanischer Beziehungen (Quantum Theoretical Reinterpretations of Kinetic and Mechanical Relations). Then, in November 1925, Heisenberg, Born, and Jordan completed a paper that became known as the foundations of the new quantum mechanics.

Meanwhile, Erwin Schödinger perfected Heisenberg’s theory of quantum mechanics by creating a theory of the wave equation. With the theory of the wave equation, quantization will appear scientifically, like a vibrating string.

Source: From various sources

Customers are – In everyday life, most people then need the services of the banking sector for financial
services. Therefore, being a customer is a privilege . The
reason is, not everyone can then become customers or bank customers and access various financial
products or investment products.

If you are a business owner, becoming a bank client is certainly a necessity. You will need a
variety of bank products to manage business finances. Then, what exactly is meant by the
customer?

Definition of Customer

According to the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI), a customer is a person who normally deals with or becomes a
customer of a bank (in financial terms).

Actually, the term customer itself does not only refer to bank customers. Insurance companies
will also use the term customer, namely people who pay insurance premiums. In addition, there
are several definitions of customers according to experts.

So, in simple terms, it can be said that a customer is someone who is a customer of a bank or insurance.

Understanding of Customers According to Experts

The following are some definitions of customers according to experts.

1. According to the Financial Services Authority

According to the Financial Services Authority, customers are individuals or entities that use or receive bank
facilities, both in the form of products and services.

2. According to Boediono (2003:35)

According to Boediono, the customer is a person who must receive serious attention and concern in terms of an
organization oriented towards him so that he can survive in the era of increasingly high quality competition.

3. According to Pardede (2004:9)

Pardede said that a customer is a person who entrusts the management of his money to the bank to be used in
banking business operations, with which he expects a reward in the form of money for the deposit.

4. According to Gaspersz, (in Nasution 2004:101)

According to Gaspersz, customers are all people who demand a company to meet certain quality standards that will
affect the company’s performance.

Various Customers

In banking, bank customers are then divided into two, namely debtors and depositors. A debtor
customer is a customer who obtains either credit or financing facilities from a bank by going through the
agreement process between the bank and the customer that was previously made.

Meanwhile, a depositing customer is a customer who places his funds in a bank in the form of deposits which are
usually referred to as savings, by going through an agreement process between the bank and the previous bank
customer.

In addition, there are also several types of bank customers, including:

1. Retail Customers

Retail customers are customers who are not included as professional customers and are eligible.
Structured Products are a form of Bank product which is a combination of 2 (two) or more financial
instruments in the form of non-derivative and derivative financial instruments.

2. Eligible Customers

An eligible customer is a customer who can be classified as a professional customer if the customer has an
understanding of the characteristics, features and risks of a structured product. Customers
with this classification then consist of:

1. Individual customers with a portfolio of assets in the form of cash, demand deposits, savings of at least
   IDR 5,000,000,000 (five billion rupiah).
2. Companies engaged in the financial sector in the form of pension funds or insurance companies as long
   as they do not conflict with applicable laws and regulations in the field of pension funds and insurance
   business. Companies with capital of at least Rp. 5,000,000,000.- (five billion
   rupiah) or its equivalent in foreign currency and then has carried out activities for at least 12
   consecutive months.

3. Professional Customers

Customers will be classified as professional customers if these customers have an understanding of the
characteristics, features and risks of structured products. As for professional customers,
consists of:

1. The Government of the Republic of Indonesia and the governments of other countries.
2. Banks are also multilateral development institutions.
3. Companies with capital of more than Rp. 20,000,000,000.- (twenty billion rupiah) or its
   equivalent in foreign currency and has been conducting business activities for at least 36 consecutive
   months.
4. Central bank or other country’s bank.
5. Companies engaged in the financial sector which then consist of banks, securities companies, finance
   companies as well as futures traders as long as this does not conflict with applicable laws and regulations
   in the banking sector, capital market sector, financing institution sector and the prevailing commodity
   futures trading.

Parties Including Customers

Several parties are included as customers, including:

Legal entity

For customers in the form of an entity, it is necessary to pay attention to the legal aspect of the agency
as well as the authority to act from parties related to the bank. This itself relates to the
legal aspects of individuals.

Apart from that, it also relates to the authority to act for the customer concerned, especially for “agencies”,
including whether for such legal actions it is necessary to obtain approval from the commissioners or the
General Meeting of Shareholders (GMS) so that later attention is paid to the articles of association of the body
concerned.

Person

The customers of this bank consist of adults and minors. Adult customers themselves are only
allowed for credit customers and demand deposits. Meanwhile, deposit customers and/or other
bank services are possible for immature people, for example working customers for transfers and so on.
Against the agreement made between the bank and the immature customer, the legal consequences that
have been agreed upon have been realized.

Priority Customer Benefits

What will you get if a certain party decides to become a bank customer? Security of funds will
then be ensured because the government and official bodies will also monitor it, and even the profits earned
will be in the form of interest.

In addition, transactions are made easier by withdrawing funds, investing, making money transfers, and so
on. Being a priority customer certainly provides its own advantages. What’s more,
not everyone can become this special customer considering the conditions specified.

What are the advantages of being a priority customer of a bank? Here’s a more complete
explanation:

1. Priority Customers Have Special
Banking Services

Snaking lines at the bank make customers lazy to take care of various needs at the bank.
However, unlike special service customers, they do not need to stand in line to get banking
services.

In other words, there is a special line for priority customers at the bank that other customers may not
use. So if ordinary customers have to stand in line at the bank, these special customers are
then treated to special banking services. In fact, not infrequently they are then entertained
in a special room complete with drinks and various snacks.

2. Get Interest Rate Promos

Another advantage of being a priority customer is getting promos on interest rates. This then
becomes the most attractive advantage of priority customer service. Customers also have the
opportunity to get lower interest rates on various loans such as mortgages, vehicle loans, KTA, and so
on.

3. Ease of Consultation with Personal Bankers

Priority customers will also get various conveniences to consult with personal bankers regarding various
matters such as investment plans, insurance, pension funds, and so on. In addition, they also
do not need to hire a personal financial assistant because financial matters are handled by the personal
banker.

4. Getting Convenience from Travel Services

Another priority that will be obtained is convenience in travel services. Customers will also
be given access to the airport lounge for free, even various baggage services for free. In
addition, there are also discounts at many hotels, restaurants and shopping centers just by showing a
priority customer card.

5. Special Birthday Gift

Luckily, customers will also get special birthday gifts on their special days. Not only
congratulations like regular customers, priority customers will also receive gifts which will prove that
they have an important role for the bank.

Requirements to Become a Priority Customer

The pleasure of being a priority customer is indeed very interesting. All the facilities and
conveniences obtained will then make customers vying to become priority customers. However,
becoming a priority customer is not that easy.

There are special requirements that must be met by prospective customers to obtain these services.
Below are some of the general requirements to become a priority customer, including:

1. Have a Financial Portfolio with a
Certain Nominal

To become a priority customer with this special service, you must then have a financial portfolio at this bank
with a minimum nominal predetermined by the previous bank.

This portfolio can also be in the form of investments, bancassurance, or deposit funds in the form of
savings, time deposits, or demand deposits. The minimum nominal value for each bank is
different, but generally customers must also have a minimum portfolio of IDR 500 million.

2. Have Funding Sources and
Activities in Accordance with KYC Aspects

If the customer meets the requirements in point 1, then he will not be immediately accepted as a priority
customer. Banks must also ensure that the sources and activities of customer funds comply with
the KYC or Know Your Customer principles.

The purpose of KYC is to prevent money laundering by customers as well as internal fraud by bank employees.
Therefore, the bank will check the customer’s profile as a whole and monitor all transactions made
by the customer.

3. Priority Customers Must Be Clean from
the Black List

Another requirement to become a special customer is to be clean from the black list of Bank Indonesia or
the bank. The purpose of the black list is to take actions that are detrimental to the bank,
such as bad credit and the like. If a customer has ever been blacklisted and does not pass BI
checking, then he cannot get this special service.

4. Have Deposited Funds

The customer must then have a deposit of the minimum required amount from the results of a business or
work, not from a bank loan. So, if this stored asset is the result of a loan, the request to
become a priority customer cannot be processed

From the discussion above it can be said that customers are customers of a bank or insurance.
Thus the discussion about customers, from understanding to how to become a priority customer.
Hopefully all the discussion above adds to your insight.

If you want to find books about finance, then you can get them at sinaumedia.com .
To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so
that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

Author: Sofyan

Source: from various sources

Recommended Books Related to
Customers that You Must Read

Banks and Other Financial Institutions
2014 Revised Edition

Understanding Bank Business

This book, which was compiled by the Working Group on General Banking I of the Indonesian Bankers
Association and the Banking Profession Certification Institute, is a mandatory reference for any prospective
participant who will take General Banking Level I certification. head of the bank. This book is
also accompanied by practice questions that help readers understand the contents of the book as well as
prepare themselves for the certification exam.

Banks and Other Financial Institutions 3rd Edition

In addition, in the 3rd Edition, there are additional topics, namely the Financial Services Authority (OJK)
and Rural Credit Banks (BPR). The Financial Services Authority as a new institution is expected
to be able to comprehensively guide and control the financial sector, while BPRs as financial institutions
operating in rural areas are expected to be able to bridge and encourage business activities in rural areas
through the provision of credit and so on.

Banks 4.0

The latest book series ‘BANK 4.0’ by Brett King deals with the topic of whether banks have a future in the
emerging world of 21st century technology. In the 30-50 years when cash is gone, cards are
gone, ATM machines are not needed, not even a physical bank is needed and all the remnants of the
traditional banking system have been re-engineered in real-time, embedded in our daily life, what exactly is
a the future bank?

How are we going to reset bank accounts, identities, values, assets, investments from scratch?
The emergence of Fintech and Technology Companies opening up Digital Banks laid the foundations for
today’s new banking ecosystem. From selfie-pay in China, blockchain in Africa, self-driving
cars with their own bank accounts and artificial intelligence technologies informing the design of future
banking systems, this proves once and for all that we are not in a new era of banking. Bank 4.0
is what will become the real bank of the future.

Countries with the Strongest Military in the World – The military is an armed force in a
country. The military can also be referred to as an army. Each country has its own
military group. Of course the military must have more power so that the country can be
protected.

Therefore, the military is trained to remain tough and always act decisively, especially on the
battlefield. In life within the military there must also be a clear hierarchy for coordinating
troops. Military leaders must have a firm attitude and be able to make good decisions for their
members or troops.

Apart from internal strength, military strength within a military group consists of various factors such as
military budget, military personnel, military vehicles, weapons owned, including nuclear forces.
In a military, it is also divided into three parts, namely land power, air power, and also sea
power.

Global Firepower (GFP) released a list of countries with the strongest militaries in the world.
The ranking of countries with the strongest militaries in the world is using the Power
Index (PwrIndx). The assessment conducted by Global Firepower uses
categories based on military finances, logistical capabilities, and geography.

Some small countries are seen based on technological progress. In addition, there is
competition and military development. GFP data releases countries that have the most powerful
militaries as of January 12, 2022. Global Firepower has released a list of modern
military forces since 2006 based on state capabilities and potential. For example, a
country’s military potential in the sea, land and air.

List of Orders of Countries
with the Strongest Military in the World in 2022

No.	Country List	PwrIndx score
1.	United States of America	0.0453
2.	Russia	0.0501
3.	China	0.0511
4.	India	0.0979
5.	Japan	0.1195
6.	South Korea	0.1261
7.	French	0.1283
8.	great Britain	0.1382
9.	Pakistan	0.1572
10.	Brazil	0.1695
11.	Italy	0.1801
12.	Egypt	0.1869
13.	Turkey	0.1961
14.	Iran	0.2104
15.	Indonesia	0.2251
16.	German	0.2322
17.	Australia	0.2377
18.	Israel	0.2621
19.	Spanish	0.2901
20.	Saudi Arabia	0.2966
21.	Taiwan	0.3215
22.	Ukraine	0.3266
23.	Canada	0.3601
24.	Poland	0.4179
25.	Sweden	0.4231
26.	south Africa	0.4276
27.	Greece	0.4506
28.	Vietnamese	0.4521
29.	Thailand	0.4581
30.	North Korea	0.4621
31.	Algeria	0.4724
32.	Switzerland	0.5015
33.	Norway	0.5455
34.	Iraq	0.5597
35.	Nigeria	0.5745
36.	United Arab Emirates	0.5859
37.	Dutch	0.5937
38.	Romania	0.5938
39.	Myanmar	0.5972
40.	Argentina	0.6091
41.	Czech Republic	0.6161
42.	Singapore	0.6253
43.	Mexico	0.6423
44.	Colombia	0.6438
45.	Venezuelan	0.6664
46.	Bangladesh	0.6851
47.	Syria	0.6953
48.	Malaysia	0.7091
49.	Portugal	0.7282
50.	peruvian	0.7453

The Global Firepower tally is 0.000. So far no country has achieved a perfect
score. The smaller the score, the stronger a country’s fighting ability would be.
Quoting from byjus.com, Global Firepower calculates an index based on total air
services. The type of aircraft is also calculated from the military and its type.
Examples of types of aircraft such as helicopters, fighter planes, and many more.

In 2022, the top position for the country with the most powerful military in the world is the United States
(US) in first place, followed by Russia in second. Then, China is in third place, and India is
in fourth place. Meanwhile, Indonesia is ranked 15th as the country with the strongest
military. The total score of PwrIndx Indonesia reached 0.2251. Indonesia is below
Iran which has a PwrIndx score of 0.2104 and above Germany which has a score of 0.2322.

1. United States military

The United States military, which is in first position, is claimed to have 1,400,000 active personnel and
860,000 reserve personnel. In total, the United States has 2,260,000 military personnel.
In addition, the United States land force has 6,289 tanks, 39,353 armored vehicles, 1,456 mobile
artillery units, 2,740 crane artillery units, and 1,366 rocket launchers. The number of ground
forces does not include short-range missiles and intercontinental ballistic missiles (ICBMs).

For sea power, the United States has 20 aircraft carriers, the highest number in the world.
The number of ships owned by the United States military makes it strong in the waters.
Apart from aircraft carriers, the United States also has 91 units of destroyers, 13 units of
corverts, and also 66 units of submarines.

Furthermore, the United States has air units which have a total of 13,264. These units include
2,085 fighter jets, 967 combat helicopters, 945 transport aircraft, 5,768 helicopters, 742 special mission
aircraft, and F-22 fighter jets which are not for sale to various countries, only the United States military
has them.

Not only air, land and sea power, the United States military also excels in its nuclear power.
According to the Stockholm International Peace Research Institute (SIPRI), currently the United
States military has 5,800 nuclear warheads, 1,750 of which are ready to be launched. The United
States is also the only country that has ever used nuclear in a military conflict.

2. The Russian military

The Russian military ranks second as the strongest military in the world. The strength index
owned by the Russian military is 0.0501, while the perfect index is 0.0000. The second rank
obtained by the Russian military is determined by several factors, namely the weapons it has, the strength
of the ground, sea and air forces, military budget and also military fuel.

The military personnel owned by the Russian military amount to 3,586 or 2.5% of the number of people who
are eligible to serve the country which totals 46,658,000 people or around 32.8%. Russia has an
air force in the form of military vehicles totaling 4,078 units. With 869 attackers producing
1,459 strikes, the Russian air force also has 1,485 helicopters with 514 attack helicopters.

For the ground forces, Russia has 21,000 battle tanks, 50,000 armored fighting vehicles, 6,000 automatic
artillery units, 4,400 towed artillery units, and up to 3,800 rocket-like weapons. Furthermore,
Russia has a navy in the form of vehicles and fuel which are the main values, namely helicopters,
submarines, diesel-electric, and conventional and modern nuclear power.

The assets owned by the Russian navy amount to 352. These assets include 56 units of submarines, 45 units
of patrol boats, 13 units of destroyers, 13 units of frigates and 82 units of corvettes. Some
parts of the transportation owned by the Russian military are made by companies engaged in well-known
weapons, namely Kalashnikov. The company was previously the creator of the AK-47 weapon which
was very revolutionary in its time.

Apart from transportation and combat equipment, the military certainly needs fuel. The Russian
military has oil production of 10,580,000 barrels per day with consumption of 3,320,000 per day, and Russia
also has oil reserves for fuel of 80 billion barrels.

3. The Chinese military

China, which is in third place, shows that its military strength is getting stronger. China
makes indirect spending on the military by investing in state-owned and private defense companies to acquire
new technologies in the military world.

Because China’s military cooperates with defense companies, its navy currently has 350 ships as well as
submarines. This number includes 130 attacks on the main surface, and it is even estimated that
there will be Chinese aircraft carriers afloat by 2030. In addition, destroyers are also accelerated to
expand their fleet.

The Chinese navy has also developed long-range precision cruise and ballistic missiles, early warning
radars, and air defense systems to dominate the airspace over the Pacific. Recently, the
Chinese military has launched hypersonic weapons to confront the US military’s aircraft carrier
group.

In 2017, Chinese President Xi Jinping said that he has a target for the People’s Liberation Army (PLA) to become
a world-class military capable of fighting and can win a global war in 2049.

4. Indian Military

According to Global Fire Power, India has a military force that occupies position 4 out of 139 other
countries. In the Asian region, if sorted, India gets the second position as the strongest
military in Asia. The Indian military has approximately 1,445,000 military personnel.
They are also involved in the protracted territorial conflict in Pakistan’s Kashmir region.

Despite being ranked fourth as the strongest military in the world, India has the first order of war
transportation in the world. The Indian military has 4,730 tanks, 4,040 crane artillery units,
and 542 combat aircraft.

Apart from that, there are also interesting facts about the Indian military. Here are some of
them:

• The Indian military has mastered the highest battlefield in the world, namely in the Sianchen Glacier.
  The glacier has an altitude of 5,000 meters above sea level.
• In 1971, the Indian military accepted its largest military surrender, with 93,000 Pakistani soldiers
  surrendering to the Indian army.
• The Indian military has the world’s largest volunteer army.
• The Indian military secretly tested its nuclear weapons in the 1970s and late 1990s without the CIA knowing
  about it.
• The Indian military has the most accurate nukes in the world, with Agni and Prithvi in ​​their respective
  categories.
• The Indian army has trained foreign troops such as the United States, Russia and the United Kingdom.
• The Indian military conducted Operation Rahat in 2013, the world’s largest civilian rescue operation.

5. Japanese military

The Japanese military is ranked fifth as the strongest military in the world. The Japanese
military has a strength index of 0.1195. Despite being in fifth position, Japan does not have
as many troops as the militaries of the United States, Russia, China and India. The personnel
owned by Japan numbered only 250,000 people with 55,000 reserve personnel and 14,000 paramilitary
personnel.

Japan’s military strength is the same as other countries’ militaries, which is based on the ground, air and
sea forces. Apart from that, the Japanese military was also supported by weapons and military
fuel. For ground forces, the Japanese military has 1,004 tanks, 5,500 armored vehicles, 214
mobile artillery units, 480 crane artillery units, and 99 rocket projectors.

Then, the strength of the Japanese military navy includes 37 units of destroyers, 6 corvettes, 20 units of
submarines, 6 units of patrol boats, and 21 units of mine warships. However, the Japanese
military does not yet have aircraft carriers and frigates. The strength of the Japanese
military air force includes 256 combat aircraft, 17 special attack aircraft, 61 military transport units,
162 special mission aircraft, 552 military helicopters, and 119 attack helicopters.

6. South Korean military

Global Fire Power further states that South Korea’s military is the sixth most powerful military in the
world out of 138 countries. South Korea has a strength index of 0.1261 on the Global Fire Power
list. South Korea’s military strength is the same as militaries in other countries, which is
based on the ground, air and sea forces. In addition, the South Korean military is also
supported by weapons and military fuel.

The South Korean military has a total of 3,680,000 personnel with 580,000 active members and 3,100,000
reserve personnel, even South Korea has a military budget of 48 billion United States dollars.
For air force strength, the South Korean military has 414 combat aircraft, 71 special attack
aircraft, 41 military transport units, 298 training aircraft, 30 special mission aircraft, 803 helicopters,
and 112 attack helicopters.

The strength of the South Korean army includes 2,614 tanks, 14,000 armored vehicles, 3,040 mobile artillery
units, 3,854 crane artillery units, and 575 rocket projectors. Furthermore, South Korea’s naval
strength includes 2 aircraft carriers, 12 destroyers, 18 frigates, 12 corvettes, 22 submarines, 111 patrol
boats, and 11 mine warships.

7. French military

France, which is in seventh position, has a population of 67,700,000. The French military gets
a strength index of 0.1283 on the Global Fire Power list. France has a total of 1,057 combat
aircraft, 406 tanks, 10 submarines, as well as 270,000 active military personnel. Although the
French army looked nothing special, the personnel were highly trained. The French military has
290 nuclear warheads by 2021.

8. British Military

The British military occupies the eighth position as the strongest military in the world. The
United Kingdom’s military has a strength index of 0.1997 on the Global Fire Power list. Apart
from being recorded in the data, the country itself was able to provide a budget of 59.2 million US dollars
to its military. Apart from that, what makes the British military called the strongest military is because
it has HMS Queen Elizabeth, an aircraft carrier that has an area of ​​about 4.5 hectare. An
aircraft carrier of this size can accommodate 40 F-35B fighter aircraft all over the world. The
British military currently also possesses 290 nuclear warheads.

9. Pakistan military

Pakistan’s military ranks ninth as the strongest military in the world. The Pakistan military
gets a strength index of 0.1572 in the Global Fire Power list. In strengthening the country’s
defense, Pakistan’s military has 654,000 active personnel, 1,364 air force units which include 331
helicopters, and 357 combat aircraft. Then it has 2,680 tanks, 9,635 armored vehicles and
hundreds of thousands of paramilitaries.

The Pakistani military has never publicly disclosed their arsenal. However, it is estimated
that the Pakistani military has more than 165 nuclear warheads by 2021. The military budget that the
Pakistani military has is not as big as that given in Brazil. Pakistan only provided a budget
of 12.27 billion United States dollars.

10. Brazilian military

The Brazilian military ranks tenth as the strongest military in the world. The Brazilian
military has a strength index of 0.1695 in the 2022 Global Fire Power list. The country, which has a
population of around 211.7 million, has a total of 2,007,000 military personnel, of which 334,500 are active
personnel.

In terms of military transportation, Brazil has an air fleet of 676 units, tanks 439 units, armored
vehicles 2,000 units, and also a fleet of 112 units. Based on data written in SIPRI, Brazil has
become one of 14 countries that has a significant uranium enrichment capacity in the world of 35,000 SWU per
year.

Indonesian Military Strength

Indonesia’s power index score is 0.2251 points. In 2022, Indonesia will be ranked 15th out of
140 countries considered for the annual GFP review. Indonesia’s position increased one rank
compared to the previous period which scored 0.2684. With this result, Indonesia ranks first at
the ASEAN regional level. The second place in ASEAN or 28th in the world is occupied by Vietnam
with a score of 0.4521 and Thailand in third place in ASEAN and ranked 29th in the world with a score of
0.4581.

Based on GFP data, the TNI’s air force is complemented by 445 air forces. This number includes
41 combat aircraft, 23 dedicated attack aircraft, 66 transports, 126 trainers, 17 special mission aircraft,
1 tanker aircraft, 172 helicopters and 15 attack helicopters. Then, Indonesia’s ground forces
are equipped with 314 tanks, 1,444 armored vehicles, 153 self-propelled artillery, 413 artillery towers, and
63 rocket projectors.

The total assets of Indonesia’s marine defense system are 296. The total consists of 7 frigates, 24
corvettes, 4 submarines, 181 patrol boats, 11 mine warfare. Indonesia’s ranking outperforms a
number of developed countries, including Germany in 16th position, Australia in 17th, and Israel in
18th.

Sinaumed’s, that’s a brief explanation about the Country with the Strongest Military in the World in
2022 . Each military group in each country has its own land, sea and air
forces, and has different amounts of weapons and fuel.

If you want to learn more about the military in the world and Indonesia, you can buy and read books
available at sinaumedia. sinaumedia as #UnlimitedFriends provides books that can add to your
knowledge. Come on Sinaumed’s, buy the book now!

• What are Conspiracy Theories and Famous Conspiracy Theories
• Background of the Establishment of ASEAN and Its Purpose
• History of World War 1: Causes, Timeline and Countries Involved
• History of World War 2: Causes, Countries Involved, and Impacts for Indonesia
• The Purpose of Establishing the WTO: History, Functions and Principles

The Right Way to Land in the Long Jump – Surely Sinaumed’s is no stranger to the long jump sport? Yep, this one sport has been taught to us from Elementary School (SD) to High School (SMA) level. Almost the same as other sports, long jump also really requires strength, speed, and agility to be able to jump as far as possible accompanied by good and correct technique.

Usually, this long jump sport uses a sandbox as a place to land. Simply put, this one sport is done by jumping from as far away as possible, then from the takeoff point the body must float in the air to successfully land as far as possible in the sandbox.

But unfortunately, many people are confused about how to land properly and correctly in this sport. This is due to the movements of the legs and body, sometimes the reflexes cannot follow the correct technique, so that sometimes the feet will be injured. Then, how do you land properly and correctly in this long jump sport? Can the traditional game of jumping rope using rubber be used as training in this one sport because they both use jumping techniques?

Let’s look at the following review so that Sinaumed’s can understand and immediately put it into practice.

How to Land Correctly in Long Jump?

Basically, the long jump sport has four parts of movement, starting from the prefix or often referred to as stance, repulsion, stance in the air, and finally the landing movement. Well, in this case we will discuss how to do the landing movement.

1. Head in a bowed position. If you look up, there is likely to be an injury to the nape.
2. When you want to land, the body part, namely the heel of the foot, must reflexively touch the ground first.
3. During the landing process, place an emphasis on the heel of the foot.
4. Also make sure both legs are in a straight position. The position of the leg should not bend because an injury can occur in the form of a sprain.
5. While both legs are in a straight position, the knees must be bent.
6. On the thighs, try to be lifted upwards while the body is pushed forward to create a bent position.
7. The body position when landing is leaning forward. This is to maintain the balance of the body so as not to sway when landing.
8. When you land, immediately position your feet straight.
9. In the position of the hands, especially both hands must be swung then straightened forward. Make sure that the position of the hand is ready to support the body that is landing.

History of Long Jump

Until now, this long jump is still a part of the sports that are contested in the world Olympics and national championships in various countries. This is because this sport clearly shows the strength, agility, and speed of the athletes. So, in the following we will discuss how the history of the existence of the long jump sport has developed rapidly as it is today.

The history of the existence of this sport began in 708 BC, namely in an Ancient Olympic Sports event in Greece. According to historical records, at that time the longest jump was 7.05 meters achieved by Chionis who came from the Sparta area. Actually, all the competitions held at the Ancient Olympics were carried out with the aim of military training in war, because at the same time training the agility of athletes or soldiers. However, the technique and method of long jump at that time were of course different from today, huh… Even at that time, because the Ancient Olympic Games were intended as war training, the athletes were required to run while carrying weights in both hands with a weight of around 1-4, 5 kgs. Unfortunately, the glory of this sport is fading.

Then in 1896, the long jump sport was revived in the Modern Olympic Games. Since then, the sport of long jump has been increasingly accepted by the public and has become a sport that is often contested. The rules and jumping techniques have also been improved over time by adjusting to the current developments. In the United States, there was an athlete named Bob Beamon who managed to break the long jump record of about 8.90 meters in 1968.

History of Jumping in Indonesia

In Indonesia, the long jump is also growing rapidly until now it is still included in the sports that are contested in national championships. Since the long jump is part of athletics, all athletes and long jump sports training are members of the PASI (All-Indonesian Athletics Association) organization. When carrying out the race, it is customary to use a place on the track. 1928 was the first year that women were allowed to participate in this sport.

Definition of Long Jump Sport

In short, the long jump is an athletic sport that has a jumping movement by carrying the body’s weight when flying in the air. Not only that, this sport is also accompanied by repulsive movements on the pedestal using one of the strongest legs to reach the greatest distance when jumping. This sport is currently still popular to be contested in the Olympics or national competitions.

Many experts argue about the definition of this long jump sport. One of them is Syarifuddin (1992), reveals that the long jump is a form of jumping movement, by lifting the legs up and forward in an effort to bring the body weight as long as possible in the air alias floating in the air. This movement must be done quickly which previously had to do a repulsion on one leg (the strongest) to reach the farthest distance.

To obtain optimal results in this long jump sport, as with other sports, athletes must have good physical condition and understand and master the techniques in the long jump movement. There are two important elements in achieving maximum results, namely 1) Physical condition factors, starting from speed, jumping power, and skill; 2) Factors of take-off technique, starting from the preparation phase, displacement (hovering), and landing.

Long Jump Sports Technique

1. Prefix Technique

In the prefix technique, the movement of the participant in the long jump must be done by running as fast as possible so that he can gain maximum speed before finally repulsing. In addition, this prefix technique can also be assessed as an action to get the maximum horizontal speed which is then converted into vertical speed when repulsing.

This prefix technique must be done by running as fast as possible from a distance of approximately 40-45 meters on a running track, then the participant will do repulsion using both feet. The things that must be considered when performing prefix techniques in long jump athletics are as follows:

• The initial distance in the long jump event depends on the ability of the participant. For participants in the long jump athletics branch who want to jump with a short start, do it with a distance of approximately 30-25 meters or less. Meanwhile, participants in the long jump athletics branch who want to jump with a long prefix can do so at a distance of approximately 30-45 meters or more than that.
• The position when standing at the starting point, namely the feet must be parallel or it could be with one leg in front, depending on how the position is profitable for the participants.
• How to take the start in the long jump athletics can be started slowly then quickly (sprint). This speed must be maintained until just before repulsion.
• After reaching maximum speed, about 3-4 last steps take -off , foot movements are released spontaneously without reducing the speed previously achieved. In the last step, participants must concentrate and focus on repulsing on the board or support beam that has been provided.

2. Focusing / Repulsion Technique

This technique is believed to be the most important movement in long jump athletics because it determines the perfect jump result. In this technique, the participant will push off a board or fulcrum using the strongest leg by changing horizontal speed to vertical speed.

When doing the pedestal, the participant’s body position should not be too inclined. The focus must also be strong, fast, and balanced. The participant’s body balance in repulsion is also considered so that it does not falter. The following are things that must be considered in carrying out the fulcrum / repulsion technique, namely:

• The long jump must be done with the strongest leg (everyone is different).
• The part of the foot that is strongest for resting is usually located on the heel, so it is advisable to use the heel first to do the pedestal and end at the toe.
• Get lost before doing the pedestal, try to lean back.
• It is better to rest on the pedestal board properly.
• Both arms must also be swung forward and up when resting.
• Swing your legs and arms forward at hip height with your knees bent.

3. Hovering Technique

In this technique, the movement must be made after leaving the pedestal. When performing this floating movement technique, the participant’s body must be maintained in balance. Swinging both hands can also help participants to maintain their body balance.

4. Landing Technique

This landing technique must be done by the participants as well as possible. Don’t let their bodies or arms fall backwards, that’s tantamount to injury. Landing on the tub jump begins with the position of both heels and feet in a tight position. Movements when landing must also be done with both feet.

The thing that must be considered in this landing technique is that both feet used for landing must be done simultaneously, followed by pushing the hips forward. Why does the participant’s body have to lean forward when doing the landing technique? Because if the participants’ bodies tend to fall backwards, it will actually be fatal for the participants in this long jump athletics branch.

Factors Influencing the Long Jump

1. Speed ​​( speed ), is the ability to move part or all of the body from initial attitude to landing; or also when resting on boards or pedestal beams. This speed is usually influenced by the strength and flexibility of the participant.
2. Strength ( strength ), is the amount of power generated by the muscles of the participant’s body so that he can make a maximum jump.
3. Explosive power, is the ability of the body’s muscles to repulse and float in the air when released from the pedestal beam.
4. Balance, is the ability to maintain the body in a certain position correctly, starting from the jump technique to the landing technique.
5. Skill is the ability to perform a motor movement correctly and correctly.
6. Coordination is something that must be possessed by participants in the long jump sport to be able to align their body movements according to their needs.

Things to Look For When Doing the Long Jump

1. Keep your running speed until it’s time to take off on the takeoff board.
2. Achieve a fast and dynamic boost from the fulcrum.
3. Change body position when running. It aims to achieve an upright body position when running.
4. Use arm swing properly and correctly.
5. Try to make good gestures.
6. In order to make the final move stronger, you can use more repulsion.
7. Practice mainly on landings.
8. Master the right movements starting from the movements of the hands and feet, either in a bent or straightened position.

An athlete in the long jump can be declared a failure when making a jump, if they do the following:

1. During the grounding technique, the competitor touches the ground after the focus line using any part of the body, either when jumping or running.
2. Resting from outside the end of the support beam, either at a distance before or at the extension of the bearing boundary line.
3. Touches the ground between the takeoff line and the landing area.
4. Perform other movements such as somersaults when performing prefix techniques and jumping techniques.
5. When performing the landing technique, competitors instead touch the ground outside the landing area and closer to the take-off line than the nearest mark in the sand.
6. Participants or athletes in the long jump athletics branch are not present in the arena after 2 minutes of being summoned.

Arena Form in Long Jump

The shape of the long jump athletics field is of course different from the shape of the basketball or volleyball athletics field. What must exist in a long jump field is a running track, take-off board, tub for jumping, and a landing spot.

In this long jump athletics field, the distance between the running track and the starting board is generally 40-45 meters, with a track width of about 1.22 meters. Meanwhile, the repulsion board has a length of approximately 1.22 meters and a width of 20 cm with a thickness of about 10 cm. Between the jump boards and the jumpers, at a distance of 1 meter.

Then, the jump tub has a length of about 9 meters with a width of 2.95 meters. For landing spots, have a distance of at least 2.75 meters between the line of take-off and the end of the take-off place. The landing area is usually filled with fine sand and the surface of the sand must be level or flat with the top side of the takeoff board.

 

The Influence of Traditional Games on Long Jumping

Did Sinaumed’s ever play traditional games using basic jumping movements, for example, hopscotch and jump rope, especially when he was little? These traditional games are part of Indonesian culture passed down by our ancestors because in ancient times, traditional games were a means of entertainment, especially for children.

Until now, traditional games are still preserved, especially by children in rural areas. This is actually the right step rather than children having to be faced with gadgets and being reluctant to do physical activity. Without realizing it, it turns out that these traditional game activities can affect physical abilities, especially when doing this long jump sport.

Based on research conducted by Gumilar Dwi Wardani and Agus Mahendra with the title “Comparison of the Influence of Hopper Jumping and Rope Jumping Activities on Long Jumping Ability” shows that these two traditional games have more influence on long jump abilities, especially in children.

Providing alternative learning in the form of traditional jump rope and jump rope games turned out to be quite helpful and influential in efforts to improve long jump skills. It is called an alternative because not all schools have adequate facilities to do long jump learning, so that children can still improve their jumping movement skills, then do it with these traditional games. Not only that, it turns out that the implementation of two traditional games can also stimulate and strengthen leg muscle strength, you know .

When playing jump rope, the child’s gross motor skills will be automatically stimulated so that physically he becomes more skilled because he learns about how and how to jump with his own skills. If this is practiced diligently, then the child can grow to be agile, agile, and dynamic. The traditional game of jumping rope also has an effect on the condition of the body, especially making the legs and hips stronger.

So, that’s a review of how to land correctly in the long jump sport. Even though this sport looks easy, it actually has a variety of techniques that not just anyone can do if they are not trained carefully. Is Sinaumed’s interested in learning this sport? If so, it’s never too late to learn something.

Book Recommendations & Related Articles

Source:

Wardani, Gumilar Dwi and Agus Mahendra. (2017). Comparison of the Effect of Hopper Jumping Activities and Rope Jumping Activities on Long Jumping Ability. Journal of Teaching Physical Education in Elementary School, Vol 1(1). 

Also Read!

• Techniques in the Long Jump
• The Benefits of Long Jumping for Mental and Physical Health
• Definition and Kinds of Athletics
• Differences between walking and running from various sides
• What is Static Balance?
• History and Basic Techniques of Table Tennis
• Definition of Rhythmic Gymnastics
• Rules in Volleyball
• History of Invention of the Game of Volleyball
• Definition of Relay Running
• 15 Benefits of Sit-Ups, What Are They?
• Benefits of Short Distance Running

The Concept of Time in History – In history, the concept of time is of course important because it seems to imply when the historical event took place. Not only that, the existence of this concept of time can also be used by historians and the general public to find out how the development of historical events related to the present day. Remembering that historical events that occurred in the past cannot be simply forgotten, but must be used as a lesson for humans in the future.

The definition of history will indeed always be about things that happened in society in the past that were even able to change the living conditions of some humans in the future. Then actually, what are the concepts of time in history? What is the concept of time? Is there a connection between time and events in history? What is the scope in history? So, so that Sinaumed’s understands these things, let’s look at the following review!

Understanding the Concept of Time in History

Actually, the concept of time (temporal dimension) has two meanings, namely in the form of denotative meaning (true meaning) and connotative meaning (unreal meaning or figurative meaning). If traced from the denotative meaning, the term “time” has a definition in the form of ‘ a single unit of seconds, minutes, hours, days, weeks, months, years, windu, centuries, and so on ‘. Meanwhile, if traced from the connotative meaning, the term “time” can be defined as a concept.

The concept of time will definitely not always be related to the concept of space. The concept of space (spatial dimension) is the place or location of an event, be it a natural event, social event, or historical event which is the main part of the process of time travel. Well, human existence in this case is as an actor or subject in social events and historical events that occur. On that basis, the three concepts namely time, space, and human being, become an important unity that cannot be separated, especially in an event and its changes for the future.

So, it can be concluded that the concept of time in history can be in the form of when (day, month, year, century) the occurrence of an event which is carried out by humans as the subject. 

An event can be observed based on the dimensions of space, time, and human dimensions. If based on the spatial dimension, any event must have certain boundaries as the place where the event takes place. Then if it is based on the human dimension, any human being becomes the object as well as the subject in the occurrence of an event. In fact, not infrequently, an event that occurs turns out to be able to give effect to changes in humans themselves. It is definitely hoped that this change is a change for the better so that it requires human awareness in an effort to make sense of the events that occur. More or less like parental advice about ” learning from experience “.

Meanwhile, based on the dimension of time, every event that occurs is a process. That is, these events change over time and time will also continue (continuity). The existence of this time will be used by humans who are fully aware that time will indeed continue to run, so that they can learn to experience changes for the better.

Does Sinaumed’s realize that the concept of time can be divided into three, namely past, present, and future. In the past, historical events became an eternal fact that could never be changed. In the present, it is hoped that the next generation will be able to understand every historical event so that it does not repeat itself, especially if the impact is detrimental to many parties. Then in the future, historical events can be used as a guide for life, especially for the general public so that they are more careful when making decisions and acting. Well, in this history, the most dominant concept of time leans on the past. However, there is no doubt that history can influence events that will occur in the future.

4 Concepts of Time in History

Basically, the concept of time in any historical event will indeed be related to the development of human life, especially since humans indeed play the role of both subject and object in history. In this case, the existence of the concept of time in a history has the following points:

• The past is a time that has happened or passed. But not infrequently, the past can also continue and have not even stopped.
• The past has an open nature and is connected to each other between times. Therefore, whatever has happened in the past can be used as a lesson for the future.
• History can be used as a guide for humans in their efforts to plan something both in the present and in the future.

The existence of history is proven to be able to lead people to understand what happened in the past to serve as a guide for the present and the future. In other words, history is a science of events that occurred in human society in the past, with causality and the process of its development is useful as experience to guide human life in the present and in the future.

The existence of the concept of time in history also includes two things, namely:

• The process of continuity of an event within a certain time limit.
• The unity of time continuity, namely in the past, present, and future.

So, since the concept of time and the concept of man are interrelated, there are four essential concepts of time in a historical event, namely development, continuity, repetition and change (Kuntowijoyo). These four concepts are of course related, because history is not only limited to the study of the development of people’s lives in the past, but also to the continuity, repetition, and change of events in the past. Here is the description.

1. Development

This concept of development can occur if society, which also acts as the subject and object of history, moves from one form to another. That is, people tend to make changes from simple to more complex forms. An example is the development of the democratic system in Indonesia. The development of society from the past to the present is also the result of learning through history. Updates that occur in each generation are evidence of successful developments from time to time. Therefore, the existence of sociology and anthropology also plays a role in expressing history according to its time dimension.

2. Continuity

This concept of continuity can occur if a new society only adopts old institutions. That is, even though people have taken lessons from the past, they still develop them and apply them to the present. For example, in the past there was a patrimonial system (a form of government in which all power flowed directly to the ruler) which was then continued into a colonialism system.

This proves that history is still continuous with things in the past, even though a lot of time has passed.

3. Repetition

In the concept of repetition, this can occur if an event that occurred in the past occurs again in the future. A simple example is the events of the world war which were repeated twice and had an equally detrimental impact, especially on civil society. An example of an event in the past that experienced the concept of this repetition of time was when Sukarno’s power fell. At that time, President Soekarno’s power fell because of the actions carried out by the students. However, it turned out that these events recurred repeatedly during Suharto’s reign, which were both caused by student actions. Therefore, it is not impossible if a historical event can be repeated, both with different and the same human dimensions.

4. Change

The concept of this change can occur if a society succeeds in experiencing a shift or change. Usually, this concept of change occurs on a large scale and in a relatively short time. In addition, the concept of this change can also occur due to outside influences. For example, there was a historical event in the form of the Paderi Movement in West Sumatra against indigenous peoples. This event is considered as the result of the influence of the Wahhabi Movement in Arabia which was “transmitted” through the pilgrims returning from Makkah.

The Connection Between Time and History

The perspective of time becomes a very important dimension in history. Although basically, history will be related to the past, it turns out that the concept is very continuous with the present and the future. The process which is in a history, shows the existence of changes, transitions, and replacements. In that case, history will be given shape in the form of depictions of historical events which are carried out through three categories, namely the spatial category, the time category, and the category of life themes.

Historical events that occurred in the past will never be disconnected from the series of events in the present and the future. Therefore, the concept of time in history is one of continuity. So, to make it easier for humans to remember and study historical events in the past, time limits in the form of time classifications are needed. The classification of time in history will later produce time divisions in the form of periods, epochs, or chapters of time. While the “period of time” is in the form of a single unit of time whose content, form, and time are also certain.

Since history is not limited in its occurrence, time will be divided according to the events that occurred in the form of periods, aka periodization. The purpose of this periodization is so that each timeline or sequence of historical events is easy to understand. Real proof that the concept of time is related to historical setting is in the history of the Archipelago. As far as we have studied, the history of the archipelago has specific timelines of prehistoric times, the era of Hindu-Buddhist influence, the Islamic era, the colonial period, the National Awakening period, and the era of independence. So, through this periodization we can see that each era has different characteristics from other periods of time.

Get to Know 4 Scopes in History

Before discussing the concept of history as an event, Sinaumed’s must first understand the scope of history, because within this scope there will be a limit to the number of subjects included in history. According to KBBI (Big Indonesian Dictionary), history is 1) events and events that really happened in the past; 2) knowledge or description of events and incidents that actually happened in the past. So, from this definition it can be concluded that history is events, events, or knowledge about events that really happened in the past. To find out whether the incident or event really happened or was just a fiction is through the existence of physical evidence as a historical source.

The following are 4 historical scopes, namely:

1. History as a Science

The scope of history is that history is seen as a science which is of course related to events (events) and stories that really happened in society in the past. Within this scope, history is used as a clear object to study, because it has well-validated data and sources. The application of history as a science is in the form of studying history in schools and making history a major in college.

2. History as an Event

The second scope of history is history as an event. In this case, it means that history will be closely related to something that has happened in the past that is real. Usually, these historical events involve important events that can change the lives of many people.

Examples are the events of the proclamation of Indonesian independence, the Rengasdengklok incident, the Linggarjati Agreement, and others.

3. History as Story

It should be noted that events and stories are different , right? According to KBBI (Big Indonesian Dictionary), stories are stories about events in a person’s life or can also be referred to as a person’s life history.

Within the scope of history as this story, it can refer to the writing of historical facts of certain people. These particular people have the expertise to obtain and gather ideas for writing stories from existing historical materials. In short, the story or stories written by certain people are in the form of a series of stories in the form of narrative memories about past history. For example, stories from the G30S-PKI events are written or told from the point of view of survivors.

4. History as Art

The existence of history can turn out to be an art, you know, especially when it relates to the scope of history as a story. Sinaumed’s is certainly no stranger to historical events which are then developed into literary works, be it prose or drama. Well, in this case it means that history can become an art, in the form of literary works. An example is a drama or film with the theme of the struggle of the Indonesian nation during the colonial period.

So, that’s an overview of what the concept of time is and the four essential concepts of time in a historical event. Therefore, history that occurred in the past will indeed continue to be continuous with the present and the future, as long as human civilization is still running.

Book Recommendations & Related Articles

Source: 

Ningrum, Epon. Module 5: Concepts of Time, Change and Culture. 

Masruroh, Lulu. (2020). Class X History Module: Human Life in Time and Space . Ministry of Education and Culture.

Also Read!

• Background to the Crusades
• Predynastic Period to Roman Domination in Ancient Egyptian Civilization
• Scope in Historical Events
• Phases and Periodization of the Development of Islamic Civilization
• Periodization of the Prehistoric Age Based on Archeology
• Definition, Purpose, and Factors Influencing Periodization
• Recognizing History as Art
• Background of the Europeans Exploring the Ocean
• What is History?
• Definition of Ethical Politics and Figures Involved

The Concept of the Water Cycle – Water is an important compound for all life on earth, but not necessarily on other planets. It has the chemical formula H ₂ O, which means that each molecule contains one oxygen and two hydrogen atoms. The two are linked by covalent bonds.

The earth itself is covered by water as much as approximately 71% of its share. There are 1.4 trillion cubic kilometers of water available on earth. most of it can be found in the sea (salt water) and on ice sheets (at the poles and on mountain peaks).

Not only that, water can also be found in rivers, clouds, rain, water vapor, surface fresh water, lakes and sea ice. Water in some of these places moves following a water cycle. The water evaporates and then falls again as rain.

The following is a further explanation of the concept of the water cycle. You can listen to it.

The Concept of the Water Cycle and Its Stages!

The concept of the water cycle or also known as the hydrologic cycle or the water cycle is the circulation of water which describes the movement of water molecules (H ₂ O ) from the earth’s atmosphere and vice versa. This cycle never stops so that it forms a circular series of journeys of water molecules on earth.

The concept of the water cycle has three stages as follows.

1. Evaporation/Transpiration

Evaporation is the process of evaporation of water originating from rivers, lakes, seas and other bodies of water. Meanwhile, transpiration is the release of water molecules as a result of metabolism from plants. Both have the same principle, namely being part of the process of changing liquids into gases that will gather in the atmosphere.

2. Condensation

Condensation is the process of changing water from gas to liquid. This process is known as condensation. This process is the opposite of evaporation or vaporization.

In the hydrologic cycle, condensation occurs in the atmosphere due to changes in temperature and pressure. As a result of condensation, water will gather to form black clouds which are ready to fall as rain when they reach saturation point.

3. Precipitation

Precipitation is the result or product of condensation. Precipitation occurs due to cooling and the addition of water vapor so that it is able to form clouds reaching the saturation point. The more water vapor that is formed in the atmosphere, the more water droplets in the clouds and the weight.

When the clouds are no longer able to accommodate the amount of water that is formed, the water will be released in the form of rain. Water that falls to earth can be liquid or snow. It is affected by temperature.

Water that falls as snow when the temperature is below freezing (0 ⁰ C or 32 ⁰ F). this is caused by the low temperature in winter, water vapor in the atmosphere will condense into solid ice without going through the liquid stage.

The ice crystals that form will absorb, then freeze the additional moisture from the surrounding air into snow crystals. Then, fell to earth.

In addition to the stages of the water cycle, You must also understand several terms regarding the water cycle as follows.

• Infiltration means that water seeps into the pores of the soil.
• Interception means rainwater that is trapped above the plants then evaporates before it reaches the ground.
• Advection is a condition where the awn moves to another place due to angina.
• Run off is a condition where water moves on land from a high place to a low place.

Types of Water Cycle

The water cycle consists of several types, including short cycles, medium cycles, and long cycles. The following describes the three cycles.

1. Long Cycle

The long cycle begins with the evaporation and condensation of seawater. the clouds that form are carried by the wind to higher ground in areas of land. The clouds that have formed will join with water vapor that comes from the evaporation of lakes, rivers, and plant transpiration.

Because it is affected by the altitude, the water vapor hits the cold air layer and turns into snow. Thus, there is snowfall in winter and also forms chunks of ice on high mountains.

Chunks of ice in the mountains will slide to a lower place because of the force of gravity. Chunks of ice that slide due to gravity are called glaciers. Glaciers exposed to high temperatures then melt and flow through inland waters which will return to the sea.

2. Medium Cycle

Cycles are occurring when seawater evaporates. He will be carried by the wind towards the mainland. At a certain altitude, water vapor will condense into clouds.

Then, the clouds will turn into rain that falls on the land. Then, seeping into the soil, some will be absorbed by plant roots and some will be carried away by surface water flows such as rivers and ditches. Water will pass through various channels that will bring it back to the sea.

3. Short Cycle

The short cycle begins with the process of evaporating seawater into the atmosphere. At a certain height, water vapor will condense to form clouds. Clouds that are no longer able to hold the weight of water will experience precipitation and rain occurs. Thus, the water falls back into the sea.

Benefits of Water for Life

All living things on earth need water to support their survival. Here are some of the benefits of water for humans, plants and animals.

1. Benefits of Water for Humans

Human life cannot be separated from water. The human body itself consists of more water. Here are the benefits of water for humans.

• For transportation activities, for example boats and ships.
• For household purposes such as cooking, eating, and drinking.
• For bathing, washing, mopping, and so on.
• For trade purposes such as restaurants, hotels, industry, factories, and so on.
• For irrigation of rice fields or agricultural and plantation activities.

2. Benefits of Water for Plants

Plants also need water to survive. Here are some of the benefits of water for plants.

• To encourage the process of respiration in plants.
• To help the process of photosynthesis or the manufacture of food.
• To transport nutrients and nutrients from the soil.
• Water is the source of life for plants.
• Water is a tool for the process of movement in plants.

3. Benefits of Water for Animals

Animals also need water to maintain their survival. Here are some of the benefits of water for animals.

• For eating and drinking purposes.
• Water is a habitat for several animals, such as fish, crocodiles, snakes, and so on. Be it water in rivers, lakes or seas.
• Water helps animals to produce milk.
• Water helps maintain the animal’s body temperature.
• Water helps animals to regulate their blood pressure.

Activities that Damage the Water Cycle

The water cycle can be disrupted or even damaged due to human activities. Here are some activities that need to be avoided to maintain the continuity of the water cycle.

1. Damaging Nature

Humans often exploit nature recklessly. For example, cutting down forests continuously will have a negative impact on the sustainability of the water cycle. This is due to the reduced water absorption area.

In addition, water pollution in rivers or seas will have a negative impact on the water cycle. Air pollution also contributes to a negative impact on the water cycle. Rainwater that falls to the earth and seeps into the soil and contains acids will affect plant growth.

The effects of acid rain are influenced by gases in the atmosphere. Other gases that become pollutants can also inhibit the evaporation process or the evaporation process in the water cycle.

2. Wasteful Water

The habit of saving water is a wise attitude to maintain the natural balance of small things. Some ways to save water include closing the faucet tightly when finished using it. Use sufficient water when bathing and washing clothes.

You can also collect rainwater for washing clothes, watering plants and other activities. Before using water, it’s best to remember that water must be used wisely and only as needed.

3. Overdevelopment

The number of buildings and paved roads has reduced the water catchment area. This will certainly disrupt the water cycle. Therefore, efforts are needed to balance the water cycle. For example by building water catchment tanks, dams, reservoirs, waterways, and water catchment areas overgrown with plants or trees.

How to Preserve Water

Water is very important for human, plant and animal life. As creatures endowed with reason, humans should take a bigger role in maintaining the water cycle. Here are some easy steps to conserve water.

1. Use Water Sparingly

Drought can occur not only caused by global warming. But, also by the wasteful and irresponsible use of water. Humans have several habits of wasting water including taking too long a shower, washing vehicles, forgetting to turn off the tap water, and so on.

These habits can reduce the amount of water. Simple steps, namely using enough water and not forgetting to turn off the water tap.

2. Reduce the Use of Chemicals

Chemicals that dissolve in water can damage aquatic ecosystems. For example, chemicals can destroy algae which are a food source for plankton.

Therefore, to conserve water, You can start reducing the use of chemicals such as laundry soap and detergent. Instead, You can use lerak fruit or other alternative natural ingredients.

3. Dispose of trash in its place

Garbage dumped haphazardly in ditches, rivers or other waterways has the potential to cause water pollution. Worse, it can cause flooding. This of course also disrupts the survival and environment of other living things.

Polluted rivers or seas disrupt the survival of aquatic animals and plants. Not only that, polluted water cannot be used to meet daily needs.

4. Dispose of Chemicals Properly and Properly

Chemicals such as paint, oil or other chemicals that are disposed of carelessly can damage aquatic ecosystems. Not only that, it can also damage the atmosphere. Therefore, the remains of chemicals must be disposed of properly.

5. Recycling Used Materials

Used household materials that are no longer used can be recycled to minimize wasted materials. For example by using waste mineral water bottles for pencil cases or something else. Small steps by utilizing used materials can save the earth from damage.

The Concept of Synchronic Thinking – There are three phases in this life that we will definitely feel or live. Where the three phases are like the past, present and future. The past is an event that has taken place in the past.

The present is a state that is being carried out today or now. Then for the future itself is something that has not happened yet. However, this article will only discuss past events associated with synchronous thinking.

Starting from the understanding of synchronous thinking, meaning, characteristics, approaches to synchronous thinking, applying the synchronous thinking approach to events that occurred in the past, to examples of questions you can read in full in this article.

Of course, it will be very helpful so that you also understand better how to apply synchronous thinking correctly. Without having to linger, see the full review below.

 

 

Definition of Synchronic Thinking

Every incident that occurred in the past or in the past can indeed be explored by using a synchronous way of thinking. Maybe some of you have heard the word synchronic or synchronic thinking itself.

Simply put, synchronic thinking is a method of developing events that happened in the past. Actually, synchronic thinking can also be regarded as a method of analysis of something that happened in the past.

Even with the existence of this synchronic thinking method, you could say that the analysis carried out will be dissected coherently. Coherently here are every aspect that can relate to events that occurred in the past.

Because every event must have many things related. An example is the incident on August 17, 1945. From the event alone, it can be analyzed starting from the scene, the characters in it, the impact that occurred from the event, and various other things.

From this one example it can also be concluded that synchronic thinking can indeed make an event in the past be analyzed broadly. In addition, this synchronic approach is mostly used in the social sciences.

Any analysis performed using a synchronous approach will remain centered on the same point in time. However, there are several things that are extended from each of the past events that are being analyzed.

In addition, the analysis using the synchronous approach method also does not attempt to make a conclusion about something that has happened in the past. However, the synchronic approach only seeks to carry out an analysis of something that has happened in the past.

If previously discussed in general what is synchronous thinking. So if you look at the origin of the synchronic language itself, it turns out that it comes from Greek, you know. Where synchronic consists of two words namely Syn which means with, while for Chronos itself it means time or period.

With these two meanings, if it is concluded, synchronic means narrowing in time but expanding in space. Of course, if you look at the previous examples, the meaning of narrowing in time but expanding or widening in space will be easier to understand.

So, what about the explanation of the meaning of synchronic thinking above. Do you understand or not? If you are still confused, let’s read the next explanation which can add to your understanding regarding synchronous thinking.

 

The Meaning of Synchronic Thinking

If you already know how the explanation is related to the notion of synchronic thinking. So it’s incomplete if you don’t discuss what it really means to do a synchronous thinking approach to an incident that happened in the past.

In simple terms, the meaning of the synchronous thinking approach to events or events that occurred in the past is to see what aspects actually influenced or were affected by an event that occurred in the past.

Of course, as previously explained, if every incident or event in the past that will be analyzed with a synchronous thinking approach will still focus on one particular time. But even though it focuses on one time, these events can still be dissected broadly.

Starting from anyone who was affected by the incident, what influenced the incident, what was in it and various other things.

It turns out that if you understand it more deeply, synchronic thinking is actually very important. With a synchronous thinking approach, every event that has occurred in the past can be shown in thorough detail.

Even the events that have been analyzed can also be used as current learning methods. Ah, it turns out that the topic of synchronic thinking is interesting if discussed more deeply.

Synchronic Thinking Characteristics

After understanding what synchronous thinking means and the meaning of having a synchronous thinking approach to past events. Next is about the characteristics of synchronic thinking. At this point it is very important so that you can understand more deeply how to think in syncronically.

So, you don’t need to linger, you can read the explanation regarding the characteristics of synchronous thinking in the explanation below.

• Review events that occurred in the past

The first characteristic of synchronic thinking is the existence of activities to examine events that have occurred in the past. The purpose of the process of reviewing past events is to be able to further explore what happened in the past but still focus on a predetermined time.

An example is the process of implementing Indonesian independence on August 17, 1945. In this case the task of reviewing past events is to make us all aware of what happened at the time of Indonesian independence.

However, the focus of time used was only on August 17, 1945. In this way, of course, it can be concluded that studying past events can provide a lot of knowledge or information about things that influenced the incident at a certain time.

• Has a horizontal character

Next is horizontal. Although only focused on a certain time. But the past events that are being processed or analyzed can be widened. This means that in the process of analyzing a past event, we will look at various aspects that influenced or were influenced by the occurrence of the incident.

Starting from economic, social, political, to cultural aspects. Every incident like history is sometimes influenced by some of these aspects. Then after the incident actually happened. Then there will be some other things that are influenced by it.

Of course, the existence of a synchronic approach can make us know more about one event at a certain time, but the scope of analysis can cover all. At this point it also describes the meaning of synchronic, namely expanding and narrowing within a certain time range.

• Narrower study

As previously explained, the analysis process carried out in a synchronous thinking approach to a past event only focuses on one time. This will make a study conducted also be narrower.

For example, two events in the past with different time space. Where one incident occurred in one day, while the second incident occurred in approximately 7 days.

Of course, to be able to apply the synchronous thinking approach, an event or past event will be chosen within the scope of one day.

• It is serious and more difficult

In this point more emphasis is placed on the detailed state of the analysis carried out in an incident with a synchronous thinking approach. Where events that occur at one time must be analyzed more deeply.

Of course, the situation of studying more deeply with a certain or short period of time has a sufficient level of difficulty. In addition, the results obtained will also be more serious or more complete.

This is because all aspects that affect or are affected by an event can be obtained more fully if you use a synchronous thinking approach.

• The emphasis of the study on the structure

The last is when analyzing a past event. So the focus is on the structure. Starting from the social structure, society, politics, economy, to culture.

With these points of emphasis, the data or information resulting from the analysis of an event that occurred in the past will be more complete. Of course, you will also understand more about what happened in the past.

The Use of Synchronic Thinking Approaches in History

As explained earlier, the synchronous thinking approach can also be applied in the analysis of historical events. Although a historical event only happened at one time. But with the synchronous thinking approach can produce such complete information.

The goal is that every incident of a historical event can be understood more deeply. In addition, the existence of a synchronous thinking approach to a historical event will also make it easier for us to find information not only from the chronology of events but from other aspects.

Application of the Synchronic Thinking Approach

In the synchronous thinking approach, it turns out that several ways are needed, you know. This method has actually been widely taught in Indonesian since elementary school. The method used is 5W + 1H or What, Who, When, Why, Where, and How.

However, to better understand some of the ways needed in a synchronous thinking approach. So the explanation below will help make it easier for you when you are going to do an analysis of past events with a synchronous thinking approach.

• What?

What or what happened in the events that occurred in the past? At this point you must understand the outline of the events that occurred.

• Who ?

Next is Who ? Where the emphasis on this point is anyone who took part in the events in the past that will be analyzed.

• when ?

When or when this is the time of the incident in the past. As explained, the synchronic thinking approach is to focus on time. Therefore it is very important to determine the time of the event to be analyzed.

• why ?

Why or why events in the past can occur. What aspects influenced the occurrence of events in the past.

• where?

Where or where the past event occurred. Of course, the place where the event occurred can be explained in the analysis that is being carried out.

• How?

How or how the event occurred. At this point the focus will be on the course of events that occurred. Of course, the aspects affected by the occurrence of these events will also be explained in the analysis process that has been carried out.

With the help of the 5W+1H, of course, the process of analyzing past events with a synchronous thinking approach will also be easier to do.

Example of Synchronic Thinking Approach to a Past Event

Although previously described several examples. But so that you can understand more. So we give another example. Quoted from the official Kompas.com page, here is an example of a synchronous thinking approach to past events.

Problems example:

Judging from an event in 1950 to 1959 even though Indonesia was already independent. However, Indonesia’s economic situation can be said to be in a bad state.

Where the bad economic situation is influenced by several aspects in it such as.

1. Agricultural products are the mainstay of export activities carried out by Indonesia.
2. The round table conference determined that Indonesia must bear the economic and financial burden.
3. At that time, the deficit that had to be borne by Indonesia was around Rp. 5.1 billion.
4. The Dutch government did not pass down enough values ​​to transform the colonial economic system into a national economic system.
5. The unstable domestic political situation made it easier for unplanned spending to occur.
6. The existing security in the country is not so profitable.
7. Domestic growth was so great at that time.

From the example questions or cases, an economic event that occurred in Indonesia from 1950 to 1959 can be analyzed using a synchronous thinking approach. Of course the results of the analysis carried out will be so easy to help in today’s life.

Conclusion

From all the explanations above, it can be concluded that synchronous thinking is always focused on past events with a predetermined time. Even though the time has been determined, the analysis with a synchronous thinking approach can be widened according to the aspects that influence the events that occur.

Starting from the aspects that influenced the occurrence of the incident to the aspects that were affected after the incident. Synchronic thinking also has characteristics that you can read in the previous explanation.

Besides that, to facilitate the process of synchronous thinking approaches to past events, you can use the 5W + 1H method. That way the results of the analysis with a synchronic approach will be more complete.

Even though you have read some of the explanations above. But there’s nothing wrong with using a book on history with the title “From the Stage of National History: Learning from Figures & Events”.

This book was published by Pustaka Al Kautsar with a total of 312 pages. Meanwhile, the author is Lukman Hakiem. And it has been on the market since 2020.

There are many historical events in this book that you can analyze with a synchronous thinking approach. And of course the easiest way to buy this book is via www.sinaumedia.com . Interesting to read and suitable to help you more easily understand the synchronous thinking approach to past events.

The Concept of National Income – Have you ever heard of national income or gross and net national product? If not, you need to know about national income, both its meaning, concept and how to calculate it. The following is a summary of the meaning, concept and method of calculating national income.

Definition of National Income

• According to Sadono Sukirno, national income describes the level of state production achieved in a certain period of time and changes in the level of production from year to year.
• According to Soediyono Reksoprayitno, national income is the amount of goods and services produced by a country’s economy.
• Karl E and Ray C argue that national income is the total income generated by several factors of production owned by citizens of a country.

Through national income, the government can calculate the amount of taxes obtained from its people. In addition, national income is influenced by various things in the macro economy , for example companies, families, state administration and other factors.

You can study national income as part of macroeconomics in the Textbook of Macroeconomic Theory by Sattar Sivana Kardinar Wijayanti.

Read more in the article: Definition of National Income

Benefit of Calculation of National Income

There are several benefits of calculating national income, one of which is knowing the economic development of a country. Apart from this, there are several benefits of calculating national income that you need to know.

• Can determine the level of prosperity of a country.
• By calculating national income, we can evaluate the performance of the economy on a certain scale.
• By calculating the country’s national income can measure changes in the economy over time.
• Countries can compare economic performance across sectors.
• By calculating the country’s national income, it can find indicators of the quality of life of the people of that country.
• The results of calculating national income can be a comparative indicator of the country’s economic performance.
• Can be used as an indicator of comparison of the quality of living standards of a country with other countries.
• Can be a measure and comparison of economic growth from time to time.
• Can be used as a measure and comparison of economic growth and wealth between countries.

Every country in the world has a very strong relationship of dependence and mutual influence. Likewise with Indonesia, which is a country with a strategic position that influences economic activities in it, which you can learn about in the Indonesian Economy & Global Economic Dynamics book.

National Income Concept

To be able to calculate national income, you need the categories within the national income itself. Basically, national income can be divided into six categories, namely as follows.

1. Gross Domestic Product or GDP

Gross domestic product is the total number of products in the form of goods and services produced by several production units within the boundaries of a country or within one year.

GDP = Domestic income (DN) + Domestic foreign income (DN)

In the calculation of GDP, it includes goods and services produced by related foreign companies and agencies. However, its territory is still within the territory of a country or domestic.

2. Gross National Product or GNP

Gross national product or gross national product is the value of products in the form of goods and services produced by residents of a country (national) for one year. These national products include those produced by citizens produced abroad. The formula for GNP is as follows.

GNP = Income of Indonesian Citizens DN + Income of Foreign Citizens (LN) – Income of Foreign Citizens

3. Net National Product or NNP

The formula for calculating net national product is as follows.

NNP = GNP – depreciation or depreciation of capital goods.

Depreciation referred to above is the replacement of capital goods for production equipment used in the production process. In general, depreciation is an estimate so that it can cause errors, even if it is relatively small.

4. Net National Income or NNI

Net national income or net national income is income calculated according to the amount of remuneration received by people who act as owners of production factors. The following is the formula from NNI.

NNI = NNP – Indirect taxes

The indirect tax in question is a tax whose burden can be transferred to another party, for example, gift tax, sales tax and so on.

5. Individual Income or PI

Individual income or personal income is the amount of income received by everyone in society. This includes income earned without carrying out any activity, for example, the salary of a civil servant or the income of an entrepreneur that is obtained in sequence. Here’s the formula for calculating PI.

PI = NNI – Corporate tax – Dues – Retained earnings + Transfer payment

The transfer payment in question is income that does not include production fees, but is taken from a portion of last year’s national income. Examples include pension payments, unemployment benefits and so on.

6. Income ready to spend

This sixth concept can also be called disposable income, which is income that is ready to be used to buy consumption goods and services and the rest becomes savings which are channeled into investments. The following is the formula for disposable income.

DI = PI – Direct tax

The direct tax in question is a tax whose burden cannot be transferred to another party, for example income tax.

The formula for calculating national income

There are several methods of calculating national income that you need to know, each existing calculation method depends on the approach used, the following are the methods and methods for calculating national income that you need to know.

1. Production method

With the production method, national income is the total value added of goods and services produced by all sectors of the country’s economy. Here’s the formula for the production method.

Y = 1 unit x price 1 + added value (2 units x 2 price) + m.. added value (n x price n units)

2. Revenue method

National income in the income method is the total income received by all sectors of the country’s economy for a certain duration. For example one year. The following is the formula for calculating national income using the income method.

Y = rent + wage + interest or interest + profit

3. Dispensing method

National income in the expenditure method is the amount of expenditure that has been used by all sectors of the economy. The following is the formula for calculating national income using the expenditure method.

Y = C + I + G

From the formula above, here’s what you need to know.

C is consumption expenditure , which is all household expenditure.

Meanwhile, I referred to in the expenditure method is investment expenditure, which is an investment made by the company.

The G referred to in the expenditure method is government expenditure, which is routine expenditure by the government.

Matrix is ​​one of the easiest ways to solve mathematical problems that have many variables. Usually it is applied to the fields of mathematics, economics, and engineering.

The matrix itself has many types. One of them is the identity matrix in which the diagonal is the number one. Then, how to operate it. The following will explain in more detail about the identity matrix.

Overview of the Matrix

A matrix is ​​an arrangement of numbers, symbols or expressions arranged in columns and rows to form a rectangular shape. As an initial description of the matrix, Sinaumed’s can listen to the example of a 2 x 3 matrix below.

The size of the matrix is ​​determined by the number of rows and columns it has. A matrix with m columns and n rows is called an m x n matrix, where m and n are called by their dimensions. For example, the matrix above is called a 2 x 3 matrix. This is because the matrix consists of 2 rows and 3 columns.

A matrix with the same number of rows and columns is called a square matrix. The matrix with the number of one row is called a row vector. Meanwhile, a matrix with one column is called a column vector.

An infinite matrix is ​​a matrix with an unlimited number of rows or columns (or both). In some contexts, matrices considered without rows or columns are called empty matrices.

For further explanation, Sinaumed’s can listen to the image below.

Row m is horizontal and column n is vertical. Each element of the matrix is ​​often denoted by a variable of two index notations. For example, a _2,1 represents the elements in the second row and first column of matrix A.

Each object in the matrix A with dimension m x n is often denoted by a _i,j. Which is the maximum value i = m and the maximum value j = n. The objects in the matrix are called elements, entries or members of the matrix. 

If two matrices have the same dimensions (each matrix has the same number of rows and columns), then the two matrices can be added or subtracted element by element. However, based on the rules of matrix multiplication, the conditions for matrix multiplication, namely when the number of columns of the first matrix is ​​equal to the number of rows of the second matrix in the multiplication of two matrices.

That is, multiplying an m x n matrix by an n x p matrix results in an m x p matrix . Therefore, matrix multiplication is not commutative. In general, matrices are used to represent linear transformations, that is, a generalization of linear functions such as f ( x ) = 4 x.

For example, the effect of rotation in three-dimensional space is a linear transformation denoted by the matrix R. If v is a vector in three dimensions, the result R _v represents the position of the point after it is rotated.

The matrix can be applied in various cyan fields. For example in physics in the form of classical mechanics, optics, and quantum mechanics. Matrices are also used to study physical states, such as the motion of planets. In the field of computer graphics, matrices are applied to manipulate 3D models and project them onto a two-dimensional screen.

In the field of probability theory and statistics, matrices are used as an explanation of state probabilities. As in the pagerank algorithm in determining the order of disbursement pages on Google. The matrix calculus generalizes the classical analytic form of literal and exponential to higher dimensions. Matrices are also applied in economics to describe relational economic systems.

Matrix Functions in Everyday Life

Even though matrix operations look difficult, they have many benefits to make human work easier in everyday life. Here are some of the benefits of studying matrices in everyday life.

• Assist engineers in solving problems with many variables.
• Matrix can also be used to create reports and journals.
• Solving a system of linear equations, geometric transformations, determining television broadcast schedules, and computer programming.
• Helps analyze economic problems that have various kinds of variables.
• As a way to analyze in statistics, education, science, economics, and technology.
• Help find solutions to investigation operations, for example natural resource investigation operations (coal, petroleum, and so on).

The Concept and Properties of the Identity Matrix

The identity matrix is ​​a matrix that has a value on the main diagonal elements in the form of one and the elements outside the main diagonal are zero. The identity matrix has the same properties as the number 1. Which, when a matrix is ​​multiplied by the identity matrix, the result will not change.

The identity matrix is ​​denoted by In _or simply I if the size of n can be known from the context of the discussion. Some books use the abbreviations U and E based on “unit matrix” which in Indonesian means unit matrix. The German translation is “einheitsmatrix”.

In order for Sinaumed’s to better understand the identity matrix, you can listen to the example below.

Example Questions and Discussion of the Matrix

To better understand the identity matrix, Sinaumed’s can listen to several examples of identity matrix problems and their solutions.

1. If the matrices A and B are known as follows.

Determine whether AB = A and BA = A.

Answer:

So, it is proven that if AB = BA = A then matrix B is identity matrix I.

2. Prove if A I ₃ = A = I ₃ A in the following matrices.

Answer:

So, A I ₃ = A = I ₃ A is proven to be true.

3. If the matrices G and A are known as follows. Then, prove that G + A = A + G = G

Answer:

So, G + A = A + G = G proves to be true.

4. If the matrix is ​​known as below.

Then prove that P + A = A + P = P.

Answer:

So, the matrix operation P + A = A + P = P is proven to be true.

5. Prove if the matrix AB = BA = A in the following matrices A and B.

Answer:

So, AB = BA = A is proven true.

Types of Matrix Based on Its Constituent Elements

There are various types of matrices. Here are some classifications of matrices based on their constituent elements.

1. Null Matrix

The zero matrix is ​​a matrix in which all the constituent elements are zeros. Here’s an example of a zero matrix.

2. Diagonal Matrix

A diagonal matrix is ​​a matrix in which all elements outside the main diagonal are zero and at least one element on the main diagonal is non-zero. The following is an example of a diagonal matrix.

3. Scalar Matrix

A scalar matrix is ​​a matrix in which all the elements are on the same diagonal. Here’s an example of a scalar matrix.

4. Symmetry Matrix

A symmetric matrix is ​​a square matrix in which every element other than the diagonal elements consists of numbers that are symmetrical about the main diagonal. Here’s an example of a symmetric matrix.

5. The Oblique Symmetry Matrix

A skewed symmetric matrix is ​​a symmetric matrix whose elements, apart from the diagonal elements, are opposite to each other. The following is an example of an oblique symmetric matrix.

6. Identity Matrix

The identity matrix is ​​a matrix in which all the main diagonal elements are one and the non-main diagonal elements are zero. Here’s an example of an identity matrix.

7. Upper Triangular Matrix

The upper triangular matrix is ​​a diagonal matrix whose elements on the right (top) of the main diagonal are not equal to zero. Here’s an example of an upper triangular matrix.

8. Lower Triangular Matrix

The lower triangular matrix is ​​a diagonal matrix in which the elements on the left (bottom) of the main diagonal are not equal to zero. The following is an example of a lower triangular matrix.

9. Transpose Matrix

The transpose matrix is ​​a matrix obtained by transferring row elements to column elements or vice versa. Here’s an example of transpose matrix.

Matrix Type Based on Order

The following is a matrix classification based on the order into several categories as follows.

1. Square/Square Matrix

A square matrix is ​​a matrix of order n x n or the number of rows is equal to the number of columns. Here’s an example of a square matrix.

2. Row Matrix

A row matrix is ​​a matrix that has an order of 1 x n or consists of only one row. The following is an example of a row matrix.

3. Column Matrix

A column matrix is ​​a matrix that only consists of one column or has the order n x 1. The following is an example of a column matrix.

4. Upright Matrix

An upright matrix is ​​a matrix that has the order m x n with m > n. The following is an example of a straight matrix.

5. Flat Matrix

Flat matrix is ​​a matrix of the order m x n with m < n. Here’s an example of a flat matrix.

Matrix Classification Based on the Nature of Operations

Matrices are classified according to the nature of their operations into two categories. Here are the details of both.

1. Singular matrix ( singular matrix )

A singular matrix is ​​a matrix that has a determinant value of zero and has no inverse. Here’s an example of a singular matrix.

2. Non singular matrix ( non singular matrix )

A non-singular matrix is ​​a matrix whose determinant is not equal to zero and has an inverse. The following is an example of a non-singular matrix.

The Concept of Thinking History – Learning history is so exciting. Even in learning history, you can use a thinking approach, you know. Many historians apply the concept of historical thinking to the analysis of events that have occurred in the past.

Of course, using a historical thinking approach to analyzing events that occurred in the past provides many advantages. Some of them are getting more complete information to a more coherent time sequence.

Now, if we look at the two advantages of using a historical thinking approach. Of course, it will be even more fun if we learn together about everything related to the concept of historical thinking using the information in this article.

The concept of historical thinking is easily divided into two approaches, namely the synchronous thinking approach and the diachronic thinking approach. Both have different concepts, but are very useful to help analyze an event that has occurred in the past.

You can learn from the definition, characteristics, meaning to examples of these two approaches to historical thinking. Check out the full review of the two below.

 

Historical Thinking Concept Approach

Synchronic Thinking

First, we will learn about what the synchronous thinking approach is. The word synchronic is taken from the Greek words “syn” which means with and “kronos” which means time. Thus thinking synchronically on events that occurred in the past is a way of thinking that extends to a space, but is limited in time.

Simply put, synchronic thinking is an analysis that can be done on an event that has occurred at a certain time. Synchronic thinking also has an emphasis on structure while analyzing events at a certain time.

The Meaning of Synchronic Thinking

By using the concept of the synchronous thinking approach, we can find out what impacts or changes have occurred in an event at that particular time. However, it should also be noted that the synchronic thinking approach does not try to reach a conclusion.

But more on the analysis of what has happened as a result of these events. An example is when analyzing the historical events of the proclamation of August 17, 1945. Of course, you can get a description related to social, political, economic and international relations aspects.

You could say that the synchronic thinking approach is a typical way of thinking from the social sciences.

Characteristics of Synchronic Thinking

The synchronic thinking approach also has several features in it. These characteristics will make it easier for us to learn what exactly synchronic thinking is. Here are some of the characteristics possessed by synchronous thinking that you can read in full.

• Review events that have occurred in the past

The first feature of the synchronic thinking approach is an analysis or study of an event in the past. This means that the concept of the synchronous thinking approach can only be applied to an event that has occurred in the past.

By thinking synchronously you can go deeper into what has happened in the past but for a predetermined time.

An example of this first characteristic is the activity of analyzing the events of the proclamation of August 17, 1945. The specified time for the incident was set on August 17, 1945. However, the information obtained can be widened to what really influenced the occurrence of the incident.

• Horizontal

The second is that it is horizontal. Where the analysis is carried out even though it is limited in time. However, the results obtained can be widened according to what has happened. Starting from events that affect these important events to the effects or impacts that have arisen from various sectors.

At this point usually an incident can occur due to the influence of economic, social, political as well as cultural aspects. Then when the incident actually occurs, of course there will be several aspects that are affected.

By using a synchronous thinking approach to an event that occurred in the past. You can get complete information starting from the factors that influenced an event to the impact that occurred when the event was over. You can get everything in full.

• Narrower study

Next is the characteristic of a narrower study. This means that you will only be limited by one time in one event when doing the analysis. Of course, this approach will also shorten your time and make it easier for you to do an analysis of past events.

An example is when there are two events that have occurred in the past at different times. Where one event occurs on one day and another event occurs with a duration of 7 days.

Of course, if you use a synchronous thinking approach. Then you will choose an analysis of an event that has occurred with a duration of one day.

• Serious and more difficult

Because there is a time limit in the analysis process carried out. So the analysis process as well as the results obtained can be assumed to be both more serious and more difficult. You will be able to do deeper analysis on only one event that occurs at a certain time.

Even the information you produce can cover all aspects from influence to being affected by events that have occurred in the past.

• Focus on the structure part

The focus on the synchronic thinking approach is on its structure. Where you will do an analysis starting from social structure, society, politics. Economy to culture.

Of course, the results of the analysis information will also be more complete. Apart from that, focusing on the structure will make it easier for you to understand events that happened in the past.

How to Approach Synchronic Thinking

In the synchronous thinking approach, it turns out that several ways are needed first so that you can make it easier to apply. Actually, you have learned this method since you were in elementary school. This method is 5W + 1H consisting of  What, Who, When, Why, Where and How.

Even so, so that you can better understand the use of 5W + 1H, the explanation below can help you more.

• What?

Using what or what will later make it easier for you to find out as a whole what happened to the past events that are being analyzed.

• Who ?

The use of who in the analysis of an event that occurred in the past will help you find out who was involved or took part in the incident.

• when ?

When or when this will help you find out when these past events occurred. This time is also one of the focal points of the synchronous thinking approach.

• why ?

Why or why will help you find out the causes of events that occurred in the past or you can also say what things can influence these events.

• Where?

Where will help you to find out the place or location of the event being analyzed.

• How?

How or how this will be able to help you find out the course of events that occurred in the past. This means that the process of the incident will be explained clearly in this how-to point.

Synchronic Thinking Approach Example

Judging from an event in 1950 to 1959 even though Indonesia was already independent. However, Indonesia’s economic situation entered into a bad condition.

The several aspects that influenced the occurrence of events in the past are as follows.

1. Agricultural products are the mainstay of export activities carried out by Indonesia.
2. The round table conference determined that Indonesia must bear the economic and financial burden.
3. At that time, the deficit that had to be borne by Indonesia was around Rp. 5.1 billion.
4. The Dutch government did not pass down enough values ​​to transform the colonial economic system into a national economic system.
5. The unstable domestic political situation made it easier for unplanned spending to occur.
6. The existing security in the country is not so profitable.
7. Domestic growth was so great at that time.

From the example questions or cases, an economic event that occurred in Indonesia from 1950 to 1959 can be analyzed using a synchronous thinking approach. Of course the results of the analysis carried out will be so easy to help in today’s life.

Synchronic Thinking Conclusion

The conclusion from the synchronic thinking approach to events that occurred in the past is an event analysis that focuses on one moment. Even though it has a focus on one time, the results of the analysis can widen from things that influenced the incident to things that were affected after the incident.

In this synchronous thinking approach, you can use the 5W + 1H implementation to make it easier to use.

Diachronic Thinking

As previously explained, the historical thinking approach can also be through diachronic thinking. Of course, the explanation related to diachronic thinking will be very different from synchronic thinking. To make it even clearer for you, here is a review of diachronic thinking.

Definition of Diachronic Thinking

Simply put, diachronic thinking is a way of analyzing several events that are interrelated and sequentially sequenced as they should. With a diachronic approach to events that occurred in the past, it will make it easier for you to find out every event related to a major event, of course the results will be based on time sequence.

The Meaning of Diachronic Thinking

With a diachronic thinking approach to an event, you can easily find out the sequential time sequence of every event that has occurred in the past. Of course these events must also be connected between one another.

Characteristics of Diachronic Thinking

Like the synchronic thinking approach, diachronic thinking also has several characteristics in it. There are at least 6 characteristics possessed by the diachronic thinking approach. So that it is also easier for you to understand what are the characteristics of the diachronic thinking approach.

The following is an explanation regarding some of the characteristics of the diachronic thinking approach.

• Vertical

The first feature of the diachronic thinking approach is that it is vertical. This means that every event related to a major event that is being analyzed will be sequenced sequentially with reference to the time of the incident.

• Emphasized on the duration of the incident

The diachronic thinking approach will study more if an event that occurred in the past is a time process.

• The scope is wider

Previously, the synchronous approach had a narrower scope. So the approach to diachronic thinking is the opposite or has a wider scope.

• Can provide a description of an incident

Because it has a wider scope, of course, the results obtained from the analysis process can also be said to be in the form of a fairly complete description. Now this is also one of the important points that can only be provided by the diachronic thinking approach when used in the process of analyzing an event in the past.

• Methods of checking the continuity of events

Because every event that is being analyzed will be emphasized in the time part. Then the analysis process that is being carried out can be one of the methods to check the continuity between one incident and another.

• There is a comparison

If the synchronous approach will not be able to get a comparison result. Then the results given by the visa diachronic thinking approach are in the form of a comparison. Comparison here can be a cause and effect of an event. Then it can also be like the triumph and fall of the event being analyzed.

 

Examples of Diachronic Thinking

An event of the proclamation that occurred in 1945 could not just happen. Of course there were several other events that could lead to the 1945 proclamation. Using a diachronic thinking approach can make it easier for you to find out what could have caused the 1945 proclamation to occur. This is the sequence that could make the 1945 proclamation happen.

1. On August 6, 1945, America bombed the city of Hiroshima. Hiroshima City is an important city in Japan.
2. Then on August 9, 1945, America bombed Nagasaki City. Nagasaki City is also one of the important cities in Japan.
3. On August 15, 1945, Japan surrendered to the American bloc.
4. On August 15, 1945, Sutan Syahrir learned the news of Japan’s surrender
5. On August 16, 1945, the Young Group forced Bung Karno to carry out Indonesian independence. This situation is known as the Rengasdengklok event.
6. On August 17, 1945, the text of the proclamation was read.

Diachronic Thinking Conclusion

The conclusion of diachronic thinking is an approach that can be taken in the analysis of past events where later the results obtained can be in the form of a time sequence between one event and other related events.

Of course, the results of the sequence of events will be arranged in a very orderly manner. Apart from that, as explained in the point about the characteristics of diachronic thinking, the results of the analysis will be wider and also more complete.

Meanwhile, the conclusion from the concept of historical thinking itself is an approach that can be used in the analysis of past events. However, the concept of historical thinking itself consists of two methods, namely the synchronic and diachronic approaches.

The two methods of thinking approach have been described above. Although they differ from one another, the two approaches are indeed very important and very useful for obtaining information on past events.

Although all explanations are related to the two methods of analysis approach to past events. But you also need to know history books that you can use as case studies. One of the recommended history books that you can buy at sinaumedia..com is a book entitled “The Origins of European Civilization and History” created by Amir Ubaidillah.

This book was just published in June 2021 yesterday. And for the publisher of the book “The Origin of Civilization and European History” was published by “C-KLICK MEDIA”. The book is sold at a price of Rp. 57,000.

The concept of chronological thinking – Learning history is one of the things that is so much fun. Even so, it turns out that there are many approaches to learning history to make it easier to understand the information extracted from these historical events. One of them is the approach by thinking chronologically.

Even experts also need a chronological thinking concept approach to get more precise or more precise and complete information. Maybe some of you still don’t really understand what the concept of chronological thinking is.

No need to worry about that anymore. Because you can get everything related to the concept of chronological thinking here. Without needing to hesitate anymore, let’s read the explanation below.

Definition of Chronological Thinking

Before entering a deeper explanation of the concept of chronological thinking. You can read about the meaning of chronological thinking. Because some people only know the word chronological thinking but don’t know the meaning of chronological thinking itself.

Chronology itself has a meaning as a knowledge of the time sequence of events that have occurred in the past sequentially. Simply put, chronological thinking is a way of thinking coherently in an event. So this concept is very important to use in an analysis of events that occurred in the past.

With the chronological thinking concept approach to the analysis of an event that occurred in the past, it will be easier to know the order of events in an orderly, coherent, and continuous manner as a whole.

Historians also use the concept of chronological thinking in analyzing a historical event. Because to know the sequence of events from the first to the end in sequence. Judging from this, it can be concluded that the chronological thinking approach is very important for the analysis of an event that has occurred in the past.

Chronological Thinking Concept Meaning

After you understand what the concept of chronological thinking means. Next, we will explain what it means to think chronologically. The meaning of chronological thinking is so that you can understand the sequence of events in detail without missing anything related to the events that have occurred.

This has also been explained in terms of chronological thinking. But by knowing the meaning of the concept of chronological thinking, you can better understand why you need to use this concept when analyzing an event that happened in the past.

Chronological Thinking Characteristics

The approach to thinking chronologically in events that occurred in the past turns out to have several characteristics in it, you know. By understanding what are the characteristics of chronological thinking, it will be easier for you to understand and apply the chronological thinking approach.

So what are the characteristics possessed by chronological thinking? The following are some of the characteristics possessed by the conological thinking approach in the analysis of an event that occurred in the past.

• Has a vertical character

The first feature is vertical, which at this point will refer to the sequence of events that have taken place. So later each event will be sorted from beginning to end to coherently.

• Emphasis on the duration of events

Next is the emphasis on the duration process. Where is the process of chronological thinking approach in studying if history or events in the past is a process of time.

• Has such a wide scope

In contrast to the synchronous thinking approach which has a narrower scope. In thinking chronologically the scope given is wider.

• Be able to describe an event

Every analysis of past events with a chronological thinking approach is able to provide results or information that is so complete because the scope that is carried out is also so wide.

• Able to check the continuity of events

By using a chronological thinking process approach for an event that occurred in the past, the information obtained can be in the form of a continuity between one event and a past event. Because in the analysis there will be an emphasis on the time of events between one another which are still related.

• There is a comparison

By carrying out a chronological thinking approach to past events, the results obtained can be in the form of comparisons. This comparison, among others, is like cause and effect or the glory and destruction of an event that occurred in the past.

Examples of Chronological Thinking

Even though you already understand the meaning of chronological thinking, its characteristics and meaning. So that you can more easily understand how the chronological thinking approach is applied in the analysis of events that occurred in the past.

Of course, several examples are needed in order to better understand how the results and also the process of analysis were carried out on past events with a chronological thinking approach. The following are some examples of the chronological thinking approach to the analysis of past events.

First example:

Quoted from the Ministry of Education and Culture of the Republic of Indonesia, the use of chronological thinking is a characteristic of historical thinking which focuses on a process where an event occurred in the past.

An example is the liberal democracy material from 1950 to 1959 which can be broken down lengthwise. In addition, it is also easier to obtain a chronological description of the formation of a liberal democratic government up to the Presidential Decree dated July 5, 1959.

In historical records, there were 7 cabinet changes from 1950 to 1959. The following is a record of cabinet changes in those years.

1. The Natsir Cabinet from 6 September 1950 to 21 March 1951
2. Sukiman Cabinet from 27 April 1951 to 3 April 1952
3. Wilopo Cabinet from 3 April 1952 to 3 July 1953
4. Cabinet of Ali Sastroamidjojo from 31 July 1953 to 12 August 1955
5. The Burhanuddin Harahap Cabinet from 12 August 1955 to 3 March 1956
6. Cabinet of Ali II from 20 March 1956 to 4 March 1957
7. Djuanda Cabinet from 9 April 1957 to 5 July 1959

From this example, it can be seen that there is a chronological thinking approach to the analysis of the events of Liberal Democracy from 1950 to the issuance of the Presidential Decree in 1959.

Second example:

The next example is the 1945 proclamation event could not happen directly. Certainly there were several other events that led to the 1945 proclamation. Of course, to find out which events led to the 1945 proclamation to occur, a chronological thinking approach is needed.

The description before the event of the proclamation is as follows.

1. On August 6, 1945, America bombed the city of Hiroshima. Hiroshima City is an important city in Japan.
2. Then on August 9, 1945, America bombed Nagasaki City. Nagasaki City is also one of the important cities in Japan.
3. On August 15, 1945, Japan surrendered to the American bloc.
4. On August 15, 1945, Sutan Syahrir learned the news of Japan’s surrender
5. On August 16, 1945, the Young Group forced Bung Karno to carry out Indonesian independence. This situation is known as the Rengasdengklok event.
6. On August 17, 1945, the text of the proclamation was read.

With the chronological thinking approach as in the example above. Of course, the results of the description of one event with other events that are mutually continuous will be easily known.

Third example:

The next example is in the post-World War II or WW2 events it is explained coherently if communism existed and was respected for about half a century. With this in mind, the world had to go through a cold war that could affect the political situation of many countries.

However, in just two years from 1989 to 1991 the world also witnessed the dissolution of the existing communist countries in Eastern Europe. This could also be a sign that the cold war was over and the collapse of the communist state.

Differences in Chronological and Synchronic Thinking

In studying history, there is a chronological thinking approach and a synchronic thinking approach. Previously you have read what is chronological thinking. However, this point will still be explained more briefly as material for comparison between chronological and synchronic thinking.

• Understanding

Starting from the previous understanding, chronological thinking is a way of analysis by ordering the time of events from beginning to end. Of course, every event that is sequenced in time has something to do with the big topic being discussed.

By using this chronological thinking concept, you can find out what made the event happen. Because it is impossible for an event to occur without several small events that occur before it.

Then for the concept of synchronic thinking itself is an analysis of an event that occurs at a certain time. If the chronological thinking approach has a widening concept. So in the analysis the synchronic approach is narrowing. Both are equally useful for analyzing past events.

Even historians use these two approaches to analyze a historical event that occurred in the past. Of course, the results obtained will also be more complete.

So you can use some of these approaches to analyze an event in the past.

• Characteristic features

After discussing the meaning of both. So the next comparison is on the characteristics of chronological thinking and synchronous thinking.

• The characteristics of chronological thinking

• Vertical
• The emphasis in the analysis process is emphasized on the duration or time of events that are interconnected
• The scope obtained from the analysis with the chronological approach is wider than the synchronic approach.
• Analysis on one event can be described more clearly
• Doing research from one event to another. Of course, each of these events has a relationship
• There is a concept of comparison

• Synchronic thinking features

• Horizontal
• In contrast to chronological thinking, synchronic thinking does not have a comparison in it
• The study is conducted only on events that occur at a certain time
• The scope of the synchronous thinking approach is narrower than the chronological thinking approach
• The resulting study will be more structured
• Besides being structured, the synchronous thinking approach to an analysis of past events is also more systematic
• The study carried out is arguably more in-depth and serious

• Objective

Finally, the difference between chronological and synchronic thinking is seen from the purpose of the approach taken to an event that occurred in the past. Starting from chronological thinking which has the goal of being able to think chronologically or sequentially from one event to another based on interconnected time.

Meanwhile, the purpose of synchronic thinking is to make people aware of all the changes that have occurred over events in the past. Although both have fundamental differences.

But in the analysis of an event that occurred in the past will be more helpful. Both during the process and the results obtained after carrying out the process.

Conclusion from chronological thinking

Previously you have read related to the discussion of chronological thinking. Starting from the definition, characteristics, meaning to examples. In addition, you have also read an explanation related to the comparison of chronological and synchronous thinking.

Entering the last discussion is in the conclusion section. The concept of chronological thinking is a method of analyzing events that occurred in the past with an emphasis on time.

This means that the time from one event to another that has occurred in the past that are interconnected will be sequenced sequentially. In the process of analysis there will also be a comparison in it.

The scope of the analysis results with the help of a chronological thinking approach will also be wider in scope. Of course, with a chronological thinking approach, people will also have thoughts in a coherent and orderly manner every time they do an analysis.

That’s complete information related to chronological thinking, starting from understanding to conclusions, you can read everything. If you need a history book so you can more easily apply the chronological thinking concept approach.

 

Matrices have various operations such as addition, subtraction, and multiplication. These operations use their own way. This is caused by the arrangement of numbers in the matrix which is different from other mathematical operations.

The following is an explanation of the addition operation on the matrix and examples of questions to support the You learning process.

Overview of the Matrix

A matrix is ​​an arrangement of numbers, symbols or expressions arranged in columns and rows to form a rectangular shape. As an initial description of the matrix, You can listen to the example of a 2 x 3 matrix below.

The size of the matrix is ​​determined by the number of rows and columns it has. A matrix with m columns and n rows is called an m x n matrix, where m and n are called by their dimensions. For example, the matrix above is called a 2 x 3 matrix. This is because the matrix consists of 2 rows and 3 columns.

A matrix with the same number of rows and columns is called a square matrix. The matrix with the number of one row is called a row vector. Meanwhile, a matrix with one column is called a column vector.

An infinite matrix is ​​a matrix with an unlimited number of rows or columns (or both). In some contexts, matrices considered without rows or columns are called empty matrices.

For further explanation, You can listen to the image below.

Row m is horizontal and column n is vertical. Each element of the matrix is ​​often denoted by a variable of two index notations. For example, a _2,1 represents the elements in the second row and first column of matrix A.

Each object in the matrix A with dimension m x n is often denoted by a _i,j. Which is the maximum value i = m and the maximum value j = n. The objects in the matrix are called elements, entries or members of the matrix.

If two matrices have the same dimensions (each matrix has the same number of rows and columns), then the two matrices can be added or subtracted element by element. However, based on the rules of matrix multiplication, the conditions for matrix multiplication, namely when the number of columns of the first matrix is ​​equal to the number of rows of the second matrix in the multiplication of two matrices.

That is, multiplying an m x n matrix by an n x p matrix results in an m x p matrix . Therefore, matrix multiplication is not commutative. In general, matrices are used to represent linear transformations, that is, a generalization of linear functions such as f ( x ) = 4 x.

For example, the effect of rotation in three-dimensional space is a linear transformation denoted by the matrix R. If v is a vector in three dimensions, the result R _v represents the position of the point after it is rotated.

The matrix can be applied in various cyan fields. For example in physics in the form of classical mechanics, optics, and quantum mechanics. Matrices are also used to study physical states, such as the motion of planets. In the field of computer graphics, matrices are applied to manipulate 3D models and project them onto a two-dimensional screen.

In the field of probability theory and statistics, matrices are used as an explanation of state probabilities. As in the pagerank algorithm in determining the order of disbursement pages on Google. The matrix calculus generalizes the classical analytic form of literal and exponential to higher dimensions. Matrices are also applied in economics to describe relational economic systems.

Matrix Functions in Everyday Life

Even though matrix operations look difficult, they have many benefits to make human work easier in everyday life. Here are some of the benefits of studying matrices in everyday life.

• Assist engineers in solving problems with many variables.
• Matrix can also be used to create reports and journals.
• Solving a system of linear equations, geometric transformations, determining television broadcast schedules, and computer programming.
• Helps analyze economic problems that have various kinds of variables.
• As a way to analyze in statistics, education, science, economics, and technology.
• Help find solutions to investigation operations, for example natural resource investigation operations (coal, petroleum, and so on).

Matrix Addition Concept

The addition operation on matrices can only be performed when the order of the matrices in the operation is the same. The sum of two matrices A = and B = is a new matrix C = of the same order, that is, its elements are the result of the addition or subtraction of the elements of matrices A and B.

The following is the concept or operating formula for matrix addition.

The properties of the matrix addition operation are as follows.

1. Commutative properties
A + B = B = A

2. Associative nature
(A + B) + C = A + (B + C) = A + B + C

The null matrix is ​​a summation identity matrix so it applies:
A + 0 = 0 + A = A

The identity matrix in the arithmetic operation of addition matrix –A.
A + (-A) = (-A) + A = 0

In order to better understand matrix addition, You can listen to the following example questions.

Calculate A + B, if you know matrices A and B as follows.

Answer:

Transpose, Determinant, and Matrix Inverse

1. Transpose the Matrix

Transpose matrix is ​​a matrix that is operated by exchanging row elements into columns and column elements into rows from the initial matrix. The notation of the transpose matrix is ​​usually with ^AT .

The transpose operation only occurs with matrices and vectors. In a scalar there is no transpose operation because it only consists of one row and one column. This causes the scalar value to be equal to the transpose of the scalar.

Transpose matrix has several properties, including the following.

• (AT) ^T = A
• (A + B) ^T = A ^T + B ^T
• (A – B) ^T = A ^T – B ^T
• (kA) ^T = kAT ^where k is a constant
• (AB) ^T = B ^T A ^T

In order to better understand the transpose matrix, You can listen to the example below.

2. Matrix Determinants

The determinant is a value that is calculated through the elements of a matrix similar in shape to a square. The symbol for the determinant of matrix A is det (A), det A, or |A|. A square matrix is ​​a matrix that has the same number of rows and columns.

If the number of rows and columns is different then the determinant cannot be found. Keep in mind that the basic theory of matrices is the addition of columns in a table or subtracting, multiplying, or dividing the values ​​in a column.

The determinant has certain distinctive properties such as in a matrix A and B of order n x n as follows.

• |AB| = |A| |B|
• |AT| = |A|. The symbol T is a matrix transpose.
• |A-1| = 1/|A| or also known as matrix inverse.
• |kA| = kn|A|. K is a real number and n is the order of matrix A.
• If in a matrix all elements, both rows and columns, are 0, then the determinant value is also 0.
• If the two rows or columns in the matrix are the same or multiples, then the determinant value is 0.

In order to better understand the determinant of matrices, You can listen to the following examples of determinants.

a. Determine the determinant value of the matrix of order 2 x 2 below.

b. Determine the determinant value of the matrix of order 3 x 3 below.

sec(A) = 1.1.2 + 2.4.3 + 3.2.1 – 3.1.3 – 1.4.1 – 2.2.2

= 2 + 24 + 6 – 9 – 4 – 8

= 11

3. Inverse Matrix

Inverse means the opposite. Meanwhile, the inverse matrix is ​​the opposite of a matrix. If the matrix is ​​multiplied by the inverse it will become an identity matrix. The matrix inverse is denoted by A ^-1 . The terms of the matrix inverse, namely the determinant value of the matrix is ​​not equal to zero.

Determination of the inverse of a matrix has two rules or ways based on the order. The following details how to determine the inverse.

a. Inverse Matrix Based on Order 2 x 2

The inverse matrix of order 2 x 2 can be found in the following way.

To better understand the inverse matrix of order 2 x 2, You can listen to the following problem.

b. Inverse Matrix Based on Order 3 x 3

The inverse matrix of order 3 x 3 can be found by the Gauss Jordan elimination method. The system can be stated as follows.

The square matrix A is eliminated by means of algebraic operations to form an identity matrix. If matrix A has become an identity matrix, it will turn into the inverse of matrix A.

To better understand the inverse matrix of order 3 x 3, You can listen to the following problem.

Example of a Matrix Problem and its Solution

To better understand the matrix, You can listen to some of the matrix problems and their solutions below.

1. Determine the value of x + y from the matrix below.

Answer:

When you know an equation in the matrix, what you can do is solve it step by step.

From the matrix operations and matrix similarities above, several equations can be found between them as follows.

So the value of x + y is 23.

2. It is known that matrices A and B are as follows.

If A + B = C, then determine the inverse matrix C!

Answer:

3. The matrices A and B are known as below.

If C = AB, then determine the value of the inverse matrix C!

Answer:

4. The travel agent “Lombok Charming” offers travel packages as shown in the table below.

	Package I	Package II
Rent hotels	5	6
Tourist attraction	4	5
total cost	3,100,000	3,000,000

The appropriate matrix form for determining the cost of renting a hotel each night and the cost of one tourist attraction is…

Answer:

For example, hotel rental = x and tourist attractions = y, then the table above can be presented in matrix form, more or less like the following.

To get x and y values ​​in the matrix equation, you can use the matrix inverse as follows.

5. Determine the determinant of matrix (A + B) ² from matrix A and matrix B as follows.

Answer:

By applying the rules of matrix multiplication and matrix determinant |A ⁿ |=|A| ⁿ will then be obtained.

So, the determinant of matrix (A + B) ² is 0.

6. If matrix A = then the value of A ² – 2A + I is…

Answer:

By using the matrix multiplication rule can be obtained as follows.

7. The inverse matrix A is known as follows.

How many x matrices satisfy the relationship:

Answer:

By applying one of the properties of matrix A . A ^-1 = I so it can be written as follows.

8. Determine the determinant of A ^T A + BB ^T from the following two matrices.

Answer:

So, the value of A ^T A + BB ^T = 5

9. Determine matrix A from the product of the following matrices.

Answer:

10. Determine the inverse of matrix X that satisfies the following equation.

Answer:

By applying the properties of the matrix A . B = C then B = A ^-1 . C, then the following equation is obtained.

Characteristics of a Liberal Democracy – Liberal democracy is the political system used by most modern European countries. Before becoming the Unitary State of the Republic of Indonesia as it is today, you need to know that the Indonesian state has also used a liberal democratic political system.

Based on historical records, it turns out that the Indonesian state was once led not by a president as it is now. In a country, we often recognize the terms head of government and head of state. However, of course you have also heard of the term Prime Minister, right?

In the early period of independence until entering guided democracy or more precisely in 1950 to 1959, the Indonesian state adopted a system of government known as liberal democracy.

So, in this article, we will present a discussion of liberal democracy, starting from the characteristics of liberal democracy, its meaning, strengths and weaknesses, and its cabinet. Let’s see more!

The difference between the Head of Government and the Head of State

Before entering into a discussion of the characteristics of liberal democracy. We need to know that the term for head of government and head of state in Indonesia is currently held by a President.

The head of state is basically a figure who is a representative of a country for interests at the domestic and international levels. In addition, a head of state also has a very important role because he is a representative of a country being led.

However, in many other countries, the position of head of state is not only occupied by a president. For example, in several countries that adopt a monarchy or royal system (Saudi Arabia, England), the head of state will be occupied by a king.

In contrast to the head of state, the head of government is a position that has the responsibility to lead the running of a country’s government. In a country that adheres to a parliamentary system, the head of government is held by a person called the prime minister.

In Indonesia itself, the head of government during the liberal democracy era was led by a prime minister. So, as part of learning the history of citizenship education, it is certainly important for the younger generation to know what happened in the past.

What Is Liberal Democracy?

Liberal democracy basically means democracy that departs from individual rights. This means that every citizen or individual becomes the ruling party in this democratic system. Those in power have the same rights regardless of their ethnic origin or religion.

Meanwhile, another understanding says that liberal democracy is a political system that protects individual rights from government power in a constitutional way. This makes the decision of the majority to determine the determination of government policies that are subject to restrictions.

According to Robert Dahl, liberal democracy has two important concepts that need to be known. The two concepts include contestation and participation. Contestation itself means a debate or objection that can be realized with the right to form parties and freedom of the press.

Freedom of the Press as a Result of Liberal Democracy

As previously stated, freedom in a liberal democracy has resulted in many parties being formed. This freedom is also an opportunity for each party to accommodate aspirations that are often different from one individual to another. The existence of differences in political views that are accommodated is one of the triggers for the emergence of contestation.

When the Indonesian state embraced liberal democracy, the culture of contestation seemed very strong. This is very visible when there is a fairly dynamic cabinet change. Within 9 years of liberal democracy, there have been 7 cabinets that have ruled.

Robert Dahl himself understands the concept of participation can be realized through general elections. The general election itself must be held in a fair and equitable manner so that all citizens who have voting rights can participate. There were around 172 parties that competed in the 1955 election.

Characteristics of Liberal Democracy

After knowing the meaning and history of liberal democracy, the next discussion is the characteristics of liberal democracy. The following are certain characteristics possessed by a liberal democratic system, including:

1. Political participation that can be followed by all levels of society

The liberal democratic system provides freedom for all individuals to be able to participate in politics without discriminating against race, religion, or ethnic origin. The emergence of various groups or groups of people who took part is an illustration of the various parties that competed in the 1955 election (Indonesia’s first election).

The first general election ever held by Indonesia was attended by various participants. In fact, not only parties participate, there are those who participate in elections as individuals. The 1995 election itself was followed by parties, such as the Indonesian Communist Party (PKI), Indonesian Socialist Party (PSI), Murba, Young Communist Forces (Acoma), to R. Soedjono Prawirosoedarso.

2. Voting through elections in a certain period in secret

The next feature of liberal democracy is voting in elections which are carried out in a certain period in secret. In a liberal democracy, voting is something that is very important because elections are the path that must be taken by political participants to win seats in government.

3. Facilitation of individual freedom

One of the values ​​that must exist in liberalism is individual freedom. Therefore, a liberal system cannot be embedded if individual freedom is eliminated. One way that is commonly used to implement individual freedom is by channeling thoughts through affiliation with certain politics.

In the implementation of liberal democracy, it is possible to have political parties with a large number. The history of Indonesia itself has recorded that there were several parties based on the religion of Islam, including Masyumi, Nahdlatul Ulama, the Indonesian Islamic Syarikat Party, and the Indonesian Tarbiyah Movement. There are 4 parties for the Muslim community, of course it is proof that one of the values ​​that must exist in a liberal democracy is that individual freedom must be facilitated.

4. A government that can form laws in accordance with a majority vote in parliament

When Indonesia adopted a guided democracy system of government, the head of government was held by a prime minister. The prime minister here is a representative of the party winning the majority of votes or it can be said the party winning the election. Meanwhile, when entering the liberal democracy era, there were many policy changes.

Some of the policy changes that have taken place are understandable. This can be seen from the frequent changes of cabinet during that era. Within 9 years of liberal democracy, there have been 7 cabinet changes.

5. Limited government power

One of the most visible characteristics of a liberal democracy is the limited powers of the government. One of the reasons for the government’s power to be limited is as an effort to prevent a government that is only controlled by one particular group. This is important in a liberal democracy so that the check and balance mechanism remains in effect in a government in power.

Advantages and Disadvantages of Liberal Democracy

Of all the existing government systems, it must be recognized that no system is perfect. Each system has its own advantages, as well as the disadvantages of the government system adopted. This applies to the liberal democratic government system that is widely adopted by various countries. The following are some of the advantages and disadvantages of a liberal democratic system that you need to know, including:

1. Advantages of Liberal Democracy

• Liberal democracy accommodates various different views that occur at the grassroots level, for example all citizens can form their own parties.
• The power of a liberal democratic government has limitations so that it is easier to supervise.

2. Lack of Liberal Democracy

• The political climate of a liberal democracy is not always good when there are too many parties.
• In accordance with what happened when the Indonesian state used a liberal democratic system, political parties were more focused on maintaining power than thinking about a policy that had a good impact on the nation and state. A country must always maintain its stability. However, there are often ideological differences that arise in many political parties, which hinder policy making, such as laws and so on.

The Governing Cabinet In Times Of Liberal Democracy

After learning about the definition and characteristics of liberal democracy, in the following, we will continue with a discussion of the cabinet that ruled during the liberal democracy era.

It should be noted that when entering the post-1998 reform era, Indonesia was led by several cabinets, namely the Gotong Royong Cabinet and the United Indonesia Cabinet. The use of the name of the post-reform cabinet is different from that during the liberal democracy. Several cabinets that ruled Indonesia during a liberal democracy used the name of the Prime Minister as the name of their cabinet.

1. The Natsir Cabinet (6 September 1950 – 21 March 1951)

The first cabinet to rule in the era of liberal democracy was the Natsir cabinet. The cabinet that has been in power for less than a year must end its term after being granted a vote of no confidence.

During his cabinet leadership, Natsir, who came from the Masyumi Party, made one of the most well-known policies in history, namely that Indonesia registered itself to become a member of the United Nations. Not only that, Natsir also issued an economic policy called the Benteng Program. The Benteng program itself is aimed at local entrepreneurs so they can be more advanced.

Apart from that, Natsir’s cabinet was the first party to try to hold general elections. Even though in the end his leadership period had to end before the election could take place.

2. Sukiman Cabinet (27 April 1951- 3 April 1952)

In the history of liberal democracy in Indonesia, the Masyumi party has occupied the highest seat in parliament three times and formed a cabinet. This cabinet that has been in power for almost a full year is the second cabinet that has succeeded in leading Indonesia in the era of liberal democracy.

Each cabinet has its own focus in issuing policies. In the Sukiman cabinet, several policies were born, such as standardization of minimum wages, establishment of labor union regulations, and holiday allowances (THR).

3. Wilopo Cabinet (3 April 1952 – 3 June 1953)

After the Masyumi party came to power twice in a row, the Wilopo Cabinet, which came from the Indonesian National Party, finally won the lead so that it is entitled to occupy the highest seat in the parliament.

This cabinet, which has been in power for two months longer than the Sukiman Cabinet, issued the same policy as the previous cabinet, namely efforts to prepare for Indonesia’s first general election. However, his fate was no different from that of his predecessor cabinet, which failed to hold elections because it had to end first through a vote of no confidence.

4. Ali Sastroamidjojo I Cabinet (31 July 1953 – 12 August 1955)

After the failure of the Wilopo Cabinet, the Indonesian National Party again managed to lead a cabinet with a new name, namely the Ali Sastroamidjojo Cabinet. During Ali Sastroamidjojo’s leadership, Indonesia successfully hosted the first Asian-African Conference (KAA) which was located in Bandung.

It didn’t stop there, Ali Sastroamidjojo’s cabinet also issued a policy known as the Ali Baba Economic System. This program that focuses on the economy has the goal of creating local entrepreneurs through organizing training to granting credit and import permits.

5. Burhanuddin Harahap Cabinet (12 August 1955 – 3 March 1956)

The cabinet that ruled during the next liberal democracy was the Burhanuddin Harahap Cabinet. This cabinet, which came from Masyumi, was the only cabinet that was not disbanded due to a vote of no confidence by the existing party factions.

One of the great achievements ever made by the Burhanuddin Harahap Cabinet was the successful holding of elections and handing over the reins of power to the winner of the election. In the first 1955 elections in Indonesia, the Indonesian National Party won.

6. Cabinet of Ali Sastroamidjojo II (20 March 1956 – 4 March 1957)

As the party that won the 1955 election, the Indonesian National Party has the right to form a cabinet to run its government. Ali Sastroamidjojo returned to represent the PNI as Prime Minister. In this second term of leadership, Ali Sastro did something that could be said to be brave. The Ali Sastro Cabinet decided to cancel the contents of the Round Table Conference (KMB) as a form of protest against the Dutch.

Although elected through a general election mechanism, this second Ali Sastro cabinet eventually had to end its term of office like its predecessor cabinet. The Ali Sastroamidjojo cabinet, which has been in power for more than a year, again faced a motion of no confidence.

7. Djuanda Cabinet (9 April 1957 – 5 July 1959)

Djuanda’s cabinet became the last cabinet in the liberal democracy era. Djuanda himself served on the basis of obtaining a mandate from President Soekarno. The cabinet that has been in power for the longest time during this liberal democracy has had several extraordinary achievements, including the issuance of the Djuanda Declaration.

The Djuanda Declaration itself was issued as a form of establishing the territorial boundaries of Indonesia’s seas. The end of Djuanda’s cabinet leadership came when President Soekarno issued a presidential decree. This decree also marked the end of liberal democracy in Indonesia.

Closing

The era of liberal democracy has long passed, many of the figures who filled it have long preceded us. As the younger generation who will continue the baton of their predecessors, of course we must recognize an important chapter in the history of our country.

Those are some discussions of liberal democracy, such as the definition of liberal democracy, the characteristics of liberal democracy, the advantages and disadvantages of liberal democracy. Hopefully all the discussion above can add insight as well as be useful for Sinaumed’s.

For Sinaumed’s who want to know more deeply about the characteristics of liberal democracy, they can read related books by visiting sinaumedia.com . To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

The Boundary of the Americas – The Americas are one of the continents in the western part of the earth. Where this one continent is often divided into two sub-continents, namely North America and South America. However, in general the Americas are one continent as a whole. The total area of ​​the Americas is 42,549,000, with an estimated population of 965 million. Based on its position on the map, the geographical location of the American continent is surrounded by three oceans, namely the Arctic Ocean to the north, the Atlantic Ocean to the east, and the Pacific Ocean to the west and south. America can be divided into several regions, namely North America, Central America, the Caribbean Islands, and also South America.

Meanwhile, based on its position according to longitude and latitude, the astronomical location of the Americas is at 83°N–55°S and 10°W–170°W. The American continent stretches from the northern hemisphere to the southern hemisphere and its entire territory is in the western hemisphere. The American continent also has a border area with the surrounding area, both in the north, west and south. In brief, these are some of the vast boundaries of the Americas.

– North side : Arctic Ocean
– East side : Atlantic Ocean
– West side : Pacific Ocean
– South side : Pacific Ocean, Antarctic Ocean

America’s Boundary

Below we will discuss in more detail about the boundaries of the American continent, be it from land boundaries or water boundaries to the north, east, west, and south.

1. North side

To the north, the American continent is bordered by the waters of the Arctic Ocean which is close to the North Pole.

2. East side

Then to the east, the American continent is bordered by the waters of the Atlantic Ocean which separates the Americas from the continent of Europe.

3. West side

To the west, the Americas are bordered by the waters of the Pacific Ocean which separates the Americas and Oceania and the Asian continent to the west.

4. South side

To the south, the Americas are bordered by the Pacific Ocean or the Antarctic Ocean. The two oceans do not have clear water boundaries in the south, because the Antarctic Ocean is a confluence of three oceans namely the Pacific, Atlantic and Indian Oceans.

It should be noted that the area of ​​the Americas itself reaches 41,825,581 square kilometers and places it as the second largest continent after Asia. Quoting from the Ministry of Education and Culture’s Learning Resources site, the astronomical location of the Americas is between 35 degrees West Longitude – 170 West Longitude and 83 degrees North Latitude (LU) – 55 degrees South Latitude (LS).

Meanwhile, in terms of geographical location, the Americas are located in the western hemisphere. Where the Americas are located between the Atlantic Ocean and the Pacific Ocean. This continent is also flanked by the waters of the Arctic Ocean and the Pacific Ocean. Based on its territorial division, the Americas are divided into North America, Central America and South America which are home to 35 countries. The North and South American territories are connected by the Isthmus of Panama.

The Influence of the Astronomical Position of the Americas

There are several influences related to the astronomical location of the Americas as seen from the position of latitude and longitude. The following are some of the impacts and also the influence of the astronomical location of the Americas and their explanations.

1. Climate Conditions of the Americas

This area of ​​the American continent has a different climate according to the location of the region. On this one continent there are four climates.

a. Polar climate

Regions with arctic climates have relatively long winters and very short summers. This polar climate exists in the northernmost region of the Americas.

b. Subtropical climate

In this climate, there are four seasons, namely winter, spring, summer, and autumn. Regions that experience this climate are in the southern region and also the northernmost region.

c. Tropical climate

This climate brings high rainfall and humidity and hot temperatures throughout the year. Regions that experience this tropical climate include Central America and South America.

d. Desert Climate

Regions that have a desert climate often experience temperature changes in a very fast tempo and have low rainfall. This desert climate covers the areas that are behind the mountains in the Americas.

2. Natural Conditions of the Americas

The natural conditions in North America, Central America and South America have different characteristics. This causes the landscape conditions of the Americas to have high variations. The North American region has complex mountains which are a series of Rocky Mountains. This mountain range consists of the Cascade Mountains, the Western Sierra Madre Mountains, and also the Sierra Madre Nevada. There is also the Grand Canyon as the widest and also the largest canyon in the world which was formed by the flow of the Colorado River.

Meanwhile, in South America, there are the Andes Mountains which have the highest peak on Mount Aconcagua, which is 6,959 meters above sea level. There are also the Guayana Plateau, the Patagonia Plateau, and the Brazilian Plateau which supply springs for major rivers such as the Amazon River. The lowland itself is very fertile and one of them is the vast Amazon Forest. It is different from the natural conditions in Central America, which are quite complicated and geologically irregular. The Central American region is dominated by plateau plains and mountains with the Mexican Plateau being quite popular.

To the south, are the Isthmus of Panama and the Isthmus of Tehuantepec. On the Isthmus of Panama, a canal was made that connected the Atlantic Ocean and the Pacific Ocean. It is also known as the Panama Canal.

3. Biodiversity

The American continent has some biodiversity, namely in the form of flora and fauna, especially those in the South American region. There is some natural diversity such as tropical rain forests, deserts, and also tundra caused by its astronomical and geographical location.

4. Time Zone

There are several time zones in the Americas, including the outer islands of countries in the Americas, including:

– UTC-12, covers the outer islands of the United States.
– UTC-11, covers the territory of American Samoa, the outer islands of the United States.
– UTC-10, covering Hawaii (US) (Hawaii Time Zone).
– UTC-9, covering Alaska (US) (Alaska Time Zone).
– UTC-8, covers Canada, Mexico & United States (Pacific Time Zone),
– UTC-7, covers Canada, Mexico & United States (Mountain Time Zone).
– UTC-6, includes Chile, Ecuador, Honduras, Costa Rica, El Salvador, Guatemala, Nicaragua, Belize, Mexico, Canada & the United States (Central Time Zone).
– UTC-5, includes Colombia, Ecuador, Jamaica, Panama, Bahamas, Haiti, Peru, Cuba, Canada & United States (Eastern Time Zone).
– UTC-4.30, covering Venezuela.
– UTC-4, includes Brazil, Paraguay, Bolivia, Chile, Barbados, Aruba, Bermuda, Dominica, Guyana, Guadaloupe, Antigua & Barbuda, Saint Kitts & Nevis, Trinidad & Tobago, Saint Lucia, Canada & United States (Atlantic Time Zone ).
– UTC-3, includes Brazil, Uruguay, Argentina, Suriname.
– UTC-2, includes Brazil.

5. The Condition of the Residents of the Americas

Quoting from the IPS Module published by the Ministry of Education and Culture in 2022, the Americas are inhabited by more than 1 billion people as of 2016. There are two residents there, namely indigenous people and immigrant residents. The original inhabitants of the Americas are the Eskimos and Indians, whose ancestors are traced back to the Mongols. Compared to the original inhabitants, immigrants from outside who have come in waves since several centuries ago, including also from Europe, are more dominant in the Americas. However, mixing also occurs there.

Immigrants or immigrants in the Americas are divided into four major groups, namely the Mongols or yellow skin, Negro people or black skin, European people or white skin, and also Egyptian people. Therefore, there are many ethnic groups that until now inhabit the Americas. For example, from these ethnic groups, namely Cheyenne, Comanche, Sioux, Navajo, Pueblo, Cherokee, Iroquois, Mulato, Creole, and also Huron.

6. Landscapes

The Americas have different landscape conditions and are divided into North America, Central America, and also South America. These natural conditions cause differences in landscapes such as mountains, animals, and also rivers.

a. North America

North America stretches from Alaska in the north to Mexico in the south. The climate in the northern region tends to be colder compared to other parts of the American continent. The famous mountains in North America are the Rocky Mountains which consist of the Cascade, the Western Sierra Madre Mountains, and the Sierra Madre Nevada. While the broad valley area that is quite famous in North America is the Grand Canyon.

On the North American continent, a number of long rivers flow which form the border between Mexico and the United States. Where the rivers include the Mississippi River, Missouri River, Colorado River, Arkansas River, and Rio Grande River.

b. Central America

Central America consists of mountains and plains up to 2,500 meters high. In the southern part of Central America, there is a canal that connects the Pacific Ocean with the Atlantic Ocean.

c. South America

South America has mountains, plateaus, lowlands, and also rivers. The Andes Mountains are the highest mountains in the Americas with a peak reaching 6,959 meters above sea level. Then in the southern part of the Americas, there is a large river, namely the Amazon river. The river flows into several tributaries covered by the Amazon jungle. This Amazon forest has a variety of flora and fauna because it is in a tropical climate. Examples of animals that live in the tropical climate of America are bison, alligators, bears, lamas, jaguars, cougars, monkeys, lizards, snakes, and many more.

Characteristics of the Americas

Every continent in the world certainly has its own characteristics, and the Americas are no exception. The following are some of the characteristics of the Americas, including:

1. Physical Characteristics

In general, the Americas are divided into two regions, namely North and South America. Even though both are in the Americas, the two regions have different climates. The climate in North America is subarctic climate, while in the south it looks a bit tropical. South America has two climates, namely the northern part with tropical climate and the remaining part with cold climate.

The climate division also affects the distribution of flora and fauna. This is due to the existence of diverse landscapes. Brazil has tropical rain forests and the Amazon River, so that it is inhabited by various kinds of plants and animals. While in North America there are grasslands that can be used for agriculture.

2. Socio-Cultural Characteristics

When Columbus discovered the Americas and called it the New World, which indicated that a narrow understanding of looking at the world, where this world was not only limited to the European continent. Increasingly, America is not only inhabited by Europeans. But also Asian and African people also came to America. Thus, there was an encounter between various tribes, races, ethnicities, and religions in every region of the Americas.

These meetings created an increasingly diverse American population. This certainly has an impact on social and cultural life. A person or group who comes from outside the Americas does not only come with a body, but also with a different social and cultural background. This has made America have diverse social and cultural positions that have survived to this day.

In its socio-cultural development, the Americas also experienced assimilation which gave birth to a new culture. These variations take the form of religion, art, race, and so on. For example, in South America, North America the dominant use of English. However, in South America they prefer to use Portuguese or Spanish.

Meanwhile, religions that are developing in the Americas include:

– Catholicism, many residents of Central America and South America.
– Protestant Christianity, widely adhered to by the population of North America.
– Islam is the religion of many people of Arab, Malay and Negro descent.
– Judaism, many American residents of Jewish descent.
– Hinduism, many Americans of Indian, Nepalese and Sri Lankan descent adhere to it.
– Buddhism, Taoism, Confucianism and Shinto are widely followed by people of Chinese, Japanese, Korean and Indo-Chinese descent.
– Anglican Christianity, many people of British descent.

3. Economic Characteristics

The Americas have a distinctive economic pattern when viewed from the size of its area, the variety of landscapes, and also geopolitical influences. The economy in the Americas has advantages, namely in the field of trade. This is because some of the countries with the largest economies in the world, including those in the G20, are part of the Americas.

In the Americas alone there are five countries that are officially listed on the G20 website. Among them are Argentina, Brazil, Canada, Mexico, and the United States. The economic activities in the Americas are also supported by the strength of the United States as the most influential country in the world. Countries in the Americas do not only rely on trade, but also trade. Countries in Latin America such as the United States, Venezuela, and others rely on petroleum as a mainstay commodity. There are also several countries that use mineral mining as an economic driver.

This is an explanation of the vast boundaries of the Americas and the influence of astronomical and geographical location on natural conditions, climate, population, and socio-culture. For Sinaumed’s who want to learn all about the vast boundaries of other continents, you can visit sinaumedia.com to get related books. As #FriendsWithoutLimits, sinaumedia always provides the best products, so you have the best and latest information for you. To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

The Book of Safinatun Najah – Basically, all Muslims in this world are required to study fiqh which contains knowledge of legal issues that regulate daily life in Islamic law. In the science of jurisprudence, we do not only study how to worship properly, but also with regard to buying and selling systems, and so on. Well, one of the books that contains the science of fiqh is the book Safinatun Najah which was written by a scholar from Yemen based on the Shafi’i school of thought. If You doesn’t know the form and content of the Safinatun Najah book, that’s okay , because we will study it in this article.

The author of the book Safinatun Najah is Sheikh Salim bin Abdullah bin Sa’ad bin Sumair Al Hadhrami who succeeded in summarizing the laws in jurisprudence clearly and of course using language that is easy to understand. That is why, this book is often intended for novice students at Islamic boarding schools. Just a little trivia , Syekh Salim bin Abdullah died in Jakarta in the 13th century H. So, what is the Safinatun Najah book? What are the contents contained in the book? So, so that You understands these things, let’s look at the following review!

What is the Safinatun Najah Book?

The Book of Safinatun Najah or which has the full name as Safinatun Najah Fiima Yajibu ala Abdi li Maulah, which means ‘ The Boat of Safety in Studying the Obligations of a Servant to His Lord ‘. Well, basically, the book of Safinatun Najah is a book that contains the basics of fiqh written according to the Shafi’i school of thought. The author of this book is Sheikh Salim bin Abdullah bin Sa’ad bin Sumair Al Hadhrami who is a scholar from Yemen. He succeeded in writing this book in a language that was easy to understand, so that it is often used as a reference for studying jurisprudence, especially by novice students.

However, even though it is considered concise, the book of Safinatun Najah still covers various kinds of basics of jurisprudence, you know… Starting from the signs of puberty, the correct method of ablution, what are the pillars of Islam, how to take a mandatory bath, how to pray correctly, when to pray prayer, fasting worship, zakat worship, and how to dismantle the body.

There are 3 total divisions in the book of Safinatun Najah. The first part contains the basic Islamic aqidah which includes the pillars of faith, the pillars of Islam, and the creed. Apart from that, it also explains the characteristics of a person who is mature and how to perform ablution to avoid being unclean.

Furthermore, in the second part, it will contain the method of obligatory bathing, the legal requirements for ablution, and what is forbidden for people who have hadada. In this second part, it also explains about tayammum, zakat worship, to the management of the corpse. Then, the third part will contain matters related to fasting, starting from the requirements of fasting, the pillars of fasting, to the pilgrimage.

Contents of the Safinatun Najah Book

Previously, it was explained that in the book of Safinatun Najah there are 3 sections, each of which explains Islamic beliefs. Well, here is a description which is accompanied by no Arabic language, only Latin.

CHAPTER I INTRODUCTION: Pillars of Islam and Pillars of Faith

In the name of Allah, the Most Gracious, the Most Merciful

All praise is only for Allah, the Lord of the worlds, and to Him we seek help in all matters of this world and the hereafter. And shalawat and greetings may always be poured out on the great Prophet Muhammad SAW The closing of the prophets, also to family and friends. And there is no effort except with the help of Allah, the Most High, the Most Mighty.

Discussion 1: Pillars of Islam

There are five pillars of Islam, namely:

1. Testify that there is no god but Allah Subhanahu wa Ta’ala and Prophet Muhammad Shollalloohu ‘Alayhi wa Sallam is His messenger.
2. Establish prayer (five times).
3. Pay zakat.
4. Ramadan fasting.
5. The pilgrimage to the baitullah is for those who are able to carry it out.

Discussion 2: Pillars of Faith

There are six pillars of faith, namely:

1. Believe in Allah Subhanahu wa Ta’ala.
2. Believe in all the Angels
3. Believe in all the holy books.
4. Believe in all the Prophets.
5. Believe in doomsday.
6. Believe in the provisions of good and bad from Allah Subhanahu wa Ta’ala.

Discussion 3: The Meaning of “Laa Ilaaha Illallah”

As for the meaning of “Laa Ilaaha Illallah” namely: There is no God who has the right to be worshiped in reality other than Allah.

CHAPTER II: Discussion of Tahara (Purification of Hadats)

Discussion 1: Signs of Baligh

There are 3 signs of baligh, namely:

1. Age has reached 15 years for male or female.
2. Dreaming (junub) for boys and girls when they pass the age of nine.
3. Menstrual bleeding for women after the age of nine.

Discussion 2: Requirements for Using Stones for Stending

There are 8 conditions for the permissibility of using stones to marry, namely:

1. Using three stones.
2. Purify the unclean place with the stone.
3. The unclean is not dry.
4. The unclean does not move.
5. The istinja place is not exposed to other objects even though it is not unclean. 6. The uncleanness does not change the location of the istinja (the back of the pubic opening and the front of the pubic head).
6. The unclean is not exposed to water.
7. The stone used must be sacred.

Discussion 3: Pillars of Wudhu

There are 6 pillars of ablution, namely:

1. Intention.
2. Wash face.
3. Wash both hands up to the elbows.
4. Sweep part of the head.
5. Wash both feet up to the ankles.
6. Orderly.

Discussion 4: The intention of ablution

Intention is deliberately in the heart (to do) an action at the same time when doing it.

As for pronouncing this intention, it is sunnah, and the time when you first wash part of your face. The orderliness in question is not giving priority to one member of ablution over another member of ablution.

Discussion 5: Types of Water

There are two kinds of water; A little water and a lot of water. A little water is water that is less than two qullahs and a lot of water is up to two qullahs or more. A little water is unclean if it falls into it, even if it does not change.

As for large amounts of water, it will not become unclean unless the taste, color or smell of the water changes.

Discussion 6: The Reasons That Require Bathing

There are 6 things that require bathing, namely:

1. Inserting the genital head (male) into the vagina (female genitalia).
2. Semen discharge.
3. Menstrual bleeding (menstrual).
4. Puerperal bleeding (blood that comes out after giving birth).
5. Give birth to.
6. Die.

Discussion 7: Pillars of Bathing

There are two obligations in taking a bath, namely:

1. Mandatory bath.
2. Evenly distributes water to all parts of the body perfectly.

Discussion 8: Requirements for Valid Wudhu

There are ten conditions for ablution, namely:

1. Islam.
2. Tamyiz (age and reasonable).
3. Holy from menstruation and childbirth.
4. Clean of anything that can block water from reaching the skin.
5. There is nothing in any of the members of the ablution that changes the authenticity of the water.
6. Knowing that the law of ablution is obligatory.
7. It is not permissible to give `tiqad (belief) that one of the fardhu-fard wudu` is sunnah (not obligatory).
8. The purity of ablution water.
9. Enter the prayer time that is done.
10. Continously

These last two conditions are specific to da`im al-hadats.

Discussion 9: Ablution Cancellation

There are four things that invalidate ablution, namely:

1. If something comes out of one of the two genitals; front (qubul) back (anal) like wind and others, except semen.
2. Loss of mind is like sleeping and so on, except sleeping in a steady sitting position by pressing his seat to the ground.
3. Contact between the skin of a man and the skin of an adult woman who is not a muhrim without any barriers.
4. Touching the genitals or touching the anus with the palm of the hand or the palm of the finger.

Discussion 10: Actions that cannot be done in a state of hadats

People who cancel their ablution (minor hadats), are prohibited from doing the following four things:

1. Salat.
2. Tawaf (circle the Kaaba seven times).
3. Touching Mushaf Al-Quran.
4. Bring a Mushaf of the Koran.

People who are junub (big hadas) are prohibited from doing the following six things:

1. Salat.
2. Tawaf.
3. Touching Mushaf Al Quran.
4. Bring a Mushaf of the Koran.
5. Silence (I’tikaf) in the Mosque.
6. Reciting Al-Qur’an.

Women who are menstruating should not do the following ten things:

1. Salat.
2. Tawaf.
3. Touching Mushaf Al-Quran.
4. Bring a Mushaf of the Koran.
5. Silence (I’tikaf) in the Mosque.
6. Reciting Al-Qur’an.
7. Fast.
8. Divorced.
9. Walking inside the mosque – if he is afraid that he will defile it.
10. Have fun with your wife between the navel and knees.

Discussion 11: Permissible Conditions for Tayammum

There are three reasons for permissible tayammum, namely:

1. There is no water for ablution.
2. There is a disease that results in not being able to use water.
3. There is only water to meet the drinking needs of humans or animals that are muhtaram (respected).

As for besides Muhtaram, there are 6 types of Humans or animals that are not respected there are six types, namely:

1. People who leave the obligatory prayer.
2. Married people who commit adultery.
3. apostate.
4. Kafir Harbiy (One who fights the Muslims)
5. Stray dogs (like to bite).
6. Pig.

Discussion 12: Terms of Tayammum

There are ten conditions for doing tayammum, namely:

1. Tayammum with the ground.
2. Using holy ground is not unclean.
3. The land has never been used before.
4. Pure from other mixtures such as flour and such.
5. Make tayammum.
6. Wipe his face and hands with two different strokes.
7. Eliminate all uncleanness in the body first.
8. Trying to find the Qibla direction before starting tayammum.
9. Tayammum is done after entering the prayer time.
10. Do tayammum for every obligatory prayer.

Discussion 13: Obligations in Tayammum

There are five pillars of tayammum, namely:

1. Move dust.
2. Intention.
3. Wiping face.
4. Wipe both hands up to the elbows.
5. Order between two strokes.

Discussion 14: Abrogation of Tayammum

There are three invalidators of tayammum, namely:

1. Everything that breaks ablution.
2. apostate.
3. Doubtful that there is water, if he does tayammum because there is no water.

Discussion 15: Unclean Can Become Holy

There are three unclean things that can become holy, namely:

1. Khamr (water squeezed from wine) which takes another form (eg vinegar) by itself.
2. Tanned carcass skin.
3. All unclean who has turned into animals.

Discussion 16: Types of Uncleanness

There are three unclean, namely:

1. Great uncleanness (Mughallazhah), i.e. dogs, pigs or those born from one of them.
2. Light uncleanness (Mukhaffafah), namely the urine of a baby boy who does not eat anything other than his mother’s milk and is not yet two years old.
3. Moderate uncleanness (Mutawassithah), that is all unclean except the two unclean ones that have been mentioned.

Discussion 17: How to Clean Up Unclean

Great uncleanness (Mughallazah), purify it by washing it seven times, one of which is using dust, after the impurity is gone.

Light uncleanness (Mukhaffafah), purifies it by sprinkling water thoroughly and removes the unclean substance.

Moderate uncleanness (Mutawassithoh) is divided into two parts, namely:

1. ‘Ainiyyah, namely impurity that still shows its color, smell or taste, so the way to purify this uncleanness is by removing its color, smell and taste.
2. Hukmiyyah, i.e. impurity that does not see its color, smell and taste, so the way to purify this impurity is simply by pouring water on the object affected by the impurity.

Discussion 18: Menstrual Blood (Menstruation)

The fastest menstrual period is a day and night, but generally for six or seven days, and the longest is 15 days. The earliest sacred period between two menstruations is 15 days, but generally 24 or 23 days, and there is no limit to the maximum period.

The fastest postpartum period is a moment, generally 40 days, and the longest is 60 days.

CHAPTER III: PRAYER

Discussion 1: Udzur Prayer

1. Sleep
2. Forget

Discussion 2: Requirements for Valid Prayer

There are eight conditions for the validity of prayer, namely:

1. Holy from the big and small hadats.
2. Clean clothes, body and place from unclean.
3. Close genitals.
4. Facing the Qiblah.
5. Enter prayer time.
6. Know the pillars of prayer.
7. Do not believe that among the pillars of prayer as sunnah.
8. Stay away from all that invalidates prayer.

Kinds of Hadas

There are two kinds of Hadats, namely: Small Hadats and Big Hadats.

1. Minor hadats are hadats that require a person to perform ablution,
2. Major hadats are hadats that oblige a person to take a bath.

Limitation of Male and Female Aurat

There are four types of genitalia, namely:

1. The genitals of all men (free or slave) and female slaves during prayer are between the navel and the knees.
2. Awra women are free when praying, namely the whole body except the face and palms.
3. Awra of free women and slaves to men who are ajnabi (not muhrim), that is, the entire body.
4. Awra of free women and slaves for muhrimya men and women, which is between the navel and the knees.

Discussion 3: Pillars of Prayer

There are seventeen pillars of prayer, namely:

1. Intention.
2. Takbiratul ihram (pronounce “ Allahu Akbar ”).
3. Stand up for those who are able to pray fardhu.
4. Read Surah Al Fatihah.
5. Ruku’ .
6. Thuma’ninah (pause) during bowing.
7. I’tidal (standing after bowing).
8. Thuma’ninah (pause during i’tidal).
9. Bow down twice.
10. Thuma’ninah (pause while prostrating).
11. Sit between two prostrations.
12. Thuma’ninah (pause while sitting).
13. Final Tasyahud (tahiyat).
14. Sitting at the final tasyahud time.
15. Shalawat to the prophet at the end of tasyahud.
16. Regards.
17. Order (in order).

Discussion 4: Procedures for Intention

There are three degrees of intention, namely:

1. If the prayer is performed fardhu, it is obligatory that the intention is qasdul fi’li (carrying out the prayer), ta’yin (name of the prayer being performed) and fardhiyah (fardhunya).
   2. If the prayer is performed as a sunnah that has a time or has a cause, it is obligatory that the intention to perform the prayer and the name of the prayer performed is the sunnah Rawatib (before and after fardhu-fardhu).
   3. If the prayer is performed as a sunnah Mutlaq (without a cause), it is obligatory to do only that prayer.

What is meant by qasdul fi’li is “I intend to pray (make up for it)” , and what is meant by ta’yin is like midday or asr, while fardiyah is the intention of fardhu.

Discussion 5: Terms of Takbiratul Ihram

There are sixteen conditions for takbirotul ihrom, namely:

1. Performed in a standing state when praying fardhu.
2. Spoken in Arabic.
3. Using the pronunciation of “Allah”.
4. Using the pronunciation of “Akbar”.
5. Sequentially between the two pronunciations.
6. Do not extend the letter “Hamza” from the pronunciation of “Allah”.
7. Do not extend the letter “Ba” from the pronunciation of “Akbar”.
8. Do not translate the letter “Ba”.
9. Do not add the letters “Waw berharakat” or “wau breadfruit” between the two pronunciations.
10. Do not add the letter “Waw” before the pronunciation of “Allah”.
11. Do not pause between the two words either long or briefly.
12. The words “Allahu Akbar” can be heard by himself.
13. Enter the prayer time if the prayer has a certain time.
14. Say takbiratul ihram while facing the qibla.
15. There is no mistake in pronouncing one of the letters of the sentence.
16. Takbiratul ihram makmum must be done after the takbiratul ihram of the priest.

Discussion 6: Legal Requirements for Reading Surah Al-Fatihah

There are ten conditions for reading Surah Al Fatihah, namely:

1. Order (according to the order of the verses).
2. Continuously (without being interrupted by other actions).
3. Pay attention to the letters (makhraj) as well as the tasydid places.
4. Pay attention to tasydid-tasydidnya.
5. Not long interrupted between the verses of Al Fatihah or interrupted briefly with the intention of ending the reading.
6. Read all the verses of Al Fatihah and basmalah including one of the verses of Al Fatihah.
7. Do not use language (tone/rhythm of reading) which can change the meaning.
8. Read Surah Al Fatihah while standing while praying fardhu.
9. Listening to Al Fatihah reading for himself.
10. Not distracted by the dhikr of others.

Discussion 17: Tasydid in Surah Al-Fatihah

Tasydid letter “Lam” jalalah in pronunciation ( الله ).

2. Tasydid letter “Ra’” in pronunciation ( الرّحمن ).
3. Tasydid letter “Ra’” in pronunciation ( الرّحيم ).
4. Tasydid “Lam” jalalah on pronunciation ( الحمد لله) .
5. Tasydid letter “Ba’” in the sentence (ربّ العالمين ) .
6. Tasydid letter “Ra’” in pronunciation ( الرّحمن ).
7. Tasydid letter “Ra’” in pronunciation ( الرّحيم ).
8. Tasydid letter “Dal” in pronunciation ( الدّين ).
9. Tasydid letter “Ya’” in the sentence ( إيّاك نعبد).
10. Tasydid letter “Yes” in the sentence ( وإيّاك نستعين ).
11. Tasydid letter “Shad” in the sentence ( اهدنا الصّراط المستقيم ).
12. Tasydid letter “Lam” in the sentence (صراط الّذين ).
13. Tasydid “Dhad” in the sentence ( ولا الضالين).
14. Tasydid letter “Lam” in the sentence (ولا الضالين).

Discussion 8: When Do We Raise Hands in Prayer?

There are four places where it is sunnah to raise your hands when praying, namely:

1. When takbiratul ihram.
2. When bowing.
3. When getting up from bowing (I’tidal).
4. When rising from the initial tasyahud.

Discussion 9: Legal Requirements for Prostration

There are seven legal requirements for prostration, namely:

1. Sujud with seven members of prostration.
2. Open forehead (nothing covering the forehead).
3. Pressing the weight to the head.
4. There is no other purpose except prostration.
5. Not prostrating to a moving place of prostration if he is moving.
6. Raise the lower part (back) above the top (head).
7. Thuma’ninah (pause) in prostration.

Closing (The Problem of Prostration)

There are seven limbs that must be placed at the place of prostration, namely:

1. Forehead.
2. Right palm.
3. Left palm.
4. Right knee.
5. Left knee.
6. The sole of the toes of the right foot.
7. The soles of the left toes.

Discussion 10: Tasydid in the Final Tasyahud

In the tasyahud sentence there are twenty-one harakah (lines) of tasidid, sixteen of which are located in the sentence of tasyahud which must be read, and the remaining five are in the sentence which completes the tasyahud (which is sunnah to be read), namely:

1. “Attahiyyat”: harakah tasydid is located in the letter “Ta’”.
2. “Attahiyyat”: the harakah tasydid is located in the letter “Ya’”.
3. “Almubarakatusshalawat”: harakah tasydid in the letter “Shad”.
4. “Atthayyibaat”: harakah tasydid in the letter “Tha’”.
5. “Atthayyibaat”: harakah tasydid in the letters “ya’”.
6. “Lillaah”: harakah tasydid in “Lam” jalalah.
7. “Assalaam”: in the letters “Sin”.
8. “A’laika ayyuhannabiyyu”: in the letters “Ya’”.
9. “A’laika ayyuhannabiyyu”: in the letter “Nun”.
10. “A’laika ayyuhannabiyyu”: in the letters “Ya’”.
11. “Warohmatullahah”: in “Lam” walk.
12. “Wabarakatuh, assalaam”: in the letter “Sin”.
13. “Alainaa wa’alaa I’baadillah”: in “Lam” jalalah.
14. “Asshalihiin”: in shad letters.
15. “Ashhaduallaa”: in “Lam alif”.
16. “Ilaha Illallaah”: in “Lam alif”.
17. “Illallaah”: in “Lam” walk.
18. “Waasyhaduanna”: in the letter “Nun”.
19. “Muhammadarrasulullaah”: in the letter “mim”.
20. “Muhammadarrasulullaah”: in the letter “Ra’”.
21. “Muhammadarrasulullaah”: in the letter “Lam” jalalah.

Discussion 11: Tasydid in Saying Shalawat to Tasyahud

At least the sentence of the prophet’s prayer that meets the standard of obligation in the final tasyahud is Alloohumma sholliy ‘alaa Muhammad .

(As for) the vowel tasydid in the sentence of the prophet’s prayer is in the letters “Lam” and “Mim” in the pronunciation of “Allahumma”. And in the letter “Lam” in the pronunciation of “Shalli”; and in the letter “Mim” in Muhammad.

Discussion 12: Reciting Greetings at the Final Tasyahud

The minimum greeting pronunciation at the end of tasyahud is “ Assalamu’alaikum ”. There is a tasydid on the sin letter of the pronunciation ” Assalamu “.

Discussion 13: Obligatory Prayer Times

There are five obligatory prayer times:

1. The time for the midday prayer: Starts when the sun goes down (from the middle of the sky to the west) and ends when the length of an object’s shadow is equal to the length of the object.
2. Asr prayer time: Begins when the length of an object’s shadow is slightly greater than the length of the object and ends when the sun sets.
3. Maghrib prayer time: Begins when the sun sets and ends with the disappearance of the red mega (sunshine of the evening).
4. Isha prayer time: Begins with the disappearance of the red megaphone and ends with the rising of the sadiq dawn.
5. Fajr prayer time: Starts with the rising of the sadiq dawn and ends with the rising of the sun.

There are three colors of evening sunlight (mega), namely:

1. The red mega appears at sunset.
2. mega yellow and white appear at Isha time.

It is sunnah to postpone (end) the Isha prayer until the yellow and white light disappears.

Discussion 14: Times Not Allowed For Prayer

One is not allowed to pray sunnah prayers without cause or sunnah muthlaq prayers at the following times:

1. When the sun rises to rise it is roughly equal to the size of the pike.
2. When the sun is right in the middle of the sky until it shifts slightly except on Friday.
3. When the sun is yellowish to sink.
4. After Fajr prayer until sunrise.
5. After the Asr prayer until sunset.

Discussion 15: Break Times During Prayer

There are six places for saktah (stopping as a pause from one action to another) at the time of prayer, namely:

1. Between takbiratul ihram and prayer iftitah.
2. Between iftitah and ta’awudz prayers.
3. Between ta’awudz and reading Surah Al Fatihah.
4. Between the end of Surah Al Fatihah and saying amen.
5. Between saying amen and reading the letter of the Qur’an.
6. Between reading the letter of the Qur’an and bowing.

Discussion 16: Pillars of Prayer Required by Thuma’ninah

The pillars of prayer that are required to do it with tuma’ninah are four, namely:

1. When bowing.
2. When i’tidal.
3. When prostration.
4. When sitting between two prostrations.

Thuma’ninah is a moment of silence after moving (from the previous position) until all limbs remain (not moving) with a time more or less like saying tasbih (subhanallah).

Discussion 17: The Reasons That Require Sajud Sawi

There are four reasons for prostration for forgetfulness, namely:

1. Leaving part of the ab’adus namaz (sunnah work in prayer is bad if one leaves it).
2. Doing something that cancels (even though he forgot), if done on purpose and does not cancel if he forgets.
3. Move the pillars of qauli (which are spoken) to their place.
4. Doing the pillars of Fi’li (which is done) with the possibility of excess.

Discussion 18: Actions in Prayer Included in the Sunnah of Ab’adh

Sunnah Ab’adh there are six, namely:

1. Early tasyahud.
2. Sit tasyahud early.
3. Shalawat for the prophet Muhammad during the early tasyahud.
4. Blessings to the Prophet’s family at the end of tasyahud.
5. Du’a qunut.
6. Stand up for qunut prayer.
7. Shalawat and greetings to the prophet Muhammad, his family and friends when praying qunut.

Discussion 19: Prayer Cancellation

There are fourteen cases that invalidate prayer, namely:

1. Hadats (such as urinating and defecating).
2. Exposed unclean, if not removed immediately, without holding the impurity.
3. Open nakedness, if not closed instantly.
4. Says two letters or one letter that can be understood on purpose.
5. Eat (a little) on purpose.
6. Even if you eat a lot, you forget.
7. Move with three moves in a row even if you forget.
8. Jumping that spoils prayer.
9. Overreaching hitting.
10. Adding pillar fi’li on purpose.
11. Faster or slower the two pillars of prayer from the priest without excuse.
12. Intend to stop praying.
13. Hanging his prayer with something.
14. Hesitating in stopping the prayer (between continued or stopped).

Discussion 20: When is it obligatory to make the intention as a prayer leader?

A priest is required to intend to become a priest in four circumstances, namely:

1. Be the Imam of Friday prayers.
2. Become the priest in the i`aadah prayer (repeated prayer).
3. Become an imam for congregational prayer vows.
4. Being the priest of the plural taqdim prayer with the cause of rain

Discussion 21: Requirements for the Makmum to Follow the Imam

There are eleven conditions for the congregation to follow the priest, namely:

1. Do not know the cancellation of the priest’s prayer because of hadats or something else.
2. Do not believe that the priest is obliged to make up (replace) the prayer.
3. A priest is not being a mammum.
4. An imam is not illiterate (must have good reading of the Qur’an).
5. The position of the congregation does not exceed the place where the priest stands.
6. Makmum must know the movement of the priest’s prayer movements.
7. Being in one mosque (place) or within a distance of approximately three hundred cubits.
8. The congregation intends to follow the imam or the congregational intention.
9. The prayer of the priest and the congregation must be in the same way and kaifiyat.
10. Makmum does not differ between the Imams with sunnah actions that are very different or very different.
11. The congregation must follow the priest.

Discussion 22: Legal and Illegal Congregational Models

There are 9 models of congregational prayers. There are 5 valid congregational models, namely:

1. Men follow men.
2. Women follow men.
3. Sissy follows the men.
4. Women follow sissy.
5. Women follow women.

There are four models of illegitimate congregation, namely:

1. Boys follow girls.
2. Men follow sissy.
3. Sissy follows women.
4. Sissy follows sissy.

Discussion 23: Legal Terms for Plural Taqdim

There are four legal conditions for plural taqdim (joining the first two prayers), namely:

1. Starting from the earlier prayer time.
2. Multiple intentions.
3. Consecutive.
4. Udzurnya continuously.

Discussion 24: Final Plural Legal Requirements

There are two final plural legal conditions, namely:

1. The intention of ta’khir when there is still time left for the first prayer is simply the length of time to complete the prayer.
2. The excuses continued until the time for the second prayer was finished

Discussion 25: Requirements for Qashar (summarizing) Prayer

There are seven conditions for qashar, namely:

1. Travel distance reaches two marhala or more (About 80 km).
2. The journey undertaken is a permissible journey (not a journey to do immorality).
3. Know the law of permissibility of qashar.
4. The intention of qashar when takbiratul `ihram.
5. The prayers that are recited are the ruba`iyah prayers (prayers that consist of four cycles).
6. The journey is carried out continuously until the prayer is finished.
7. Do not follow the person who is itmam (a person whose prayer is not qashar) in some of his prayers.

Discussion 26: Legal Requirements for Friday Prayers

There are six conditions for the validity of Friday prayers, namely:

1. Friday sermons and prayers are held after the noon time.
2. Friday prayers are held within the boundaries of the region.
3. Done collectively.
4. The Friday congregation is at least forty (40) free male, mature and native of the area.
5. There is no other Friday jama’ah that precedes and competes in the same area.
6. Friday prayers are held after two Friday sermons.

Discussion 27: Pillars of the Friday Khutbah

There are five pillars of the Friday sermon, namely:

1. Praising Allah (saying Alhamdulillah ) in these two sermons.
2. Salawat to the Prophet Muhammad in these two sermons.
3. Instruct the congregation to fear Allah.
4. Read a verse of the Qur’an in one of the sermons.
5. Pray for all Muslims at the end of the khutbah.

Discussion 28: Legal Requirements for the Friday Khutbah

There are ten legal conditions for Friday sermons, namely:

1. Holy from small hadas and big hadas.
2. Clothing, body and place must be clean from all impurity.
3. Close genitals.
4. The sermon is delivered standing up for those who can afford it.
5. The two khutbahs are separated by sitting for a long time like thuma’ninah in prayer but a little longer.
6. The two sermons were carried out sequentially.
7. The sermon and Friday prayers are held sequentially.
8. Both sermons were delivered in Arabic.
9. Friday sermons were heard by 40 men (independent, mature and native of the area).
10. Everything is carried out after entering the midday prayer time.

CHAPTER IV: Management of the Corpse

Discussion 1: Obligations of Muslims for the bodies of Muslims

The obligation of Muslims towards his brother who died there are four cases, namely:

1. bathe.
2. shroud.
3. pray.
4. Bury.

Discussion 2: How to Bathe the Body

The way to bathe the corpse is at least by wetting the entire body of the body with water. The most perfect way to bathe a corpse is to clean its qubul and anus, clean the dirt from its nose, perform ablution, bathe it while rubbing it with bidara leaf water and douse it with water three (3) times.

Discussion 3: How to shroud a corpse

The shroud is the minimum with a piece of cloth that covers the entire body.

The perfect way for men is to cover their entire body with three pieces of cloth, while for women it is with clothes, khimar (head covering), sarong and 2 pieces of cloth.

Discussion 4: Pillars of the Body Prayer

The pillars of the funeral prayer are seven (7), namely:

1. Intention.
2. Four times takbir.
3. Stand up for those who can.
4. Read Surah Al-Fatihah.
5. Read shalawat on the Prophet after the second takbir.
6. Pray for the deceased after the third takbir.
7. Regards.

Discussion 5: How to Bury a Dead Body

The way to bury the corpse is at least in a hole that can cover the smell of the corpse and protect it from wild animals. The most perfect way is to bury it in the ground which is deep enough and wide enough, and the cheek is placed on the ground and it is obligatory to face it towards the Qibla.

Discussion 6: Circumstances Permitted To Dismantle Graves

Dead bodies may be exhumed under four circumstances, namely:

1. To be bathed if it has not changed shape.
2. To face it towards the Qibla.
3. To retrieve buried treasure with corpses.
4. The woman whose fetus was buried with him and it is possible that the fetus is still alive.

Discussion 7: The Law of Asking for Help from Others in Ablution (Isti’anah)

There are four isti’anah laws, namely:

1. Change.
2. Aula’s mistake (difference to what is more important)
3. Makruh.
4. Must.

Mubah if only asks to get water. It’s a mistake in the hall if you ask for water to be poured over someone who is performing ablution. Makruh if asked to pour water for people who wash the members of his ablution. It is obligatory to ask for water to be poured on a sick person when he is weak.

CHAPTER V: Zakat

Discussion 1: Assets that are Obligatory to Issue Zakat

There are six types of assets on which zakat is obligatory, namely:

1. Cattle.
2. Gold and silver.
3. Grains (which are the staple food).
4. Trade treasure. Zakat that must be issued is 4/10 (2.5%) of trading results.
5. Hidden treasure.
6. Mine results.

CHAPTER VI: Fasting

Discussion 1: How to Determine the Beginning of Ramadan

Ramadan fasting is obligatory with one of the following provisions:

1. By completing the month of Sha’ban 30 days.
2. By looking at the moon, for those who see it alone, even though he is wicked.
3. By establishing it with fair testimony for people who don’t see it firsthand.
4. With news from someone whose history is fair, the truth is also believed, whether those who heard the news confirmed it or not, or if the one who brought the news was not believed, but the people who heard confirmed it.
5. With berijtihad the entry of the month of Ramadan for those who doubt it.

Discussion 2: Requirements for Valid Fasting

There are four (4) conditions for valid Ramadan fasting, namely:

1. Islam.
2. Reasonable.
3. Holy from eg menstrual blood.
4. Know the time allowed to fast

Discussion 3: Requirements for Obligatory Fasting of Ramadan

There are five conditions for obligatory fasting in Ramadan, namely:

1. Islam.
2. Taklif (charged for fasting).
3. Able to fast.
4. Healthy.
5. Muqim (not traveling).

Discussion 4: Pillars of Ramadan Fasting

There are three pillars of Ramadan fasting, namely:

1. intention every night.
2. Abstain from anything that breaks the fast while still remembering, being able to choose (no coercion) and not in ignorance that is forgiven.
3. Fast.

Discussion 5: Qadha, Kafarat, and Imsak

The punishment for a person who breaks his fast for one day in Ramadan because of sexual intercourse is that he is obligated to make up his fast and is obliged to pay expiation and a strict reprimand for breaking his fast.

It is obligatory to make up the fast and must refrain (from eating and drinking until it is time to break the fast) in six conditions:

1. The person who breaks the fast on purpose. This only applies in the month of Ramadan.
2. The person who leaves the intention at night for the obligatory fast.
3. People who eat sahur because they think it’s still night, even though dawn has already risen.
4. People who break their fast because they think the sun has set, even though the sun has not yet set.
5. People who believe that it is the thirtieth day of the month of Sha’ban, even though it is already the first day of Ramadan.
6. People who already drink water from gargling or from water that is put in the nose.

Discussion 6: Fasting Cancellation

There are 6 invalidators of fasting, namely:

1. apostate.
2. Period.
3. Postpartum
4. Give birth to.
5. Just a little crazy
6. Intentional fainting and drunkenness if it occurs throughout the afternoon.

Discussion 7: The Law of Canceling the Fast and the Punishment

Breaking the fast during the day of Ramadan is divided into four types, namely:

1. Mandatory, like women who are menstruating or giving birth.
2. Allowed, such as people traveling and people who are sick.
3. It’s not obligatory, nor is it allowed, like crazy.
4. It is forbidden, like someone who postpones making up up Ramadan, even though in fact he might be able to do it until the time for making up up is up.

Those who break their fast are required to make up for their fast in 4 ways, namely:

1. The person who is obliged to make up the qadha and pay the fidyah. There are two types: (a) women who break their fast because they are worried about the condition of their babies and (b) people who delay making up their fasts until the next Ramadan arrives.
2. The person who is required to make up the fast without paying the fidyah is like a person who faints.
3. People who are required to pay fidyah without making up for it, such as very old people (who are no longer able to fast).
4. People who are not required to make up the qadha and do not need to pay fidyah, are like crazy people who are not making it up.

Discussion 8: Eating and Drinking That Does Not Invalidate Fasting

Circumstances which do not break the fast even though (food/drink) has entered the mouth (swallowed) there are seven kinds, namely:

1. Do it in a state of forgetting.
2. Don’t know the law.
3. Forced by someone else.
4. When something is put into the oral cavity, it is because of the saliva that flows between the teeth, while it is impossible for him to spit it out.
5. When the entry of street dust into the oral cavity.
6. When something from the flour sieve enters the oral cavity.
7. When the entry of flies that are flying into the oral cavity.

Source:

Al Batawiy, Abu Razin. (2011). Matan Safiinatun Najaah Fi Ushulid Diini Wal Fiqhi . Muktabah Ar Razin.

The Best Hours of the Midnight Prayer and Its Virtues – Salah midnight is one of the worship services in Islam. This prayer service is carried out at night and you have to sleep first. This is what makes the midnight prayer a worship that is quite heavy to do. However, Allah SWT promises many things for his servants who regularly perform midnight prayers.

However, midnight prayers must also be done correctly. Can’t be any time. When is the best time to do it? This article will discuss the best time to perform the midnight prayer. In addition, it will also explain how the priorities are.

Best Hour of Midnight Prayer

1. The First Third of the Night

One of the best hours to perform the midnight prayer is in the first third of the night. The first midnight prayer can be done after the evening prayer. Limit on the first time around until 22.00.

A Muslim who wants to pray the midnight prayer can immediately carry out the midnight prayer after the evening prayer. Must still sleep before the midnight prayer.

2. Third of the Second Night

The second time to perform the midnight prayer is in the second third of the night. This time around 22.00 until early morning. Precisely at 01.00. Compared to the first third of the night, this time is somewhat more important. This is because the third time on the second night is believed to have fadhilah and many of its own features.

In the second third of the night, many people are asleep. Therefore, the midnight prayer service is quite heavy. Muslims who wish to perform the midnight prayer are advised to get up at the prime time. It is believed to get more priority.

In the hadith narrated by Abu Dawud, there is an explanation of one of the superstitions. The hadith reads “Whoever gets up (prays at night) and reads ten verses, he will not be recorded as negligent. Whoever wakes up (night prayer by reading a hundred verses) will be recorded as those who submit. And whoever wakes up (night prayer) by reading a thousand verses then he will be recorded as muqanthirin (those who get many times the reward). Infinity”.

3. The Last Third of the Night

The third time that can be used for the midnight prayer is in the last third of the night. The time of the last third of the night starts at 01:00 until just before dawn. Among the three best times to perform the midnight prayer, the last third of the night is the most important.

This happens not without reason, the last third of the night is the best time to worship. At this time it is believed to be an efficacious time. Especially when you want to pray to Allah SWT.

During the last third of the night, Allah SWT descends into the sky of the world. According to a hadith narrated by Bukhari and Muslim, Rasulullah SAW said “Every night Allah SWT descends into the sky of the world until the last third of the night remains. He (Allah SWT) also said, “Is there any servant of Mine who asks so that I will surely give him what he asks for? Is there any servant of mine who prays until surely I will answer his prayer? Is there any servant of mine who makes istighfar until I forgive his sins?”

The Excellence of the Midnight Prayer

The midnight prayer is a very good practice to do. Allah SWT says in the letter Al-Isra verse 79 “And part of the night, perform additional midnight prayers (as a form of worship): hopefully your Lord will raise you to a commendable place”.

Therefore, the midnight prayer service has many benefits and advantages for anyone who performs it. Here are the virtues of the midnight prayer:

1. Get a commendable and noble place

One of the virtues of the midnight prayer is that it is placed in a commendable and noble place in the sight of Allah SWT. This is the promise of Allah SWT to his people. Allah SWT promises to elevate His people to praiseworthy places. This is promised to Muslims who are diligent and sincere when carrying out the midnight prayer. The midnight prayer which is performed sincerely and diligently and to hope for the pleasure of Allah SWT will bring many benefits.

2. His prayer was granted

The next priority for carrying out the midnight prayer is that the prayers that are being said can be answered. Allah SWT promises to grant the prayers of a Muslim who is an expert at midnight prayers, or regularly performs midnight prayers.

Rasulullah SAW once said this in a hadith. Rasulullah SAW said “At night, there was a time when a Muslim asked for the good of the world and the hereafter, surely Allah SWT gave him. It goes on every night.” In the hadith narrated by Muslim and Ahmad from Jabir

3. Removing sins and mistakes

Not only granting the prayers that are said, the midnight prayer also has other virtues. The priority is as an eraser of sins and mistakes that have been made. In the hadith, Rasulullah SAW said “Do qiyamullail. Because that’s the habit of the pious people before you, a form of taqarrub, an eraser of sins, and a hindrance to doing wrong.” HR. Tirmidhi from Abu Umamah Al-Bahili.

4. Become a master of dhikr

A Muslim who regularly performs the midnight prayer will become a dhikr expert. This was conveyed directly by Rasulullah SAW. Rasulullah SAW explained that someone who wakes up at night, then wakes up the other members of his family and performs two rak’ahs will get a good reward. They will be included in the group of women and men who remember Allah SWT a lot. This is stated in the hadith narrated by Abu Dawud, Nasa’i, and Ibn Majah from Abu Sa’id Al-Khudri

5. Be humble

Allah SWT says that people who regularly perform midnight prayers will always be humble and friendly. Humility is emitted through peace of mind in living daily life.

6. The Bridge to Heaven

The midnight prayer is also a bridge to the entrance to heaven. Allah SWT has given a finished product to His servant. The promise is intended for obedient servants to Allah. However, Allah SWT will also give hell as a punishment for servants who disobey Allah SWT.

Allah SWT shows his servants the way to go to heaven. One of them is to perform the midnight prayer service regularly.

The virtue of the next midnight prayer is that it can be a bridge to heaven. Allah SWT has promised heaven for servants who obey Him. Instead, He made hell a punishment for servants who disobeyed Him.

“O people, spread greetings, give food and pray at night when humans are sleeping: surely you all will enter heaven safely.” HR. Tirmidhi

7. Help in the afterlife

“Verily, those who fear Allah will be in (heavens full of) gardens and springs of water. (In Heaven) they can take whatever God bestows upon them. Verily they were before that (in the world) are the people who do good. They sleep very little at night. And at the end of the night they ask forgiveness (to Allah SWT). QS. Az-Zariyat 15-18.

The verse above explains that the midnight prayer has a very great virtue. One of them is that it can become a helpful practice in the hereafter.

8. Maintain physical health

The midnight prayer also has physical benefits. Tahajud prayer is the best therapy for the treatment of various diseases. Therefore, a Muslim who diligently performs the midnight prayers will have good immune system. So that he is not easily infected with viruses or disease. So surely he will always be healthy.

Rasulullah SAW said, “Perform night prayers because it is a tradition of righteous people in front of you, a means of getting closer to Allah, preventing sins, eliminating wrongdoing, and preventing all kinds of diseases from the body.” in the hadith narrated by Tirmidhi.

• Procedure for Ablution
• Procedure for Dhuha Prayer
• Procedure for Midnight Prayer
• Procedure for the Prayer of the Corpse
• Mandatory Bathing Procedures
• Definition of Al-Quran and Hadith
• Definition of Morals
• Noble Qualities
• Honest Behavior in Islam
• Definition of Zakat
• Pillars of Hajj
• Understanding Faith In Angels
• Understanding Aurat
• List of 99 Asmaul Husna
• Zakat Fitrah and Zakat Mal

That is the best hour and the virtue of the midnight prayer for Muslims. There are many other miracles regarding the midnight prayer. You can find it at www.Sinaumedia.com.

Source: from various sources

WS Rendra’s poetry – Poetry, the art of writing uses a variety of languages ​​with additional semantics and metaphors to add to the beauty of the writing. Poetry is stanzas that contain a beautiful sentence that is arranged and packaged as attractively as possible. Poetry has a complete uniqueness accompanied by figure of speech, so poetry connoisseurs don’t get tired of enjoying it.

In the world of literature, in Indonesia itself, many famous writers have been born who are legendary. His names have gone global and can inspire anyone who reads and meditates on his poems.

One of them, is WS Rendra. Who doesn’t know the famous Indonesian poet whose real name is Willibrordus Surendra Broto? Just by looking at the name Rendra, Sinaumed’s definitely knows this poet right away, because his literary works are so popular.

Rendra is known as the richest poet in Indonesia. No wonder, because he is very productive in creating and using metaphors to support dramatic and visual imagery in his poems.

In fact, WS Rendra also earned the nickname The Peacock for his appearance as a poet who always fascinated the audience. A lover, like a peacock that stretches its beautiful tail to attract the attention of its lover. It is for them, lovers, WS Rendra pours out his love through poetry in his book entitled Poems of Love which can be found at sinaumedia.

However, before taking a peek at some of his love poems. The saying goes, if you don’t know, you don’t love. Come on, Sinaumed’s , let’s first get to know WS Rendra through his short biography.

Get to know WS Rendra at a glance

WS Rendra alias Willibrordus Surendra Broto, born in Solo on 7 November 1935. He is the son of Raden Cyprianus Sugeng Brotoatmodjo and Raden Ayu Catharina Ismadillah. The Rendra family is a Catholic family who grew up in a Javanese cultural environment.

His father was a teacher at a Catholic school in Solo which taught Indonesian and Javanese. Apart from that, Rendra’s father was also known as a performer of traditional drama or playwright.

Rendra’s artistic talent did not only come from his father. His mother was also an artist, namely a serimpi dancer at the Surakarta Hadiningrat Kasunanan Palace.

In addition, Rendra’s artistic talents grew because of his family’s habits. Born into a blue-blooded Javanese family, of course at special moments meetings between families were held.

At the event, one by one the family members were asked to sing spontaneously. However, it is usually preferred for children or young family members. It was at that time that Rendra’s talent began to show, even though he was only five years old.

In 1942, Rendra started his education by entering kindergarten. Until 10 years later, in 1952 he entered high school at the Catholic school, Solo where his father taught. Meanwhile, during school, his literary talent began to show when he was in junior high school. At that time, Rendra had started to show his ability by writing poetry, short stories, and plays for various school activities.

Not only writing, it turns out that he is also good at the stage. He began to recite his poems on the school stage. Not only that, Rendra also staged one of his plays entitled Fake Legs when he was in junior high school. Growing up with all these habits and an environment full of art and culture, it is not surprising that Rendra has become an artist who has produced numerous literary works, from poetry, plays, short stories, and others.

When he was in high school, Rendra returned to staging his drama entitled People at the Bend of the Road . It was from the drama performance that it was the first time that he received the main prize and award from the Regional Office of the Ministry of Education and Culture, Yogyakarta. The award made him very excited to continue working.

He began to publish his poetry for the first time in the mass media in 1952 through the Siasat magazine . After that, his poetry flowed smoothly to grace various magazines at that time, such as Story, Art, Basis, Confrontation, and New Strategy.

After graduating from high school, Rendra went to Jakarta with the intention of attending the Foreign Affairs Academy. Unfortunately, it turns out that the academy has closed. He also decided to go to Yogyakarta and enter the Faculty of Letters at Gadjah Mada University.

During his studies in Yogyakarta, Rendra was fond of participating in Yogyakarta theater activities. However, in 1954, Rendra received an invitation from the American government to attend a literature seminar at Harvard University, so he did not finish his studies at Gajah Mada University. Even so, Rendra received an Honoris Causa Doctorate from his campus.

In 1961, after returning from America, Rendra began to establish a theater group in Yogyakarta. However, the group stopped because he went back to America in 1964, because he received a scholarship to deepen his knowledge of drama and dance from the American Academy of Dramatical Art (AADA).

His departure for America at that time caused his theatrical activities in Yogyakarta to stop. Rendra completed his education abroad in 1967.

After completing his education, in 1968 Rendra re-established his theater with a new name, namely Bengkel Theatre . The play that became his first performance was Bip-Bop . The theater community he made became the talk of all Indonesian people, because it gave a new color and atmosphere to theater life in the country, especially Yogyakarta.

In his new theater, that’s where Rendra found his life partner. Rendra had a love of location with Sunarti Kelvin, a playwright in Bengkel Theater who inspired Rendra a lot in his work.

However, even though he was married to Sunarti. In 1970, Rendra married Sitoresmi Prabuningrat and converted from Catholicism to Islam. Since then, he started using the name Surendra Broto only.

WS Rendra’s Love Poems

From a glimpse of his life’s journey, of course this Indonesian writer is indeed adept at playing with words of love. Through his book entitled Poems of Love , published by Bentang Pustaka, WS Rendra has recorded 30 titles of his love poems.

He divided these love poems into three periods, namely the First Puberty (1954-1958) which he wrote during his student days at Gadjah Mada University. Second Puberty (1968-1977), namely poems written after he attended college in New York. Finally, Third Puberty (1992-2003), contains the poems he wrote during the 1998 reform period.

First Puberty (1954-1958)

In the First Puberty there are 24 poems, which contain stories of young love that are as they are. So sweet and romantic. Presented in a short, light, and simple form, but really shows the feelings of people who are in love.

The poems are entitled Request, Hair, Miss, Clothes, Papaya, Bicycle, Green Skirt, The Two of Us, His Passion, Temprament, Sculpture, To The Clouds Passing, Repentance, Bicycle Lover, Two Birds, One, Optimism, Pantun, Roosters , Be Not Away, Beloved, Evil Wind, Whispering To Your Own Ear, and Falling Flowers.

Request

O round moon

look out the window my love!

he sleeps alone,

just a friend of a longing heart.

Hair

My beloved hair 

very beautiful and long.

he said,

that hair to ensnare my heart.

Miss

Fir tree from afar

imagine the length of her hair

So I miss my girlfriend too.

We both

Because our school is not finished yet

we are not married yet.

But in the soul

we have many grandchildren.

His passion

My boyfriend likes

heard me tell a story.

In storytelling I always satirized

that I love him very much.

Temperament

River stone

hit by the sun.

How hot!

When the night descends again

calm at times.

The moon is cool

and the water sings

endless.

If we get angry

on lovers

forever.

Sculpture

Under the sapodilla tree

on a bench

under the blue sky

above the gray earth

– Rest two longing hearts.

Two Birds

Are two birds

nest together.

We are both like birds

fly without a nest.

Already One

Your anxiety is my anxiety.

Let’s walk hand in hand

in real life,

and we love.

We stared into each other’s eyes for a long time

and understand more

can no longer be separated.

You are a pin

that has been pinned.

I am a ship

which has been anchored and moored.

We are both lava

which can no longer be described.

Optimism

Love us both

is a palace of porcelain.

The wind has brought peace

wrapped us in a hug.

The earth has given strength,

because we have stepped

with firmness.

Don’t be far away

Don’t be far away

like the moon

can only be seen. 

Be the wind

caress my hair.

And we will

will always be together.

Beloved

My beloved is like a magpie.

Her voice is melodious.

His eyes are glass.

His heart is blue.

My beloved is like a magpie.

Nestled beautifully in the heart.

my magpie,

our hearts are a rainbow of dozen colors.

Autumn Flowers

Fall flowers

over the dead

all who were with him fell

My darling.

Fall flowers

above where you are buried

fall all matters of affairs between us.

Alright, let’s just let it go

no promises will see you in heaven

because in heaven we don’t need romance.

Asmara was only born on earth

(where everything ends in dead land)

it follows human life

and if life alone has fallen

he also fell together.

There are some memories left

but nothing more than fraud

or some sort of suicide deterrent.

There may also be sadness

it was to him a kind of price or honor

which will soon fall apart.

My darling.

Fall, yes, fall

all fall

life, romance, dew on flowers – 

what we take is only useful.

Second puberty (1968-1977)

Unlike the First Puberty which contains short love poems. In the Second Puberty the poems presented are longer and more complex about life. The second puberty contains 3 poems entitled Letters from a Wife (Steacher, April 30, 1968), Behind You Back (1972), and Not in Madrid (1977).

The poem Not in Madrid tells about a dialogue. An epic romance through dialogue between a man and a woman. There are also several symbols that are always visible, one of which is the plus symbol (+).

Meanwhile, in the poem Surat a Wife, it tells about Rendra’s experience, who at that time was affectionately called Willy. When he was in junior high school, a male friend of his asked Rendra for help, so he could write a heartfelt poem for his girlfriend. The next day the woman came to Rendra, so that he could also write a reply letter for her male friend. Rendra was amused because the woman did not know that the woman had asked Rendra to answer her own writing.

It ‘s so funny . Sinaumed’s , did you also experience periods of sending love letters at school?

Furthermore, the third poem on the Second Puberty tells about the aging life of someone named Rusman. The series of words are arranged so simple and romantic.

Actually, the three poems were first published in newspapers and magazines when Rendra was still in junior high and high school. The publication of his poems in the newspaper started as a fad from his good friend, DS Mulyanto, who sent his poems to newspapers and magazines.

Third puberty (1992-2003)

Third puberty , namely love poems that Rendra wrote in 1992-2003. Especially during the 1998 reform era, this was because Rendra was also increasingly open to the face of the state and state administration. Therefore, the last three poems on the Third Puberty contain critical awareness of the state administration and anthropology of the Indonesian nation.

The three love poems are titled Love Poems Written at the Age of 57, Hai Ma!, and Maybe Because of the Moon .

Love Rhymes Written at Age 57

Any closed space will crack

because it contains time that always offsets

And finally it will explode

if the energy of time continues to be blocked

 

My love for you my Juwit

Genuine and real

It happens by itself, I don’t know why

I just realized that it actually exists

 

My love for you my Juwit

Then space and time

in my human life

Space love I empower

but time is out of reach

Now I realized

the age of love is longer than the age of romance

The treasure of love culture…

dating, separation, marriage

can not formulate time energy of love

 

And now my verse

Is it possible to formulate my love for you

 

The poem begins with the words,

and the words in poetry also space and time

away from the dictionary, away from history,

free from human corruption

Thus my verse

dare to represent my love for you

 

My Juwit

I’ve never been satisfied kissing you

You are like a book I never finish reading

You are the moss inside my skull

You’re not perfect, easy stomachache,

get headaches easily and your temperament is often high

You find it hard to face yourself

And behind your grace and flexibility

you are afraid of the world

 

My Juwit

Apart from analysis boxes

my love for you is real

You are not beautiful, but beautiful and juwita

Definitely not immaculata, but a myth

in my heart

 

Until here I end the reflections of my love for you

If you obey, there will be no end

I sincerely present to you:

 

My love for you has time

This verse will also take time

What is clear is that it will last longer

of my age and yours

Hi, Mom!

Ma, it’s not death that shakes my heart

but life that does not live

because it loses power and loses its nature

there are nights I walk the long hall

aimlessly anywhere

Cold air entered my empty body

even though there is no wind

the stars became fireflies

which further emphasizes the presence of darkness

no thoughts, no feelings, no nothing.

 

Life is mortal, Ma

but helplessness renders me absent

sometimes I feel cast out into the wilderness

shunned by Mother and Father and rejected by neighbors

or I was stranded in the market

I talk but people don’t listen

they tore up books and laughed at ideals

I’m angry, I’m scared, I’m shaking

but failed to compose language.

 

Life is mortal, Ma

that’s easy for me to accept

but sitting hugging knees alone in the savanna

make my life worthless

sometimes I feel like people are pulling me here and there

foaming at the mouth just from laughing

live polluted by pleasantries

and people pass the time with crazy fights

which is without a problem

or love without romance

and unfinished intercourse

 

Life is mortal of course, Ma

but a managed acrobatics of thought and falsehood

messed up my stomach then

pushed me screaming

while not knowing why

it feels like after dying over and over again.

 

There is nothing more surprising in this life.

 

But Ma, every time I realize that you are in my life

I feel the course of blood flow throughout my body.

My glands are working

my soul sings, the world is present

the gecko on the wall rang

the gardener was heard talking to his son

life becomes real, my nature returns.

 

Remembering you Ma, is remembering daily obligations

the simplicity of the prose language, the beauty of the poetry

We’re always having fun exchanging ideas, right Ma?

each side has goals

Each party has real obligations

 

Hi Mom!

Do you remember

I hug you on the boat

when your stomach hurts and I calm you down

with kisses on your neck?

Masyaallah… I’ve always been fascinated by the smell of your skin

Do you remember that time I said

doomsday may come, my life is full of meaning

Hehehe waahh.. I really have nothing to lose when I meet you in this life

and when I write poetry

I also feel that yesterday and tomorrow

is today.

 

Disaster and luck are the same.

The sky outside, the sky in the body is united in the soul.

Yes, Ma…

Maybe because of the Moon

The moon spreads the scent of lust

from his body.

Which then sticks to the leaves of the cape tree

who trembles.

 

A tomcat groaned

with a magic sound.

Saying poetry that he could not write.

And, Ma, I took your soul

which is far from my reach.

 

I wrote my love poem

Because I can’t whisper to you.

Missing wading Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday,

And all Sunday.

Hatch like the saliva of the sky

Who became the stars.

 

Crystals of hope and desire

flashing in the water

hit the sleeping stones.

 

Passion for work during the day

at night into a passionate romance.

Because of the stars, the cape tree,

wind, and nocturnal insects.

 

Ma, your sleeping body

lying on a sailboat

drifting in the sky

sail the sky.

So, those are the famous poems by WS Rendra. Even though times have become more modern, the existence of romantic poetry by senior writers will always be remembered. As the younger generation, of course we can’t forget this literary work …

Book Recommendations & Related Articles

Author: Indah Utami

Also Read!

1. Types of Old Poetry, What’s There?
2. Understanding Literary Theory and History
3. Poetry Figures in Indonesia, Who Is Your Favorite?
4. Get to know what is figurative language and examples
5. Understanding Poetry and How to Make It
6. 7 Indonesian Writers in their Era
7. What Is Romanticism?

Each country has a different duration of sunshine. In Indonesia, which is a tropical country, it gets sunlight longer than in countries with four seasons. This happens almost all year round.

Like humans, animals and plants also need sunlight. Sunlight does have an important role in life on earth. Without it, life would be somber and even no life at all. Everyone’s dead.

Then, what are the benefits of sunlight for animals? Sinaumed’s will get answers by listening to the following explanation.

Overview of the Sun

The sun is the center of the solar system. It is also the closest star to Earth. The composition of the sun consists of various kinds of gases that are under high pressure so that they make themselves hot. These gases consist of 76% hydrogen, 22% helium, 2% oxygen and other gases.

The sun is the largest planet with a size of 109 times the diameter of the earth. It weighs up to 300,000 times the weight of the earth. This is caused by the material that composes it in the form of gas so that its shape is actually a collection of gases. The temperature of the sun’s surface reaches 6,000 ⁰ C which is emitted into outer space until it reaches the earth’s surface.

Meanwhile, the core temperature of the sun reaches 15-20 million degrees Celsius. It also emits large enough energy waves in the form of electromagnetic waves. These waves consist of visible light waves, microwaves, X-rays, infrared rays, gamma rays, and ultraviolet rays.

The source of solar energy comes from fusion reactions that occur in the sun’s core. The fusion reaction itself is a combination of hydrogen atoms to become helium. This reaction produces enormous energy.

For Sinaumed’s who are still in grade 1 of elementary school, they can deepen their knowledge about animals with the following government-issued package books.

1. The Core of the Sun

The innermost part of the sun is the sun’s core. There, fusion reactions occur as a source of solar energy. The temperature reaches 15,000,000 degrees Celsius. The energy generated from the fusion reaction will be distributed to the outermost layer, then it will also be emitted into outer space.

2. Photosphere

The photosphere is part of the sun’s surface. This layer emits light so that it can provide illumination in everyday life. The temperature reaches 16,000 ⁰ C. Its thickness reaches approximately 500 km.

3. Chromosphere

The chromosphere is the layer above the photosphere. Its function is as the sun’s atmosphere. Its thickness reaches 16,000 km with a temperature of approximately 9,800 ⁰ C. It looks like a red band around the moon during a total solar eclipse.

4. Corona

The corona is the outermost layer of the sun’s atmosphere. Its temperature reaches 1,000,000 ⁰ C. It has a grayish color which is caused by the ionization of the atoms due to the very high temperature. The corona will appear during a total solar eclipse.

This is because almost all of the sun’s light is covered by the moon. It looks like a crown with a gray color.

The sun is not always healthy, just like the earth. He also experienced distractions due to his own activities. Here are some disturbances that occur in the sun.

1. Sun Spots

Sun bitnik is a very strong magnetic field that appears in an area on the sun. These spots are holes on the sun’s surface. From these holes, hot gas is ejected from the core of the sun. This causes interference with radio wave telecommunications on the surface of the earth.

2. Clots in the Photosphere (Granulation)

The clumps in the photosphere appear due to the propagation of hot gas from the sun’s core to the surface. This causes, the surface of the sun is not flat but lumpy.

3. The Flame of the Sun

The solar flare is a gas distribution from the edge of the sun’s chromosphere. The flame tongue is also often referred to as the prominence or protuberant. Its altitude can reach 10,000 km. It is composed of protons and electrons of hydrogen atoms moving at high speed.

The mass of these particles can reach the earth’s surface. Before entering the earth, the emission of these particles is restrained by the earth’s magnetic field (Van Allen belts). This causes the speed of the particles to decrease and move toward the poles. Then, these particles will glow which is known as an aurora.

The scattering of these particles disrupts the radio wave communication system. Aurora itself is in the southern hemisphere called the Aurora Australis, while the aurora in the northern hemisphere is called the Aurora Borealis.

4. Explosion ( Flares )

Flares are gas explosions that occur above the surface of the sun. It can cause interference to radio communication systems. This is because, gas eruptions consist of electrically charged gas particles.

Benefits of Sunlight for Animals

Sunlight gives life to every living thing on earth. Animals are no exception. Launching from various sources on the internet, here are the benefits of sunlight for animals.

1. Source of Vitamin D

Animals need vitamin D, just like humans. The sun provides free intake of these vitamins in an easy way. It is enough for animals to be in the sun, so vitamin D for the body will be fulfilled. Thus, body processes driven by calcium can be assisted, for example the formation of strong teeth and bones.

2. Warms the Body

Reptiles really need the sun’s heat to warm themselves. The goal is to survive.

3. Maintain Temperature Balance

In order to keep the body temperature warm and stable, the animals will take advantage of sunlight in their daily activities. Animals are grouped into two based on the effect of temperature on the environment, namely homoithermic and poikilothermic.

Homoitherms are warm-blooded animals, while poikilotherms are cold-blooded animals. Both types of animals need sunlight. The goal is to develop adaptations, especially in regulating body temperature.

4. Streamlining the Digestive Process of Food

Sunlight can help animals to expedite the digestive process of food in the body. This is because sunlight contains heat.

5. Speed ​​up the Adaptation Process

Animals often move from place to place to survive. He must quickly adapt. With the help of sunlight, they can adapt to their environment quickly.

6. Provide Food

Animals are classified into three based on the type of food. The three types are herbivores (plant eaters), carnivores (meat eaters), and omnivores (meat and plant eaters).

Herbivorous animals need the sun’s energy the most. This is because the sun helps the growth and development of plants. When plants thrive, herbivorous animals will not lack food.

For Sinaumed’s who are still in grade 3 of elementary school, they can deepen their knowledge about animals with the following government-issued package books.

7. Provide oxygen

Sunlight is one of the raw materials for photosynthesis in plants. If the intake of sunlight is sufficient for plants to photosynthesize. Thus, the oxygen used to breathe animals and humans will be met.

Benefits of the Sun for Humans

Sunlight is needed by humans, especially for their physical needs. Without sunlight, humans will find it difficult to move. The following are the benefits of sunlight for human life which are summarized from various sources on the internet.

1. Being a Source of Vitamin D

Vitamin D is needed by the body. Every human being must receive sun exposure of approximately 4,000 to 9,000 IU/day or about 10 to 20 minutes every day. Vitamin D is very useful for the development of bones and teeth as well as helps the absorption of calcium in the body.

2. Become a Source of Information

Sunlight is the main and free source of lighting for life on earth. The presence of the sun allows us to see without the need for electricity. It is also a source of lighting at night. You do this by storing light in solar panels.

3. Become a source of electric power

Sunlight is one source of solar power. Currently, some Indonesian people have switched to using independent sources of electrical energy, namely solar power with solar panels.

4. Lose Weight

UV rays emitted by the sun can convert cholesterol into vitamin D. Cholesterol is certainly not good for the body. It can cause various diseases and lead to excess body weight. By basking in the sun, we will get many benefits, for example, getting vitamin D while losing weight.

5. Increase Body Immunity

Based on research conducted by Georgetown University Medical Center on solar thermal energy. The research found that sunlight can provide energy to T cells which are one of the cells with an important role in the human immune system.

6. Become a source of heat

Sunlight is a natural source of heat needed by humans in their daily needs. For example to warm themselves, drying clothes, making salted fish, and other activities.

Benefits of the Sun for Plants

Sunlight benefits every living thing on earth. Animals, plants and humans depend on sunlight for their lives. Here are the benefits of sunlight for plants.

1. Helps the Photosynthesis Process

In the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI), photosynthesis is the utilization of sunlight energy (artificial sunlight) by green leafy plants or bacteria to convert carbon dioxide and water into carbohydrates. Photosynthesis occurs when there is sunlight and carbon dioxide.

Plants that carry out photosynthesis have stomata which will absorb carbon dioxide. Meanwhile, chlorophyll absorbs light. At the same time, water from the soil will be absorbed by the roots to be carried to the leaves.

Photosynthesis itself aims to convert water and carbon dioxide into oxygen and hydrogen. Hydrogen is needed by plants for the process of growth and development. Meanwhile, oxygen is released to the outside.

2. Assist Agriculture and Plantation

Sunlight is very influential in agriculture or plantations. This relates to the process of photosynthesis carried out by plants. If plants get enough sunlight then growth will occur to the maximum. Thus, these plants will be utilized by humans and animals.

3. Adding Nutrition

Sunlight is the best source of nutrition for plants. These nutritional needs can easily be obtained through sunlight. It can help the process of growing sprouts to be richer in nutrients.

4. Helps the Growth Process

The sun is useful for activating chlorophyll, warming seeds, giving a green color, keeping the temperature stable, accelerating the growth process in plants, and so on.

Disorders Arising from Lack of Exposure to Sunlight

Humans will experience various disorders when they lack exposure to sunlight. The following are the disorders experienced by humans which have been summarized from the klikdokter.com page.

1. Depressive Disorders

Exposure to sunlight can increase the release of the hormone serotonin. This hormone acts as a mood enhancer and helps a person feel calm and focused.

Lack of sunlight can cause serotonin levels to decrease. This condition increases the risk of major depression.

2. Insomnia

Lack of sunlight can cause loss of circadian rhythms (the body’s internal clock). This results in disturbed night sleep. This condition if it occurs continuously will trigger insomnia.

3. Heart Problems

Vitamin D produced by the body functions as a self-protector from various types of diseases. One of them, heart disease. Without sunlight, the body will have difficulty producing vitamin D. Even though ultraviolet (UV) rays play a role in regulating blood pressure. Therefore, vitamin D deficiency can increase the risk of cardiovascular problems.

4. Cancer

Excess sunlight can cause skin cancer. However, sufficient amount of sun is useful for preventing cancer. People who live in areas with less sunlight are more likely to suffer from certain types of cancer. This is inversely proportional to people who live in places that are exposed to more sunlight.

Cancers caused by a lack of sunlight include ovarian cancer, colon cancer, pancreatic cancer, Hodgkin’s lymphoma, prostate cancer, and so on.

5. Rickets and Osteomalacia

Rickets is a disorder that causes weak and soft bones. This is caused by a deficiency of vitamin D. In adults, the condition of soft bones and break easily is called osteomalacia.

For Sinaumed’s who are still in grade 5 of elementary school, they can deepen their knowledge about animals with the following government-issued package books.

6. Arthritis and Fibromyalgia

Arthritis or fibromyalgia can occur due to a lack of sunlight. This is related to the vitamin D that is produced. Adults who don’t get enough sun will often feel aches in the muscles and bones or feel a little stiff in the morning.

Nutrients in the form of calcium and collagen can work together to form bones. However, without adequate intake of vitamin D it will disrupt the process. As a result, the bone can actually ache and a throbbing sensation may appear.

7. Multiple Sclerosis

The risk of multiple sclerosis (MS) can occur due to lack of sunlight which is also related to a lack of vitamin D. Multiple sclerosis is an autoimmune disease that occurs when the body’s immune system attacks healthy cells.

In a person with MS, the immune system attacks the cells located in myelin, the protective sheath that surrounds the nerves in the brain and spinal cord. Damage to the myelin sheath will interfere with nerve signals from the brain to other parts of the body. the damage can cause symptoms that affect the brain, eyes, and spinal cord.

8. Osteoporosis

Vitamin D, which comes from sunlight, plays a big role in maintaining bone health. With sufficient levels, vitamin D can maintain bone health, prevent osteoporosis and other bone disorders.

Book Recommendations & Related Articles

Benefits of Solar Thermal Energy – We certainly know that there are many benefits of solar thermal energy. As the largest source of energy in the world, the sun has provided many benefits to the life of living things on earth, such as humans, animals, plants, and even the planet itself.

According to the Big Indonesian Dictionary or KBBI, the sun can be interpreted as a star which is the center of the solar system of the Milky Way galaxy. As the center of the solar system, the sun naturally also plays a role in emitting heat and light to Earth and other planets. The sun is also known to have a large content of hydrogen and helium.

As human civilization progresses, solar thermal energy begins to be used for various purposes in everyday life, such as industry, households, and offices. It doesn’t stop there, here are some of the benefits of heat energy from sunlight for human life that you need to know. Come on, see the following reviews!

A. The Benefits of Solar Thermal Energy for Humans

1. Solar electricity

The sun is one of the energy that will never run out or can be said as renewable energy. So do not be surprised if the first benefit of solar energy is that it can be used as an energy source for electricity. Electricity from the sun itself is known as solar electricity.

By utilizing solar thermal energy as a source of electricity, this allows you to have an electricity supply that is safe and good for the environment. We know for ourselves that so far humans still depend on coal to power electricity. Meanwhile, it is believed that solar energy electricity will provide extraordinary benefits for humans such as for homes, buildings and factories.

2. Give light

The next benefit of solar thermal energy is that it can be used as a source of lighting for humans. If there is no solar energy in the form of light, of course the world will be engulfed in darkness. This will make all mankind unable to see anything in the surrounding environment.

The light source that comes from the sun is certainly very different from the lighting provided by the lamp. The lamp itself can turn on if it is powered by electricity first. Therefore, along with the use of cheaper solar panel technology, you can use it as a source of natural light in the morning and energy reserves for lights at night.

3. Solar vehicles

In everyday life, humans cannot be separated from the role of vehicles to move. One of the benefits of solar energy that is being discussed today is, of course, solar powered vehicles. Solar vehicles are believed to be the most widely used mode of transportation in the future.

However, the use of this solar vehicle itself is still not widely owned today. This is because solar power is not yet widely available to many people. Therefore, the way that can be done to realize this vehicle is of course to make changes to the source of electricity, from coal to renewable energy such as the sun.

B. The Benefits of Solar Energy for Health

After knowing the benefits that solar thermal energy can provide for human life, the following will explain a series of benefits of solar thermal energy for human health, including:

1. Source of Vitamin D

Not only does it only have benefits as renewable energy, solar thermal energy can actually be one of the nutrients needed by the body. Based on research conducted by The Institute OF Medicine, a person should always receive vitamin D intake of 4000-9000 IU/day or about 10 to 20 minutes every day.

As an excellent source of nutrition for the body, the sun’s heat energy is also known as the sunshine vitamin or in the world of health it is known as vitamin D. Human skin basically has a type of cholesterol which has a function as a builder of vitamin D. When this compound is exposed to UV radiation -B from the sun, the compound will turn into vitamin D.

When compared to vitamin D that comes from food or even supplements, vitamin D can circulate twice as long in the human body. It’s just that, the amount of vitamin D that can be absorbed by the body really depends on various factors, such as age, season, sunscreen, even clothing.

2. Strengthens bones

The sun’s heat energy is very well used to strengthen bones. Vitamin D itself is known to have an important role in regulating calcium as well as making phosphorus levels in the blood more stable. Basically, the human body needs very good vitamin D to be used in absorbing calcium

A child must have high levels of vitamin D. This is because low levels of vitamin D in children will cause rickets. Rickets itself is a disorder of growing bones that causes calcium to fail to be stored in the bones.

The same thing can happen to adults. Lack of vitamin D levels will have the potential to cause someone to get osteomalacia or softening of the bones. In addition, many people are also known to have osteoporosis due to a lack of vitamin D in the body.

3. Improves Mood

Basking in the sun for 10 to 15 minutes per day is also very good for preventing stress and depression. Of course you can use this when you want to start the day to be more enthusiastic about your activities and work. Someone who has decreased sun exposure is known to be more susceptible to stress and depression.

The benefits of solar thermal energy are basically to support the release of serotonin and endorphins. These two hormones are closely related to mood so they can make a person happier. No wonder, if sunlight is effective in providing overall calm so as to avoid depression.

4. Improve Sleep Quality

Besides being able to make blood circulation in the human body smoother, solar thermal energy is also known to be very beneficial for improving one’s sleep quality. When the retina of the eye is exposed to sunlight, the body will begin to produce serotonin.

As Healthline wrote, a small study conducted in 2014 showed that office workers experienced improved sleep quality when they received lots of natural light or solar thermal energy. This of course can help the body regulate the internal clock so that it effectively improves the quality of one’s sleep.

5. Lowers Blood Pressure

The second benefit of solar energy for human health is that it can be used as a way to lower blood pressure. When the skin gets the sun’s heat energy, a compound called nitric oxide is released into the blood vessels. This process itself is effective enough to help lower blood pressure levels. This in turn will also greatly help to reduce the risk of heart attack and stroke.

According to a journal published by the Journal of Investigate Dermatology Suggest, exposure to UVA rays produced by sunlight has the benefit of dilating blood vessels. The dilation of blood vessels itself can be understood to provide space for blood so it can flow normally.

6. Prevent Cancer

As a natural source of vitamin D, solar thermal energy is known to be very good for human health, such as preventing certain cancers. Several studies have shown that exposure to natural heat energy or sunlight can reduce the risk of colorectal, prostate, breast cancer and non-Hodgkin’s lymphoma.

7. Lose weight

The sun’s heat energy that exposes UV rays is proven to be able to convert cholesterol in the body into vitamin D. Cholesterol that is too high in the body can make the body have excessive body weight. Therefore, sunbathing will be perfect for those of you who are or want to lose weight.

8. Increase Body Immunity

According to research conducted by researchers from the Georgetown University Medical Center regarding solar thermal energy, it is known that based on a special mechanism, sunlight can provide energy to T cells. T cells themselves are one of the cells that have a central role in the human immune system.

The discovery itself has proven that the sun’s thermal energy can be directly used to activate immune cells through accelerated cell movement. Cells basically need to move to do their job, for example, to reach a site of infection or regulate the body’s immune response.

B. The Benefits of Solar Thermal Energy for Animals

In general, solar thermal energy has the benefit of providing warmth to all living things on earth. Therefore, all creatures that live in this world are very dependent on energy from the sun. The sun can be said to be an important energy for the survival of all living things on earth.

Well, here are some of the benefits of solar thermal energy for animals, including the following:

1. Warms the animal’s body in order to survive. This is especially for reptile-type animals such as crocodiles, snakes and lizards.

2. As a source of vitamin D. Just like humans, animals also need vitamin D and the sun is a natural source to get this vitamin.

3. Some animals take advantage of the heat from the sun to help expedite the process of digesting food.

4. Keep the animal’s body temperature warm and stable.

5. The sun helps the process of photosynthesis of plants which are a source of food for animals. Helps the growth of the animal’s body to be faster.

6. Some animals need sunlight to accelerate the process of animal adaptation to their environment.

7. As a source of lighting to find prey and food. As a guide for flying animals. Regulates sleep cycles.

C. The Benefits of Solar Heat Energy for Plants

A plant or plant is known to need solar thermal energy in order to continue to reproduce. The sun has a very important role in maintaining the temperature or air temperature to remain stable. If the air temperature is unstable, it can make the plants wither quickly and cannot grow optimally.

Plants that are at an air temperature that is too low will result in the evaporation process taking longer. This will ultimately have a direct impact on the survival of other creatures, such as humans and animals.

Therefore, the following are some of the benefits of solar thermal energy for plants, including:

1. Helping the process of photosynthesis which is useful for producing food for plants.

2. Helps the process of plant growth as a whole.

3. As the best source of nutrition for plants.

4. Maintain plant temperature to be more stable and balanced.

5. Warms the seeds on plants.

6. Activate the chlorophyll contained in plants.

7. Gives green color to plants.

8. Helping the growth of flowers and leaves, plants exposed to sunlight will quickly flower and grow tall.

9. Helping the process of growing sprouts to become richer in nutrients.

Thus the benefits of solar thermal energy for humans, animals and plants. Based on the explanation above, we can conclude that the existence of the sun has a very important role for all living things on Earth. This is because the sun can be said to be the source of life for planet Earth and other planets.

Without the sun, planet Earth would have temperatures unusable for life, not even by bacteria or microorganisms. If the sun suddenly does not emit its light, this can cause changes in planet Earth’s air temperature to drop drastically.

The earth’s temperature will not drop to 0 degrees Celsius (0C) immediately, because the Earth still stores heat from solar radiation from the time/time when the sun still emits its rays. It takes a very long time for the Earth’s temperature to drop to 0 0C. However, as long as that happens the cycle of life on Earth will be disrupted until it finally disappears before Earth’s temperature reaches zero.

This is because the absence of sunlight will cause plants to be unable to carry out the process of photosynthesis, which converts carbon dioxide and water into oxygen and glucose. If the sun stops shining, then the process of photosynthesis will stop. As a result, plants cannot produce the glucose or oxygen needed by animals and humans.

Benefits of Gotong Royong – Who doesn’t know what mutual cooperation is? Indonesian people are certainly familiar with this one verb. Because, the Indonesian people themselves are famous for their hospitality and good nature that likes to help. So, what exactly is the meaning of gotong royong?

Mutual cooperation is one of the characteristics of the Indonesian people, especially Bulukumba. In accordance with what is stated in the 3rd Pancasila precept, namely the unity of Indonesia. The behavior of gotong royong or mutual assistance has existed and been owned by the Indonesian people since ancient times. Gotong royong is a national and cultural personality that is inherent and rooted in people’s lives.

Meaning of Mutual Cooperation

Gotong royong is an activity carried out jointly and has a voluntary nature. So that the activities carried out can run smoothly, light, and also easy. One example of what can be done in mutual cooperation is building public facilities, cleaning the village environment, or community service.

This mutual cooperation attitude should be shared by all elements and layers of society in Indonesia. Because, by having this awareness, all levels of society will find it easier to carry out all activities by mutual cooperation.

That way, all the things that will be done will be easier and also quickly completed as well as smoother and more advanced. Not only that, with the awareness of all levels of society in implementing the attitude of mutual cooperation, an increasingly close brotherhood relationship will be created.

As the times progress, many cultural values ​​enter and become a part of the life of Indonesian society. In addition, people’s lives gradually began to change. From an agrarian economy to an industrial economy. Today, the industrial economy is more developed and advanced. Therefore, many living arrangements are based on economic considerations. So that many people who have a materialistic nature and the value of mutual cooperation that used to be very attached to it are now starting to fade.

Understanding Gotong Royong According to Experts

1. According to KBBI

The definition of gotong royong according to KBBI is cooperation or mutual help, and mutual assistance among members or a community

2. According to Koentjaraningrat

Gotong royong is a collaboration, where a person is said to have faith if he loves his brother as he loves himself.

3. According to Sakjoyo and Pudjiwati Sakjoyo

They revealed that gotong royong is a tradition of mutual help between people in various fields of social activity. Whether it’s based on neighbor relations, kinship, and based on practical efficiency and there are also other cooperative activities.

4. According to Koentjaraningrat

He revealed that gotong royong is a concept that is closely related to the life of people who work as farmers in an agrarian society. Gotong royong is a system for deploying additional personnel outside the family to fill deficiencies in farming production activities.

5. According to Mubyarto

Gotong royong is a joint activity to achieve a common goal.

Benefits of Gotong Royong

The following are some of the benefits we can get if we apply this attitude to social life.

1. So that the environment around us can look cleaner, more comfortable, and more beautiful

2. A sense of solidarity can be established within the community

3. In order for our life in society to be better with mutual cooperation

4. General activities or activities can be completed more quickly without the need to spend a lot of RT/RW funds and cash. If it is in the form of physical development, of course with mutual cooperation it will greatly save the budget. This is because the costs that were previously for labor will be reduced because these activities are carried out in mutual cooperation.

5. With gotong royong, brotherhood and togetherness among citizens will be tighter. All neighbors know other neighbours, officials know workers, traders know drivers, the rich know neighbors who are less affluent, and so on.

6. The security of the environment around the house is safer, because all residents already know each other. So if later there are suspicious people entering residential areas, it will be easier for residents to detect them.

7. Peace and serenity in social life will be felt more, because all residents already know each other.

8. Mutual cooperation knows no difference. So when it will be done, everything feels the same.

Types of Mutual Cooperation

You need to understand that gotong royong is divided into several types, according to what is being done. Here are some types of mutual cooperation that you need to know.

1. Community Service

Community service is one of the activities or activities carried out together in the surrounding community. This activity is a form that can increase the sense of mutual help between people and mutual care.

Community service is usually carried out when there is a cleaning of the neighborhood or when there is an event on August 17th. With community service, we will get to know our neighbours, RT/RW, and local residents where we live. Of course this can foster a sense of mutual care between neighbors and residents.

2. Disaster Response

The second type of mutual cooperation is disaster response. Where this activity is a process of response from the community to work together in dealing with a disaster or calamity. Disaster response usually starts with small things such as caring for the surrounding community who are experiencing difficulties, helping others, and so on.

3. Deliberation

Not many of us know that deliberation is a type of mutual cooperation. Why is that? Because deliberation is a way or media to reach consensus or agreement. With deliberations, the community can gather and discuss the problems being faced. Then from this activity, an agreement will emerge regarding the solution to be carried out.

With deliberations, the community can also exchange ideas, thoughts and opinions that aim to reach a consensus. The hope is that the agreement will benefit all parties involved.

4. Great Harvest

The main harvest is usually done during the harvest season. This activity is a condition of the harvest season on a fairly large scale from all agricultural fields. Usually, the harvest season is done twice a year or depending on the farm.

During the harvest season, usually the community will work together to help with the harvesting process. Later they will share some of the harvest to the people who help. So, this will certainly increase the sense of caring and sharing between each other.

5. Study Together

Studying together is also a type of mutual cooperation. Where in this activity students and students carry out a collaboration in solving a problem or material that is considered difficult. By studying together, it will be easier for us to understand material that we think is difficult. Because, we can ask directly to friends who already understand.

Characteristics of Gotong Royong

The following are some of the characteristics of mutual cooperation that you need to understand.

1. Gotong-royong is one of the basic characteristics that is a pre-eminence of the Indonesian people and is not shared by citizens of other countries.

2. With gotong royong, many people have a high sense of caring and togetherness is created in every activity carried out together.

3. Has a noble value from ancient times to the present for generations.

4. Gotong royong highly upholds human values ​​and cares for others. In gotong royong activities, all activities and work will be carried out together. Without discriminating or looking at the position and degree of a person.

5. Gotong royong also has the meaning of helping each other to achieve harmony and also happiness in living life in society.

6. Mutual cooperation activities are also carried out voluntarily. So don’t expect anything in return.

Collaborative Goals

One of the goals of having gotong royong is its value. Where there will be enthusiasm that can be manifested in the form of individual actions or behavior. They will unite to carry out an activity together for the common good without expecting anything in return or reward.

The following are the values ​​contained in mutual cooperation activities, including:

1. Togetherness

In gotong royong activities, it will reflect the togetherness that is created in the community. That is, the community voluntarily and jointly helps other people as well as for the public interest that can be used together.

2. Unity

Togetherness that is created from mutual cooperation activities is also able to give birth to unity among citizens. With this unity, the community will become closer, stronger, and able to deal with problems that arise in their neighborhood.

3. Willing to Sacrifice

With gotong royong activities, it will foster an attitude of self-sacrifice. The sacrifice in question can be anything. Such as energy, time, ideas, even money. All sacrifices made purely for the common good. Communities are willing to make sacrifices and put aside personal interests to meet the needs of the common community.

4. Please Help

One of the goals of gotong royong is to foster an attitude of mutual assistance between communities. Where people want to help and help others in need. It is their help that will benefit others and also themselves.

5. Socialization

By doing these activities, people become aware that we are social beings. Where activities help each other can make people know each other. So that the socialization process can be maintained.

The Goals of Mutual Cooperation for Self and Society

1. The purpose of mutual cooperation is to invite the whole community to always work together in order to increase togetherness. Because, as a social community, of course we cannot live without the help of others. In a sense, we will always need other people in our lives.

2. Working together is also able to make the community more cohesive and can get to know each other. With these activities, it will be easier for people to help each other. For example, when we are going to build a house, harvest agricultural products, work on the fields, help neighbors who are having a celebration, and also help each other in advancing the country. In this way, all the tasks we will do will definitely feel lighter and easier to complete.

3. Making all work and any activity easier and lighter.

4. Creating unity and integrity among citizens.

5. Can save expenses or budget.

6. Can complete a job more quickly and efficiently.

7. This activity is able to strengthen the bonds of brotherhood among members of the community. Where they can gather with anyone who is in the implementation of mutual cooperation.

Efforts to Preserve Mutual Cooperation

This is one of the hopes of all community members so that the spirit of gotong royong will always exist and be sustainable. Don’t let it fade away with the advancement of the times in the digital era. Therefore, we need some efforts to preserve the mutual cooperation behavior so that it can survive. Here are some efforts we can do to preserve this attitude.

1.In preserving the attitude of gotong royong, we need the awareness of all parties or members of the community to have an attitude of being willing to sacrifice for the public interest.

2. Reducing and minimizing some of the assumptions that reveal that mutual cooperation behavior is not an important thing to do. In this way, it is possible that the community will be motivated and made aware that instilling an attitude of mutual cooperation is important and needs to be done.

3. There is no community that uses certain things or cases, for example Race, to ride it with mutual cooperation behavior. If this is done, it will hurt and tarnish the values ​​contained in the mutual cooperation attitude.

4. Reducing the distance that exists between layers or members of society. With this, of course, when mutual cooperation is carried out, each individual has the potential to feel awkward.

5. We need the government’s role to always voice the importance of mutual cooperation.

6. The government can set an example for the community so that they always carry out the habit of mutual cooperation by being active directly in the field.

7. The government needs to give gifts or rewards to certain parties who always want to preserve the culture of mutual cooperation. If this is done, it will provide motivation and enthusiasm so that people always preserve this culture.

Obstacles of Mutual Cooperation in the All-Digital Age

Making good things and perpetuating mutual cooperation is not easy to do. One of them is to maintain the spirit of mutual cooperation in the community. The following are some of the obstacles that may be encountered related to the attitude of mutual cooperation in society.

There is a response that reveals that the Indonesian nation’s gotong royong is mutually beneficial. While this is now something that is difficult to obtain or obtain. Where now, the majority of people will do mutual cooperation if there will be rewards that will be received later.

The increasing trend of increasing the number of cases of violence and other conflicts related to religion has become a separate record for the Indonesian people. We need to understand that with this conflict, it will become a separate threat in the future for the integrity of our nation.

1. The values ​​and characteristics of mutual cooperation that have existed and been developed since the beginning have not been thoroughly explained. So that it will have an impact on students’ understanding which is only half about this mutual cooperation attitude.

2. There is a lack of understanding on the part of the community that it is no longer relevant to use the principle of gotong royong. So that all parties in society consider this to be something that is right and not wrong.

3. The social feeling that was once ingrained in Indonesian society has now begun to fade. Both in urban and even in rural areas. Maybe in urban areas we can still understand. Because, they have experienced a fairly heavy lifestyle. Without money, they will be miserable and even starve. Meanwhile, living in the countryside still has the convenience of surviving, even though it is included in the class of people who cannot afford it.

4. Lack of role from the government itself. Where they never go directly to the field or into the community to improve and awaken the social spirit that has long faded.

Those are some explanations about the importance of gotong royong in Indonesian society. Do you still maintain the attitude of gotong royong where you live?

In recent years, aromatherapy candles have become very popular because they claim to relieve stress and anxiety. Aromatherapy fragrances come from essential oils that are scientifically proven to provide health benefits. However, there is no research that proves that aromatherapy candles can relieve colds in babies.

Are you a fan of aromatherapy candles? For those who love this product, aromatherapy candles have become the solution to many problems at home. Smell an unpleasant odor in the room? You can light aromatherapy candles. Or are you in a bad mood? Aromatherapy candles can also lift your mood in an instant.

Many people are very fond, some even obsessed with using scented candles to relieve stress. However, there are also those who argue that scented candles can be bad for health. Why is that? Check out the review below.

As the name implies, aroma candles are a type of candle that is mixed with essential oils or essential oils to produce fragrance. Well, the fragrance that is released is claimed to be able to overcome stress, anxiety and other health conditions.

Actually, the health benefits obtained from aroma candles are from the essential oil content . There have been many studies that reveal the health benefits of essential oils . The aromatherapy content in the candle will evaporate when burned and then fill the air in the room.

Benefits of Aromatherapy Candles for Health

Fatigue and stress problems are an integral part of everyday life, especially for people who work in big cities. That is why, many are then looking for various ways to relieve fatigue, one of which is by using aromatherapy.

Doing meditation with aromatherapy, or simply relaxing and resting in a quiet room with an aroma candle is an easy, inexpensive and effective way to relieve stress. When viewed from this side, aroma candles can be said to provide positive benefits for health. Because, health does not only include physical, but also mental health.

Launching from Medical News Today , a study revealed that the content of essential oils in aromatherapy candles can reduce cortisol levels in the body. The hormone cortisol is a hormone involved in the stress response in the body. When the levels are reduced automatically the risk of stress also decreases.

Another study published in the National Library of Medicine explained that bergamot essential oil, which is often mixed into aroma candles, can actually overcome negative emotions, fatigue, and cortisol levels. When viewed from its effect, aroma candles may have the potential to slightly relieve colds in babies. However, there is no specific research that reveals the benefits of aroma candles for treating colds in babies.

However, what is known for certain, aroma candles can indeed have a calming effect, so that it makes a person more relaxed when inhaling them. Unfortunately, with the increasing popularity of aromatherapy candles, now many aroma candles are circulating whose fragrances are not derived from essential oils and many are made from artificial fragrances. Exposure to artificial fragrances needs to be watched out for because it can actually cause migraines, headaches to asthma attacks.

It can be difficult to tell which candles contain artificial fragrances and which contain only essential oils. Therefore, you have to be more observant when you want to buy scented candles. Also, it’s best to talk to your doctor before using scented candles for baby colds to ensure safety and effectiveness.

Dangers of Aromatherapy Candles for Health

Even though it is considered to have a positive impact on mental health, it turns out that aromatherapy candles also have a negative impact. Experts say that scented candles can harm your health as well as the environment.

Why is that? It turns out that aroma wax can produce toxins that harm the body when inhaled. However, of course not all types of scented candles are like that. Therefore, you should start being critical and vigilant, and need to examine in more detail about the content of the wax ingredients used to make these aromatherapy candles.

In several developed countries, such as England, companies that produce aroma candles have been asked by the government to reduce emissions from these candles. In addition, the government also asked aroma candle companies to warn consumers about the negative impact of their products on health. This is quite a concern in England because quite a lot of people there routinely use scented candles to perfume their rooms and homes.

As additional information, most aroma candles are made from paraffin wax , which has been studied to release chemicals that are harmful to lung health. Several other types of aroma candles also use a metal-core wick, which can also release toxins that are harmful to lung health.

In addition, inhaling aromatherapy is also not good for people with a history of asthma because it can trigger an attack. However, the use of scented candles for people who do not have previous respiratory problems is relatively safe. Keep in mind that scented candles are still a combustion product that creates smoke, so scented candles should not be used in tightly closed (no ventilation) or confined spaces.

You need to make sure you don’t fall asleep or leave the room when the scented candle is burning because it can trigger a fire. Do not light aroma candles near flammable objects. Candles should be placed out of reach of children. Also avoid burning scented candles for more than two hours. Make sure the candle is always clean, including from the remaining burning wick from previous use.

Several types of aromatherapy should be avoided by pregnant women. Pregnant women who want to use aromatherapy should first consult with their obstetrician. The use of aromatherapy candles that cause tumors or cancer on the other hand cannot be scientifically proven. However, some “naughty” aromatherapy candles often claim that aromatherapy candles can treat cancer. This is also not true.

Safe Ways to Use Aromatherapy Candles

So that you can still get the benefits of aromatherapy candles for your mental health without disturbing your body’s health, choose aromatherapy candles made from natural wax , such as soybeans. These natural aromatherapy candles emit much less soot and harmful chemicals than those made from paraffin wax .

Then, also choose aromatherapy candles that have a short wick and no metal core to reduce the production of air pollution and soot. Always check the ingredients listed on the label and do a search whether these substances are harmful to health.

One more thing, you also have to limit the time you use aromatherapy candles to reduce the amount of chemicals circulating in the room. Apart from that, there are actually other alternatives to be able to fill the room with aromatherapy besides using candles. Some of them are by using the essence oil directly or a special aromatherapy steam device. Both tend to be safer for your lung health.

How to Keep Aromatherapy Candles Lasting

Many candles with a scent that you like have a price that is not cheap. Therefore, it’s only natural that you would want them to last longer. When you need it, you can grab a lighter and enjoy its relaxing and pleasant aroma.

The following will explain how to make aromatherapy candles last longer, but you still have to understand that there will be times when they will run out too. To make aromatherapy candles last longer, here are some tips you can do:

1. Choose the Right Candle

In fact, aromatherapy candles with soy ingredients have a lower melting point than paraffin wax. Therefore, if you choose soy-based waxes, they can last up to 50 percent longer. Plus, if you are smart enough to choose one with an interesting scent, you can enjoy the fragrance even when the candle is not lit.

2. Put it in the Right Place

Don’t place a candle on a fireplace, near a fire, near a window that gets a lot of sunlight, or near a radiator. This is because warmth can speed up burning and shorten the life of aromatherapy candles. Also avoid lighting it in a drafty area as this can result in an uneven burner.

3. Don’t Turn On Too Shortly

Burning aromatherapy candles for just a few minutes at a time won’t do you any good. In the end, you’ll only melt the wax in the center near the wick while the outer edges won’t burn, because they don’t have time to get hot and melt. It really is just a waste of wax. So, make sure you always burn aromatherapy candles until all the top layers of the wax melt evenly.

4. Cut the Axis

When you first buy an aromatherapy candle, the wick will be just the right length. However, when the candle goes out sometimes mold can get there which means the candle will burn faster and produce more soot. Cutting the wick reduces the height of the flame, ensuring the candle burns more slowly and lasts longer.

For pillar candles, you can use scissors, but if the candle is in a container, it’s best to use wick trimmers. This will ensure the wick is cut evenly, not crookedly, and the wick trimmer has a small cup to ensure the trimmings don’t fall into the wax.

5. Align the Axis

To keep the burn even, you need to make sure the wick is straight up and down after each burn. If it looks leaning to one side, give it a quick slight adjustment with your finger, once it’s cool.

6. Sprinkle a Little Salt

This is one of the secrets to making aromatherapy candles last. Add a pinch of salt to the melted wax after you blow it out, then stir quickly with a toothpick, chopsticks or whatever utensil you have. The salt will slow down the baking time during the next baking time.

7. Limit Burn Time For Four Hours

This is actually for security reasons. Some unlucky people have reported that aromatherapy candles can explode after being left burning for too long. Ignoring this means that you run the risk of not only losing the candle, but possibly the whole house and the things in it.

How To Choose Aromatherapy Candles

Aroma candles come in several types and are made from different materials. Therefore, we have listed the points that should be considered when choosing a scented candle. Please refer to the detailed explanation of each point below!

1. Choose an Aromatherapy Candle Based on the Type of Container

Scented candles can be grouped by the type of container. Some are packaged in tealight containers, votive , cans, and glass jars. Each type of container has its own advantages. What packaged aromatherapy candles are right for you?

a. Tealight: Has a Short Burning Time

If you want to enjoy a relaxing aromatherapy candle in a short time, you can choose the tealight type. This candle has the smallest size compared to other types of aroma candles. In addition, the light weight makes this type of candle often used as a floating candle .

Tealight scented candles have a burning time of around 4–6 hours. Therefore, this type is suitable for those of you who want to use aroma candles in the short term. Those of you who get bored easily with one type of candle scent can try tealight scented candles.

b. Votive: One of the Easiest Types to Find

Votive type scented candles are often used as prayer candles in churches. The short and thick shape makes the aroma last longer. Generally, this type of candle is sold without a holder , so you have to buy the container separately. However, now there are votive candles that are sold complete with the container. Votive scented candles are one of the easiest types of scented candles to find. In addition, this aromatherapy candle has a burning time that varies from 4-24 hours.

c. Cans or Glass Jars: Easy to Take Anywhere

Candles in tins or glass jars are no less popular. You can start a fire as soon as you open the lid without needing a candle holder. In addition, you can take it with you on business trips or traveling. That way, you can enjoy the aroma whenever you feel tired and need some relaxation.

However, you need to be careful because the container is prone to conduct heat. To prevent the table surface from getting hot or stained, you should use a base made of glass, brick or stone. You also have to make sure the base has a flat surface and doesn’t wobble easily when touched.

2. Know the Ingredients of Aromatherapy Candles

The spread of aroma and the burning time of aromatherapy candles really depends on the materials used. Well, this time we will introduce the types of materials commonly used in aromatherapy candles.

a. Paraffin Wax: Usually Affordable

The price of aromatherapy candles made from paraffin is cheaper than other aromatherapy candles. Paraffin candles are suitable for those of you who are trying aromatherapy candles for the first time. However, this candle will give off a distinctive odor that might interfere with the aromatherapy scent.

Paraffin wax also leaves a residue due to the low level of distillation quality. So, we don’t recommend using it too often because the chemical content is not good for the body.

b. Beeswax: Suitable for Use in Bedrooms or Bathrooms

Do you want to enjoy aromatherapy candles in the bedroom or bathroom? Choose aromatherapy candles made from beeswax . Beeswax is a natural ingredient that is often used in cosmetic and food products.

Aromatherapy candles made from beeswax are safe for health because they do not leave excessive soot or smoke. The candles produced by these bees also have a sweet aroma that will spread throughout the room when lit. Another plus is that this wax is difficult to melt at low temperatures, so it can be enjoyed longer. However, beeswax is usually sold at a high price.

c. Soy Wax: Long Lasting and Diffuses Fragrance Quickly

If you want the scent of the wax to spread faster, waxes with more ingredients are recommended. This aromatherapy candle can quickly spread the fragrance in the room. This is of course very useful, especially for those of you who don’t have much time to relax.

Soy wax also tends to be more durable, so it doesn’t run out quickly. This type of wax is made from 100% pure soybeans and is usually produced by hand. If the melt spills on furniture, the soot is not difficult to clean. Plus, this wax is known to be safe for your kids and pets.

d. Palm Wax: Creates a Bright Light

If you want an aromatherapy candle that produces a bright light, palm wax candles can be considered. This candle is made from pure palm oil, contains no chemicals, and produces no pollutants. In addition, the aroma is also durable, so you can enjoy it longer.

e. Gel Candle: Transparent and Can Be Used as Room Decoration

Gel candles are not only relaxing, they can also be used to beautify a room or home decor. Aromatherapy gel type candles are made from petroleum. The fragrances used are also specially formulated to dissolve in oil.

Those of you who like beauty and serenity will love this type of aromatherapy candle. This beautiful candle is suitable to be placed near the entrance, living room or bedroom. These candles are sometimes decorated with beautiful shells or dried flowers. So that the light, aroma and beauty can be enjoyed optimally, the decoration layer and the layer of the burning candle are usually separated.

f. Japanese Cottonseed, Rice, and Wax: Other Natural Waxes to Consider

Other natural ingredients that are sometimes used as a base for making aromatherapy candles are cottonseed, rice, and Japanese wax. These three ingredients are not used as the main ingredient. Even so, all three can still be taken into consideration because they have different advantages.

The advantage of cottonseed wax is that it does not pollute the air. Meanwhile, rice-based candles can be enjoyed for a long time despite their small size. How about candles made from Japanese wax? This type of wax has all the advantages of cottonseed and rice waxes.

Now, you already know the good and bad effects of aromatherapy candles for health. In addition, by being more careful in using it, you can get the positive benefits of aromatherapy for mental health, while still reducing the risk of experiencing lung problems due to chemicals produced through burning it. Hope it is useful.

America is known as a free nation. The people have the freedom to be themselves. They can explore themselves. How to dress is not regulated or bound by state rules. Simply put, the state does not interfere with the affairs of its people.

Every place in the world has a long history. Also the uniqueness of each. Likewise with America. To get to know the Americas better, Sinaumed’s can listen to the following explanation which has been summarized from various pages on the internet.

Astronomical Location of the Americas

The astronomical location of the Americas is at 83°N–55°S and 10°W–170°W. The determination of the astronomical position is obtained based on the location of the region in longitude and latitude. This location means that the American continent stretches from 83 ⁰ north latitude to 55 ⁰ south latitude. Also, longitude 10 ⁰ west to 170 ⁰ east.

The area of ​​the American continent is approximately 42,330,000 km ² . The area of ​​the Americas is approximately 28.5% of the total surface area of ​​the earth. The majority of the Americas are in the western hemisphere. However, vertically the American continent is located in the northern and southern regions of the earth. Therefore, its territory stretches from north latitude to south latitude.

The continent of America is bordered by water. To the north it is bordered by the Arctic Ocean. It is bordered on the east by the Atlantic Ocean, on the south by the Pacific Ocean, and on the west by the Pacific Ocean.

From the astronomical location of the Americas, it influences several things. Launching from the Tata Ruang.id page, following is the influence of the astronomical position of the American continent.

1. Climate

The climate on the American continent is not uniform. Some regions have different variations. Here are some climates that occur in the Americas.

• Wet tropical climate, covering Central America and parts of northern South America.
• Continental climate, covering the eastern part of the United States.
• Steppe climate, covering the eastern mountains of North America.
• The climate is arctic (cold), covering parts of Alaska and northern Canada.
• Desert climate, covering the western part of America.
• The climate is temperate, covering the coastal areas of Alaska and California.

2. Biodiversity

The American continent has biodiversity both in flora and fauna groups. Especially in the South America region. There are several natural varieties such as tropical rain forests, deserts and tundra which are formed due to their astronomical and geographical location.

3. Time Zone

In America there are several different time zones. The following is the division of time zones in the Americas.

• UTC-12, covers the outer islands of the United States.
• UTC-11, covers the territory of American Samoa, the outer islands of the United States.
• UTC-10, covers the territory of Hawaii (US) (Hawaii Time Zone).
• UTC-9, covering the territory of Alaska (US) (Alaska Time Zone).
• UTC-8, covering Canada, Mexico & United States (Pacific Time Zone),
• UTC-7, covers Canada, Mexico & United States (Mountain Time Zone).
• UTC-6 includes Chile, Ecuador, Honduras, Costa Rica, El Salvador, Guatemala, Nicaragua, Belize, Mexico, Canada & the United States (Central Time Zone).
• UTC-5, includes Colombia, Ecuador, Jamaica, Panama, Bahamas, Haiti, Peru, Cuba, Canada & United States (Eastern Time Zone).
• UTC-4.30, covering Venezuela.
• UTC-4, includes Brazil, Paraguay, Bolivia, Chile, Barbados, Aruba, Bermuda, Dominica, Guyana, Guadaloupe, Antigua & Barbuda, Saint Kitts & Nevis, Trinidad & Tobago, Saint Lucia, Canada & the United States (Atlantic Time Zone) .
• UTC-3, includes Brazil, Uruguay, Argentina, Suriname.
• UTC-2, includes Brazil.

The Americas have native inhabitants, namely Eskimos and Indians. Then, came immigrants from countries in Europe, such as England, Italy, France, and Spain.

History of the Discovery of the Americas

Launching from the Kompas.com page, the recorded discoverer of the Americas was Christopher Columbus, an Italian sailor. However, in its development, this assumption was not proven. There has been speculation that Columbus was not the first person to discover America and interact with its native peoples.

Several Africans, Europeans, and Asians are believed to have reached the Americas before the exploration of Columbus in 1492. However, not all theories are accepted by scientists and historians.

Here are two versions of the theory of the discovery of the Americas.

1. The Vikings

The discoverers of the Americas before Columbus, who are recognized by historians, were the Vikings. The Vikings themselves are a term for Scandinavian people who once explored and plundered Europe and parts of North America around the end of the 8th century.

According to Icelandic history, the leader of the Vikings, Leif Eriksson, became the first person to discover America in around 1000. Long before Christopher Columbus’ voyage. It is suspected that he founded a settlement in L’Anse aux Meadows, located in Newfoundland and Labdaror, Canada.

This opinion is supported by historical and archaeological evidence in the form of the remains of a Viking settlement at L’Anse aux Meadows discovered by Norwegian explorers in 1960. The site is the only evidence of transoceanic contact prior to Christopher Columbus. The site was also designated as a World Heritage by UNESCO in 1978.

2. Christopher Columbus

When Europeans entered the century of exploration, Christopher Columbus became one of the Spanish representatives who sailed the Atlantic Ocean. Initially, Columbus’ goal of making the voyage was to find a route from Europe to countries in the East, namely Asia.

However, during the voyage that began in 1942, it landed in San Salvador, the Bahamas. Not in the East Indies as many have assumed. Further expeditions underway in 1493, 1498, and 1502 took him to parts of South America and Central America.

For his achievements, Columbus was named the discoverer of the Americas. However, in its development, this claim is considered wrong by most people. Columbus is more suitable to be named as the figure who introduced and paved the way for Europeans to America. This is also supported by the notion that Columbus never reached North America during his voyage.

Characteristics of the Americas

Every continent in the world has its own characteristics, America is no exception. Launching from the Idntimes.com page, here are the characteristics of the Americas.

1. Physical Characteristics

In general, the American continent is divided into two regions, namely North America and South America. Although both are located in the Americas. However, both have different climates.

In North America it has a subarctic climate, whereas, the southern region looks slightly tropical. The South American region has two climates, namely the northern part has a tropical climate, while the rest has a cold climate.

This climate division also affects the distribution of flora and fauna. This is due to the existence of diverse landscapes. Brazil has tropical rain forests and the Amazon River so that it is inhabited by a variety of plants and animals. Meanwhile, North America has grasslands that can be used as agriculture.

2. Socio-Cultural Characteristics

When Columbus discovered the Americas and called it the “New World”. Which indicates a narrow understanding in looking at the world, “this world is not only limited to the European continent”.

Increasingly, America is not only inhabited by Europeans. But also Asian and African people also came to America. Thus, there are encounters between various tribes, races, ethnicities, and religions in every region of the American continent.

These meetings created an increasingly diverse American population. This certainly has an impact on social and cultural life. A person or group who comes from outside the Americas does not only come with a body, but also with different social and cultural backgrounds.

This has made America have diverse social and cultural positions that have survived to this day. In socio-cultural development, the American continent also experienced assimilation which gave birth to a new culture.

The variations take the form of religion, language, art, and so on. Language, for example, in North America the predominance is English. However, in South America they use Portuguese or Spanish.

3. Economic Characteristics

The Americas have a distinctive economic pattern seen from the size of the area, the variety of landscapes, and geopolitical influences. The economy in the Americas has an advantage, namely in the field of trade. This is due to several countries with the largest economies in the world—including those in the G20—becoming part of the American continent.

On the American continent alone there are five countries that are officially listed on the G20 website. Among them are Argentina, Brazil, Canada, Mexico and the United States. Economic activity in the Americas is also supported by the strength of the United States as the most influential country in the world.

Countries in the Americas do not only rely on trade. But also mining. Countries in Latin America such as the United States, Venezuela, and others make petroleum a mainstay. There are also several countries that utilize mineral mining as an economic driver.

America’s Potential

Like other countries in the world, America also has natural potential. The following is the natural potential possessed by America which has been summarized from various sources.

1. Mining

America also has potential in the mining sector in the form of new coal, silver, gold, oil and natural gas. A coal-producing region in the Appalachian Mountains of Chile. Meanwhile, the gold and silver producing countries are Mexico and Missouri. The producers of natural gas and oil are in Mexico and Venezuela.

2. Agriculture and Agriculture

Agriculture in America produces rice, cotton, sugar, and coffee. Which agricultural products are scattered in various countries in the Americas. The rice producing countries are Georgia, Texas, California, Carolina and Louisiana.

Meanwhile, sugar-producing countries are Hawaii, Louisiana, Mississippi and Cuba. Coffee producing countries are Guatemala, Argentina, Columbia, and El Salvador. The cotton producing states are Arkansas, Georgia, Nevada, Alabama, Texas, Louisiana and Oklahoma.

3. Marine

Based on FAO data in 2005, America is the fifth largest producer in the world’s fisheries sector after China, Peru, India and Indonesia. In Canada it is a producer of salmon and herring. Herring, sardines and mackerel are produced in Peru. Meanwhile, mackerel is also produced in Chile.

America’s climate

Countries in the Americas have different climates. This is because the American continent has four climates, namely polar climate, subtropical climate, tropical climate, and desert climate. The following is an explanation of the four which have been summarized from the Tata Ruang.id page.

1. Polar climate

Polar climates are characterized by longer periods of cold air. Meanwhile, the summer time period is shorter. The polar climate is in the northernmost and southernmost areas of the Americas, around the west coast of the island of Api-api.

2. Subtropical climate

The subtropical climate can be recognized by the presence of four seasons, namely winter, spring, summer and autumn. The country on the American continent which has 4 seasons is located in the southern part of the northernmost region.

3. Tropical climate

The tropical climate can be identified by high rainfall, humidity and long temperatures throughout the year. Countries on the American continent with tropical climates are located along the Equator, namely Central America and South America.

4. Desert Climate

Countries that have a desert climate usually experience sudden and very fast temperature changes and low rainfall. This climate usually occurs in mountainous areas.

America’s Landscape

The Americas are divided into three parts, namely North America, Central America and South America. All three have different characteristics of the landscape. The following is an explanation of the three which have been summarized from the Tata Ruang.id page.

1. North America

The area of ​​North America stretches from Alaska in the north to Mexico in the south. The climate in this northern part is colder than the rest of the Americas.

In North America there are famous mountains, namely the Rocky Mountains. The mountain range consists of the Cascade, the Western Sierra Madre mountains, and the Sierra Madre Nevada. The North American region also has a wide and famous valley, namely the Grand Canyon.

This northern American continent has a number of long rivers that form the border between Mexico and the United States. These rivers include the Mississippi River, Colodaro River, Missouri River, Arkansas River, and Rio Grande River.

2. Central America

Central America’s landscape is made up of mountains and plains up to 2,500 meters above sea level. The southern part of the Central American region is the canal that connects the Pacific Ocean with the Atlantic Ocean.

3. South America

The landscape of South America consists of mountains, plateaus, lowlands and rivers. South America has the Andes mountains which are the highest mountains on the American continent, which are as high as 6,959 meters above sea level.

In the southern part of the American continent also flows a river which is included in the longest and largest river, namely the Amazon river. The river flows into a number of tributaries covered by the Amazon jungle.

Inside the Amazon forest grows a variety of flora and fauna because it is in a tropical climate. For example bison, bears, alligators, pumas, jaguars, lizards, monkeys, snakes, and so on.